diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-0.txt | 5008 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-0.zip | bin | 97573 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h.zip | bin | 473009 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/56297-h.htm | 7046 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 72119 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_004f.jpg | bin | 58386 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_024f.jpg | bin | 56956 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_030f.jpg | bin | 53831 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_058f.jpg | bin | 57943 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_118f.jpg | bin | 56187 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_165f.jpg | bin | 63301 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_228f.jpg | bin | 64799 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/56297-h/images/i_frontis.jpg | bin | 53757 -> 0 bytes |
13 files changed, 0 insertions, 12054 deletions
diff --git a/old/56297-0.txt b/old/56297-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index f5e6d30..0000000 --- a/old/56297-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5008 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Boy of Old Japan, by Robert Van Bergen - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: A Boy of Old Japan - -Author: Robert Van Bergen - -Release Date: January 3, 2018 [EBook #56297] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A BOY OF OLD JAPAN *** - - - - -Produced by MFR, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - - - - -[Illustration: A BOY OF OLD JAPAN.] - - - - - _A BOY of - OLD JAPAN_ - - _BY - R. VAN BERGEN_ - - _Author of - The Story of Japan, The Story of - China, Heroic Japan, etc., etc._ - - _Illustrated with original - Japanese Color Pictures_ - - _BOSTON - LEE and SHEPARD - M C M I_ - - - - - COPYRIGHT 1901, BY LEE & SHEPARD - - _All rights reserved_ - - A BOY OF OLD JAPAN - - Norwood Press - Berwick & Smith, Norwood, Mass., - U. S. A. - - - - - TO - MY LITTLE SON - HENRY A. S. VAN BERGEN, - IN RECOLLECTION - OF OUR PLEASANT VISIT - TO CAMBRIDGE - - - - -PREFACE - - -I am under deep obligations to the publishers, for giving me an -opportunity to tell the story of the rejuvenation of Japan. I was a -witness, although at that time I did not comprehend the movement, but -I, and those few who are still living, do now. - -From a federation of mutually autonomous oligarchies, Japan was -metamorphosed into an Empire which holds Russia at bay. From a nation -occupying 150,000 square miles, it has expanded by the addition -of Formosa, and its population has grown from thirty millions to -forty-five millions. An oriental people adopted occidental progress, -and within three decades or little more than one generation, digested -and assimilated our progress. - -I have known, and was personally known to the men, whose story I have -endeavored to tell. They are now honored under the simple name of -Genrô,--statesmen of Revolutionary Times. Of the brilliant array of -patriots whose names appear in these pages, only Ito, Inouye, and OKuma -remain! - -I have kept the names. Why should I not? Only honor can be bestowed -upon such patriots as they; and the world delights to honor them. -Besides, there is a healthy spirit for the young in a _true_ story of -devotion, sacrifice, and self-restraint. How often does a child, when -reading an interesting story, ask: “Papa, is this true?” In this case -the father may conscientiously answer: It is. - -All the characters as portrayed in these pages, were living actors -in the great national drama. Of those whose names have never before -appeared in print, Karassu Maru, the only _impulsive_ noble I have -ever known, was the first imperial governor of Yedo. He died in -August, 1872, and I attended his funeral. Honami came to Yedo with the -emperor, but he was soon sent back to Kyoto, where he was placed under -guardianship. - -I have enjoyed the retrospective communication with my old friends. -If my readers do so, they owe the pleasure to the publishers, who -suggested the composition of the book. - - R. VAN BERGEN. - - CAMBRIDGE, MASS., _Nov. 12, 1900_. - - - - -Contents - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I. Japan Asleep 1 - - II. The Old Yashiki 10 - - III. The Messenger 21 - - IV. The Fifth Day of the Eleventh Month 32 - - V. The Council of the Clan 44 - - VI. Young Kano Grows Up 55 - - VII. Kano’s Journey to Yedo 65 - - VIII. Yokohama in 1859 76 - - IX. New Experience 88 - - X. Friendship or Hatred 97 - - XI. Choshiu Yashiki 107 - - XII. Sonno Joï! 118 - - XIII. Plotting 129 - - XIV. Within the Palace 141 - - XV. Underground Rumbling 151 - - XVI. The Court Aroused 161 - - XVII. A Conference 171 - - XVIII. Flight 184 - - XIX. Battle and Defeat 195 - - XX. Drilling 206 - - XXI. Down With Tokugawa 216 - - XXII. Conclusion 226 - - - - -Illustrations - - - Inouye in Samurai Costume Frontispiece - - PAGE - - Peace reigned over the country 5 - - A Japanese Family 24 - - Ito’s mother, suffering from rheumatism, to receive - a massage treatment from one of the servants 31 - - It is really a day devoted to Hachiman, the god of war 59 - - He was in Kamishimo 118 - - The friends were standing in the garden of a Teahouse 165 - - But the houses are still as they were before 229 - - - - -A BOY OF OLD JAPAN - - - - -I - -JAPAN ASLEEP - - -Japan had been asleep for more than two hundred years. About the time -when the Pilgrim fathers landed in what is now known as the New England -States, the man who ruled over Japan had made up his mind that he would -have nothing more to do with the people of Europe, and he gave orders -that no more foreigners should be admitted. He made one exception in -favor of the people of Holland, but on condition that only a very -small number of them should reside in Japan at a time; and they must -be satisfied with the tiny island of Deshima[1] in the harbor of -Nagasaki,[2] and promise that they would obey the governor of that city. - -It was not many years before this time, when the Japanese had been glad -to receive every European, but they had found out that the Portuguese -and Spaniards wished to be masters of their country, and so their -kindness had changed first into dislike and afterwards into hate. -The Portuguese had taught many Japanese about our Lord, and a number -of them had become Christians. But the Shogun[3] ordered that all -Christians must be killed, and thousands of them were put to death. -He gave also orders that all large ships must be destroyed, and that -thereafter only small vessels could be built. Besides, he threatened to -put to death any Japanese who should return to his country after having -been abroad, even if he had been carried away against his will. No -foreigner could come to Japan and no Japanese could leave his country. -They could, therefore, learn nothing from other people. That is why I -said that Japan had been asleep for more than two hundred years. - -In all that long time there had been no change. Just as Japan was in -1621, so it was in 1853. The houses were still built in exactly the -same way, the men and boys dressed exactly as their ancestors had done -before, and so did the women and girls, and they lived in the same -manner. - -The people worked hard from early in the morning until late at night. -The merchants, mechanics, and farmers, toiled from the beginning of -the year to the end, without any Sundays or holidays, except on New -Year’s day, and perhaps a few days later. They had nothing to say in -the government, and belonged to the Lord on whose estate they were -living. The whole of Japan was divided into about three hundred of such -estates; some of them very large and others again very small. Over each -of these estates was a daimiyo,[4] or lord, who was assisted by as many -samurai,[5] or knights, as the estate could support. These knights -were the civil officers of the estate while there was peace; but as -soon as war broke out they were soldiers, always ready to go into -battle, and to die for their lord. - -The greatest of all the daimiyo was the Shogun[3], or -Commander-in-chief, who resided in his large castle at Yedo.[6] It was -he who made the laws for all the Japanese, and he had so many samurai -that not even the greatest daimiyo dared disobey him. But, although he -had as much power as any emperor, still he was not the real Emperor -of Japan. Many, many years before there was any Shogun, the country -had been governed by the ancestors of a man who was living quietly in -Kyoto.[7] His house was shaped like a temple, and stood in the most -beautiful grounds that can be imagined. When the people spoke of him, -they whispered: Tenshi Sama,[8] for he was to them the Child of Heaven, -the descendant, as they thought, of the gods who created Japan. - -But Tenshi Sama, they believed, was too mighty and too great to care -about such a small thing as governing the people. All he had to do -was to pray to the gods to take care of Japan, and they would surely -hear his prayers. Since the first Shogun ruled over Japan, there had -been many wars and much bloodshed, because many daimiyo wanted larger -estates than they possessed. All these wars ceased in the year 1600, -when the Daimiyo of Tokugawa,[9] named Iyeyasu,[10] defeated his rivals -at Sekigahara,[11] and caused the Tenshi Sama to make him Shogun. - -[Illustration: “PEACE REIGNED OVER THE COUNTRY.”] - -Iyeyasu was such a brave general, and besides an able as well as a -generous man, that the country began to enjoy peace. The great daimiyo -tried once more to shake off his rule, but they could not do it. In -1615 the last battle was fought, and the daimiyo were defeated so -badly that they gave in. Iyeyasu punished some of them very severely. -He took a very large part of the estate of Lord Mori,[12] the Daimiyo -of Choshiu,[13] and divided it among two of his sons. Mori henceforth -was the enemy of Tokugawa, and so were all the great daimiyo who had -suffered defeat. But Iyeyasu ordered them to build yashiki,[14] or -mansions, in Yedo, and to live there half of the year. Iyemitsu,[15] -the grandson of Iyeyasu and the third Tokugawa Shogun, commanded them -to leave their wives and children at Yedo, where he held them in his -power. He made laws for the people, the samurai, and the daimiyo, and, -since he had an army of 80,000 samurai on his own estates, he was -strong enough to make the daimiyo obey him. - -Thus all war ceased in Japan and peace reigned over the country. The -merchant plied his trade, the mechanic worked at his craft, and the -peasant toiled in his field, as their fathers had done before them, and -they brought up their sons to do as they had been taught. There was, -therefore, no progress; and there was very little liberty. - -The only people who really did have something to say, were the samurai -or knights. They did not work, but were paid by the daimiyo whom they -served. They were very proud of being _gentlemen_, and never failed -to speak and act as they believed was right. Thus Japan continued -until the year 1853. Then a number of “fire-ships,” their smoke stacks -belching forth a dense smoke, steamed up Yedo Bay. The cliffs echoed -the throbbing of the engines. In vain did the Shogun’s guard boats -warn them to go back. They did not heed these commands any more than -when the tide turned, and the current tried to stop their progress.[A] -On, on they went toward the capital of the Shogun, until the shoaling -water warned them to cast anchor. Their commander was notified that he -must leave, but he replied that he carried a letter for the Shogun, and -would not go before he had delivered it. The government at Yedo did not -know what to do. The Japanese are very shrewd, and understood quite -well that the samurai, armed with bow and arrow and in old fashioned -lacquered armor, were no match for guns and cannon. The government was -_afraid to refuse_ to receive the letter, and a year later it signed a -treaty, because _it was afraid_ to enter upon war with these strangers. -The officers of the government knew the strength of the foreigners, but -the samurai of the other daimiyo did not; and when they heard that the -Shogun had entered into a treaty, _because he was afraid_, they became -angry and excited. From that time it was certain that the Tokugawa -princes would be Shogun no longer. The anger of the samurai increased -when a new treaty was made, in 1858, between the government of Japan -and that of the United States through Mr. Townsend Harris. For the -following ten years there was trouble in Japan, and the samurai began -to think that Tenshi Sama should drive the foreigners into the ocean. -That was easier said than done, but the samurai did succeed in taking -the government away from the Tokugawa, and Tenshi Sama became emperor -indeed, and he is so still. - -Mutsuhito,[16] the Emperor of Japan, was only a boy of fifteen when -he was taken out of his beautiful palace in 1867. He is now (1900) -forty-eight years old, and has seen Japan grow from a poor little -country into a great and strong empire. Our story begins in the year -1858, and will show how a Japanese samurai boy was brought up. - - - - -II - -THE OLD YASHIKI - - -Great preparations for receiving guests were being made in the Kano -Yashiki at Nagato. To-morrow would be the fifth day of the eleventh -month of the fourth year of the oldest son and heir, and the boy would -be invested with the _hakama_[17] of the samurai. - -There would be a great gathering of the Choshiu clan, for the Kano -family had been great in the council, and was trusted by daimiyo and -samurai alike. The history of the Mori family was as much the history -of that of Kano, at least ever since Kano Shimpei had tried to keep his -lord from fighting Iyeyasu. The Mori of that time had refused to heed -his knight’s advice, and sent him away in disgrace. But Kano would not -desert his master. He had followed him to Osaka, and when the battle -was lost, had saved his lord by continuing to fight until Mori was -rescued by a small band of devoted samurai. Kano himself died covered -with wounds. The Daimiyo of Choshiu had never forgotten the advice nor -the heroic death of Kano Shimpei. They had honored his descendants, and -every Kano had tried to show his great loyalty to his lord. - -The Kano Yashiki stood within the outer moat of Choshiu’s castle. A -massive gateway faced the street. On each side was a high, plastered -wall covered with tiles. This wall surrounded the yashiki and its -grounds, and gave it the shape of a perfect square. The doors of the -gate were of heavy wood, plated with iron and studded with huge iron -bolts. They swung inward on hinges, but were opened only for the -daimiyo, if he should honor his samurai with a visit, or for a knight -of equal rank of the owner. For all other callers there was a little -gate by the side, where the guard could examine all that entered or -left. - -A short but broad road, composed of pulverized shells mixed with soft -white sand, led from the gate to the samurai residence. It was a fine -two story building, with verandahs running round the house. It was -built upon posts about two feet high and resting upon stones so that, -if an earthquake should happen, the building could move with the wave -of the earth. The verandahs were made of kayaki[18] wood, and polished -until it shone like a mirror. The building was really a large and -strong shed, with thick posts upholding the roof with its heavy tiles. -There were no walls. Paper sho ji,[19] or sliding doors, set loosely -in grooves, took their place. They could be easily taken out, to allow -fresh air. These grooves were so arranged that the whole floor could -easily be changed into several apartments or rooms. The upper story -had a balcony at the back, overlooking the spacious and beautifully -kept gardens, with ponds, little hills, and copses of trees. At the end -of the balcony as well as on the verandahs were closets, holding the -ame,[20] or rain doors. These were slid into deep grooves along the -outer edges of the verandahs and balcony at night or when a storm arose. - -The owner of the house was sitting in one of the rooms at the back of -the house. He was a man of about thirty, of middle size, but strongly -built. His hibachi[21] stood before him, but he was evidently in deep -thought. He did not expect any visitors, for he had taken off his -hakama, and was sitting in his simple cotton kimono,[22] or gown. - -Suddenly he clapped his hands three times. The sound of: hai, hai![23] -came from a distance, and presently one of the sho ji was slid aside, -and Mrs. Kano appeared dutifully on hands and knees. She could not be -seen very well, as she bowed her head upon her hands, as a salute to -her master and husband, but when he remained silent, she raised her -head and asked softly:[24] - -“Did you call?” - -She could be seen now. Mrs. Kano was perhaps eighteen, certainly not -more than nineteen years old. Her jet black hair was done up in a -matronly coil and glistening with patchouli or oil from the cactus -plant. Her forehead was fair, but eye-brows she had none, for a -Japanese wife, before her marriage, was compelled to pull them out. -Her teeth were of a shining jet, another custom of married ladies. -But, disfigured as she was, her soft and gentle voice showed that Mrs. -Kano had been taught the Onna Daigaku,[25] or the Greater Learning for -Women, and that she was willing to try to please her husband. - -When he heard his wife’s voice, Kano looked at her, bowed slightly, and -said: - -“Have all preparations been made for to-morrow’s reception?” - -“Yes,” she replied, “all your orders have been obeyed.” - -“Very well,” he said, and she withdrew. - -Kano was thinking of his son. He remembered the death of his father, -when he was only eighteen years old. How he had looked up to him! How -gently, and yet how firmly had his father trained him in the manly -exercises of the samurai, hardening his body to despise luxury and -ready to bear cold or heat at any time. How he had taught him the -family history, with its fine record of loyalty and self sacrifice, and -how he had commanded him to follow in the same path. Kano felt that -he had done so. He remembered the illness which had struck the strong -man so suddenly and with fatal ending, and which caused the son such a -deep pain. His father’s last words: “The wise man of China says that -the greatest disrespect to a father is not to have any son,” had caused -him to marry as soon as the time of mourning was over. And now he was a -father himself, and the time had come that he must begin to train the -child. - -Had he done his duty, according to the laws and custom of the samurai? -Why, certainly. On the seventy-fifth day after its birth, the child -had left off its baby-linen. On the hundred and twentieth day it had -been weaned. Every ceremony had been observed as it should be by a -gentleman of Kano’s family. Kano’s own brother had fed the child, and -My Lord’s cousin had acted as sponsor. He had taken the child on his -left knee and as weaning father had taken of the sacred rice which had -been offered to the gods. He had dipped his chop-sticks three times -in it, and then placed them in the mouth of the child as if giving it -some of the rice juice. He had followed the honored custom to feed -the child three times from the five cakes made of rice meal. When the -three cups of sake[26] were brought on the tray, the sponsor drank them -and offered one to the child, now restored to his guardian. The boy -pretended to drink two cups, and the sponsor had produced his present. -Every ceremony had been observed, and the feast which followed had -shown that Kano intended to follow in the footsteps of his fathers, in -honoring the customs of Old Japan. - -Again on the fifteenth day of the eleventh month, when the boy’s -hair was allowed to grow, not a single ceremony was neglected; and -to-morrow Kano would prove once more that he loved the customs of his -father and was willing to abide by them. - -Again a sho ji slid open, but this time it attracted Kano’s attention. -A servant girl kneeling on the door sill was waiting until her master -should speak. - -“What is it?” he asked. - -With a deep drawn breath, as if overwhelmed at the honor of being -spoken to, she replied: - -“Mr. Hattori[27] wishes to speak to your honor.” - -Kano rose hastily and, opening a cupboard, seized his hakama and -slipped it on over his kimono. Thus prepared to receive his old-time -friend, he ordered the girl to admit him. A moment later, and the -visitor entered with a shuffling gait, and, falling upon his knees, -three times touched his head to the ground. Kano replied in the same -manner, each in turn repeating the same ceremonious phrases, which -custom demanded of men of their rank. - -At last Hattori was seated upon the cushion which the servant had -placed for him, and tea was brought in. When the servant had withdrawn, -the two men smoked in silence, until Hattori knocked the ashes out of -his pipe, and asked: - -“Have you seen him?” - -Kano raised his brows slightly, and answered: - -“I do not understand you. Do you mean the sponsor? Certainly, I have -seen him.” - -“Ah! you are thinking of to-morrow! No, I do not mean the sponsor or -any one connected with your family. Bah! I mean the new guest we must -entertain, and who will offer you his congratulations.” - -“A new guest!” exclaimed Kano. “Surely, I must be growing dull, for I -fail to catch your meaning.” - -“Well, then,” said Hattori, cautiously looking into the garden, -“another metsuké[28] arrived this afternoon from Yedo, and was bold -enough to come to the castle and demand to be admitted. I was ordered -to receive him and find out what he wanted. When I came into the room -where he was waiting, he introduced himself by handing me a letter from -the Go rojiu,[29] to the clan. There were enough councillors present to -open it, so I excused myself and called our friends. It was very brief -and to the point. The Go rojiu desires to mention our clan as a model -for Japan, and has therefore sent this fellow to report.” - -“What is his name?” - -“Sawa.”[30] - -“Sawa, Sawa,” repeated Kano slowly. “I think I know the name. How old -is he, do you think?” - -“He must be forty at least, and he seems cut out for his work. His oily -talk is disgusting; and while he flatters you, his eyes are restlessly -peeping in every nook and corner.” - -“What have you done with him?” - -“The usual thing. We accepted the letter and told him that we would -deliberate carefully about it, and let him have an answer in a couple -of days. He bowed himself out and was carried in his norimono[31] to -the hotel. But I hear he has sent his servants to find out if he can -not rent a vacant yashiki. So, you see, he intends to remain some time, -and send in a full report.” - -Kano was silent. He was evidently displeased; suddenly his attention as -well as that of his friend was drawn to a soft footstep on the gravel -walk of the garden, and presently a young man appeared at the steps -leading from the verandah to the path. He faced the room and bowed low. -Both returned the salutation, but Kano muttered between his teeth: -“Ito![32] What on earth brings him here?” - - - - -III - -THE MESSENGER - - -The intruder, if he may be so called, mounted the steps and, entering -the room, saluted in the usual manner. He was invited to approach, -and, clapping his hands, Kano ordered the servant to bring in another -cushion, and fresh tea. When these had been brought, and the visitor -was seated, Kano said: - -“When did you leave Yedo?” - -“Just a week ago.” - -“Is there anything new?” - -“Why, I think so. It is said openly by Tokugawa men that the foreign -devils, with whom the Go rojiu have made a treaty, will be permitted to -settle down at Yokohama.” - -“Settle down! What do you mean?” exclaimed Hattori. - -“Where is Yokohama?” asked Kano. - -Ito replied first to the question of his host. - -“Yokohama is a little distance from the Tokaido,[33] near Kanagawa, the -last post station at this side of Yedo.” Then, turning toward Hattori, -he continued:--“Yes; the new treaty permits them to buy land and to -build houses.” - -“But,” said Hattori, aghast, “that means that Japan is invaded. These -foreign devils have come with their fire ships and guns, and by threats -have accomplished their purpose. What has become of the Tokugawa? Have -they lost their manhood, to submit to such a disgrace!” - -“Softly!” said Kano. “There may be reasons why the Go rojiu has -permitted them to come so close to Yedo. It must be so. It must be a -trap to destroy the intruders in such a manner that others like them -will think twice before they come again.” - -“I wish I could think so,” said Ito. “No! I believe that the Tokugawa -are afraid of an invasion. Their samurai, with the exception of those -of Mito and Aidzu,[34] are not worth their salt. Have you ever seen, -during your residence in Yedo, a Tokugawa Knight practising at arms. -They are quick enough to draw their swords upon a beggar or a merchant, -but when they meet one of the samurai of the southern clans, they fly -to cover. No! Since Ii Naosuke[35] is regent, he has looked closely -into the forces which the Tokugawa can muster, if a war should break -out, and he thinks that it must be avoided at any cost. Of course, he -expects that the samurai of the great clans will be furious, and he -has sent a large number of spies to report what is said. One of these -gentry was sent here. I heard of it in time to follow him, and I came -on to warn you.” - -Both Kano and Hattori expressed their thanks, and Kano said: - -“But if the Tokugawa are not able to prevent a handful of foreigners -from landing, how can they expect that the great southern clans will -obey them?” - -“Oh!” replied Ito, smiling grimly; “we have been obedient for so many -years, trembling when the Go rojiu frowned, that the regent believes it -will continue forever. He had a meeting of all the daimiyo connected -with his clan, and tried to convince them that we must now receive -these foreigners, and try to learn all that they know. Then, when we -can handle their fire ships and their cannon, we may expect to drive -them into the sea.” - -[Illustration: A JAPANESE FAMILY.] - -Hattori put his hand upon his dagger, but Kano, with a friendly motion -of his hand, calmed him. “There may be something in that,” he said -thoughtfully. “Mind you!” he continued, “I do not underrate Japanese -courage, but we do not know the strength of these barbarians. We have -been living like frogs in a well. It is easy enough to engage in war, -but it is best to know the number of the enemy, before you engage in -what may prove too heavy odds. Such a thing would be foolish. But we -may come to a settlement with the Tokugawa. If indeed, their samurai -have lost their courage, then my lord of Choshiu may recover the land -from which he was robbed, and I may avenge my ancestor’s death. When -will the councillors of the clan meet?” - -“The day after to-morrow,” replied Hattori. - -Kano clapped his hands, and ordered the servant to send up dinner for -his guests and himself. Hattori and Ito made some excuses, but were -easily induced to remain. - -Small tables were brought in and placed before each man. First sake or -wine made from rice, was served hot, and a small stone bottle placed -near each person; then there was _suimono_, a sort of vegetable soup, -after which rice was ladled out into cups or bowls. A number of side -dishes, such as pickled _daikon_, a sort of giant radish, _tsubo_ or -stewed sea-weed, and soy, a sauce, were enjoyed by the samurai. - -The conversation had been interrupted when the servants entered, and -was not resumed. The men spoke of the ceremony to take place the next -day; and Ito was invited. Before leaving, however, Kano told Hattori -that he would ask the councillors of the clan to remain after the -reception was over, so that they might discuss their plans for the -future. - -Ito and Hattori bowed good-bye, as they were going in different -directions. Each carried a lantern, for it was dark, and there was no -street lighting in Japan at that time. At the corner of the street, Ito -stopped as if in doubt. Then, after a few moments, he seemed to make up -his mind, for he turned to the left, and went hastily toward the castle -entrance. The heavy gate was closed, but the little side gate stood -ajar. Ito entered, and giving his name to the officer of the guard, -went along the barracks where many of the samurai of lower rank dwelt. -At last he stopped before a small door, and knocked softly. He heard a -shuffling of feet, and a woman’s voice demanded who was there. - -“Is Mr. Inouye[36] in?” he asked. - -“Yes.” - -“Tell him that Ito Saburo wishes to see him.” - -The woman seemed satisfied, for the door slid open, and Ito entered. -Without waiting he mounted the steps, and opening a sho ji, stepped -into a room, dimly lit by a rushlight placed in a paper lantern. Ito -fell on his knees, and saluted in the usual manner, which salute was -returned by the owner of the room, a man of Ito’s age, but of more -slender build. - -The two men had not met for two years; for Ito had been ordered to -remain at the Choshiu yashiki in Yedo, and Inouye’s duties had kept him -at Nagato. But they had corresponded by every courier carrying letters -to and from the capital, for they had been friends ever since they were -little boys. Yet when they met after such a long absence, there was no -glad “Helloh!” with a hearty clasp of the hand, as we would meet an old -friend. Pleased as they were to see each other again, they had been -taught that good breeding demands that gentlemen should always show -courtesy and respect to others of their own rank. Certain sentences -must be uttered before any ordinary conversation can begin. Therefore -Ito said: - -“I was very rude the last time we met, but I hope you have forgiven me.” - -“No,” replied Inouye, “it was I who was rude, and I pray you to -overlook it.” - -It is needless to say that neither of them had really been rude, but -custom demanded that this should be said, and the same custom prevails -in Japan to-day. We think that it is foolish, and the Japanese think us -very rude, because we do not obey that custom. - -After these customs had been observed, the two friends sat down, and -Ito said: - -“Has any progress been made in your studies of the barbarian nations?” - -“Nothing worth boasting. I have been twice to Nagasaki to try if I -could pick up some of the books of the Hollanders, but the Tokugawa -officers will not permit any stranger to approach the island of -Deshima, unless they are bribed with more money than I possess. Still, -I have learned enough to know that Japan is not in a condition to fight -the barbarians, and I am afraid, I think, that the regent was right in -submitting to their demands.” - -“I do not think so,” replied Ito. “Right! What right has the Tokuwaga -to sell an inch of Japan’s soil. It does not belong to them. It is the -property of Tenshi Sama, if it belongs to anybody. It makes me angry to -think that we can no longer boast that - - The foot of the invader has never trod our soil.” - -“There will be no invasion,” said Inouye. “These men only want to -trade. If they had intended to use force, they would have done so when -they came the second time, with a large fleet. No! I do not believe -that our country is in danger, at least not for some years. But they -may come as spies to find out what opportunity there is to obtain -possession of Japan. The Yedo government should try to discover what -the intentions of the barbarians really are.” - -“The Yedo government is only anxious to make money. You do not know, -Inouye, how good it feels to breathe the pure air of Nagato. It is -stifling at Yedo. Spies, spies are everywhere. The Tokugawa samurai -seem to have forgotten that they are gentlemen, and how a samurai -should behave. They are quick enough to draw their swords upon men who -cannot defend themselves, but they are nimble with their feet when hard -blows may be expected. If Japan must go to war, we, the samurai of the -south will do the fighting. The day of the Tokuwaga is past.” - -There was a brief silence, when Inouye said: - -“I have not yet asked you what brings you here. I had not heard that -you had been relieved from duty at Yedo.” - -“I was not relieved. But we were informed that the Go rojiu intended -to send new spies to the southern diamiyo, and I was ordered to inform -the councillors of the clan. It seems that Sawa, the chief spy, arrived -just before me. I suppose I shall be told to return to Yedo, but I hope -not. At any rate I shall see you before I leave.” - -After the usual salutations Ito rose and lit his candle. After leaving -the door, he went through the grounds to the opposite barracks, where -his mother lived. Knocking at the little wicket, he was admitted with -many bows and glad exclamations. These he returned with some pleasant -words, and entered the sitting-room. Presently his mother entered, and -both knelt down and saluted in the respectful and courteous manner of -their people. There was no kissing or even handshaking; both were, of -course, very happy, but Japanese law forbade showing joy, even in the -expression of the face. Ito would have obeyed at once any order his -mother might have given him; but she considered him as the head of the -family, and showed that she looked upon him as the master of the house. - -[Illustration: “HIS MOTHER, SUFFERING FROM RHEUMATISM, TO RECEIVE -MASSAGE TREATMENT FROM ONE OF THE SERVANTS.”] - -They chatted for half an hour about their acquaintances and then -retired. Ito’s mother, suffering from rheumatism, to receive a massage -treatment from one of the servants. - - - - -IV - -THE FIFTH DAY OF THE ELEVENTH MONTH - - -The day broke calm and smiling. Japan, especially those parts around -the Inland Sea, has a lovely climate. It is seldom that the sky is not -of a deep blue color, and the days are few when children cannot play or -walk in the streets. They are rarely kept in the house. Young babies -are securely fastened upon the backs of children six or seven years -old, and sent into the streets. There are no noisy games. Girls play -sometimes battledore and shuttlecock, but the boys are too dignified. -American boys would be surprised if they saw two Japanese school -friends meet in the street. They do not approach with a hop, skip and -jump, or clap each other on the shoulder. Oh no! They stop as soon as -they meet, take off their caps, for all Japanese schoolboys wear now a -sort of soldier cap, and then bow almost to the ground. Then they draw -a deep breath, and each continues on his way. - -The great difference between Japanese and American boys of the same -age, is that all our boys are fond of fun, and we are glad to see them -have a good time, while a Japanese boy would not be able to understand -what we call fun. Our boys would soon grow sick if there were not some -time in the day when they could make all the noise they wished. If a -Japanese boy should make even the slightest unnecessary noise at home, -his parents would think that the world had turned topsy-turvy. From his -earliest youth, the boy is trained not to show his feelings. In all the -years of my life in Japan, I have never seen a boy of over six years -old with tears in his eyes. - -It is eleven o’clock, and the guests begin to arrive. They come mostly -on foot, for they all live in the neighborhood; but there are a few -who hold such a high rank that they can only leave their yashiki -in a sedan chair, or on horseback. A servant brings a large bundle, -carefully wrapped. It is taken to the back room which has been made -much larger by the removal of several sho ji. Here Mr. Kano sits in -hakama and _haori_,[37] receiving each guest as he enters according to -his rank in the clan. To some his bows are deeper and more prolonged, -with others they are more simple, although at the entrance of every -guest, his forehead touches his hands, spread out upon the floor before -him. The visitors take their places about the room in the order of -their rank, each saluting the host as he enters and thereafter the -guests. Waitresses in a kneeling posture serve tea. At last a man of -dignified bearing, clothed in rich silk, enters, and after saluting, -sits down upon a cushion prepared for him near the master of the house. -Kano is about to clap his hands, as a signal for his son to be brought -in, when a man-servant opens a sho ji, and kneeling with his head -almost touching the mats, crawls toward his master. He whispers: - -“Mr. Sawa of Yedo desires to present his respects.” - -Kano slightly raises his eyebrows, but by a slight bending forward -indicates that the new-comer shall be admitted. After a few moments the -latest guest enters and prostrates himself before his host, who returns -the compliment. Kano with a slight motion of the arm indicates the -place which he intends him to occupy, and Sawa, crouching and bowing to -the guests proceeds in that direction. It is between the seats of the -councillors and those of the chief samurai, and, as it happens, next to -that of Ito. - -Not a single glance showed that the visitor was unwelcome. No -expression of approval had escaped their lips upon the entrance of -a popular member of the clan, and not a sign showed that Sawa’s -appearance at this time was resented. They sat unmoved, like the North -American Indian chiefs. Kano clapped his hands, and the servant brought -in a board, resembling one of our checkerboards; it was placed upon the -mat near the father, facing the point of the compass which had been -declared lucky by a fortune teller. The gentleman at Kano’s side then -clapped his hands, and another servant brought in the package which -had been delivered before. It was unwrapped, and contained a Kimono of -fine silk, with beautifully embroidered storks and tortoises, fir trees -and bamboos. This was as it should be. Storks and tortoises promised -long life to the boy; for the Japanese believed that the stork lives -a thousand years, and the tortoise ten thousand. The fir tree never -changes its color, therefore the child will possess an unchanging -virtuous heart, and the bamboo, as it shoots up straight, will give him -an upright mind. - -The servant holds up the dress for the inspection of the guests, who, -after looking at it, express their approval by bowing low, and a deep -drawn sigh. Presently Mrs. Kano, who has been watching the ceremony -from a near apartment through a convenient slit in the sho ji, enters -leading the boy. Both kneel at the entrance and after touching the -ground three times with the forehead, the child is brought to his -father, who places him upon the checkerboard facing the east, because -that is the lucky point. The mother dresses him in the Kimono presented -by the sponsor, and puts on the hakama; then the child receives an -imitation sword and dirk, which are placed in his sash. Then sake is -brought in and the sponsor and child exchange cups. This ends the -ceremony which admits the three-year-old boy among the samurai of the -clan. - -Mother and son, after repeating their salutations, leave the room and -refreshments are served. Gradually the sense of ceremony disappears, -and conversation becomes more general. Kano, apparently deeply engaged -in talking with the sponsor, keeps a watchful eye over his guests, -and frequently casts a glance toward the spot occupied by Sawa. The -sponsor, an elderly gentleman of dignified bearing, at last notices -his host’s looks, and says: - -“Who is that gentleman? He is a stranger to me, and I cannot -distinguish his coat of arms.” - -“He bears the Tokugawa crest, your lordship,” replies Kano, “and is the -new O Metsuke, whom the Council at Yedo have kindly sent to report upon -our model clan.” - -The old gentleman did not notice the sarcasm. “When did he arrive, and -why was his arrival not made known to me?” he inquired in a slightly -offended tone. Kano bowed, and replied: - -“Mr. Sawa arrived yesterday afternoon, and presented his letter at -the castle, where Councillor Hattori was ordered to receive him. As -we had not been notified by the Go rojiu of their intention to send -us a metsuké, Mr. Hattori thought that the letter should be submitted -to the council of the clan. I have noticed that he has spoken to the -councillors, who will wait here until the other guests have withdrawn. -If it please your lordship, we shall be glad to have the benefit of -your advice.” - -“No, I cannot spare the time, and the matter is of no great -importance,” declared his lordship, continuing his repast. Presently -they were joined by Hattori, for whom a cushion was brought, and who, -after the prescribed bows of respect, took no further notice of Mori’s -cousin. - -“I think, friend Kano,” he said, “that you may as well keep an eye -upon your honored guest, Mr. Sawa. The fellow seems to think that he -is at Yedo, instead of in a gentleman’s yashiki and that he can do -as he pleases. He has filled his sake cup quite often, and has been -offensive, to judge by the looks of Ito.” - -“I have perceived it,” replied Kano, “but Ito will, I am sure, keep his -temper, and settle with the intruder upon a more favorable occasion. -I am more afraid of the young fellows who seem to have heard some -insulting remarks. Pray, entertain his lordship, while I dismiss the -guests.” Without waiting for a reply, Kano rose and, bowing before -each guest, advanced toward Sawa. There he knelt down and performed the -usual salutations somewhat stiffly. Sawa returned them as well as he -could. - -When they had regained their upright positions, Kano addressed his -self-invited guest, and said in a tone loud enough for some young -samurai close by to hear: - -“I am deeply grateful to the Go rojiu for remembering me on this -occasion. I do not know how I deserved this honor.” - -Sawa had some difficulty to hide a grin. Did this country bumpkin -really fancy that the great Council of the Tokugawa cared anything -about him or his family. Amused at the thought, he bowed, and said: - -“The Go rojiu no doubt, if it had only known of the event, would have -been glad to honor his host upon this occasion. It was known,” he -added more soberly and looking sharply at Kano, “that the Choshiu -clan was directed almost entirely by the wisdom of his entertainer, -and the question had been discussed to secure his services for the -Council. Unfortunately the law of Iyeyasu forbade it. Only members -of the Tokugawa clan were permitted to serve the Shogun. But this -did not prevent the Council from profiting by the wisdom of Kano the -Councillor, and it was to secure this benefit that he, Sawa, had been -directed to reside in the clan.” - -Kano bowed, and replied. “It is a very great honor, indeed, and, no -doubt, well deserved by such an able man as my guest. Pray, make -yourself at home in the clan. You will find every Choshiu gentleman -glad to receive a samurai from the capital, where he has advantages to -learn manners which we in the country do not possess. But every samurai -is glad to excel in chivalry, and we of Choshiu no less than those of -other clans.” - -Again they bowed, and Sawa resumed: - -“I understand that this joyful event will be followed by a meeting of -the Honorable Council?” - -“The regular meeting is to-morrow,” replied Kano. “I have received no -notice of any extra meeting, nor have I sent out any. It seems to me -that you are misinformed.” - -“Forgive me, my host. Who is that young man, who happened to be my -neighbor during the most interesting ceremony? I fancy that I have seen -him at Yedo.” - -“That is probably so. Indeed, it may have been very recently, for he -arrived yesterday. Choshiu’s yashiki seems to have suffered severely -from the last earthquake, and expensive repairs are necessary. Our -officer in charge thought it necessary to send a special messenger, but -why he did not commission an older man, is beyond my comprehension.” - -Sawa began to perceive that this country bumpkin was quite able to -parry his thrusts; he did not want to give offense, and besides began -to feel sleepy. He therefore informed his host of his intention to -return to his inn. Kano raised no objection, and after the usual leave -taking, escorted his guest to the door, and saw him leave the gate. -Calling a young samurai, he bade him see that Sawa did not return to -the yashiki, whereupon he re-entered the room. The other guests, seeing -that the councillors lingered, withdrew all except Ito, who was asked -to wait as he might be wanted. - - - - -V - -THE COUNCIL OF THE CLAN - - -Before he seated himself, Kano called his chief samurai, and told him -to have the sho ji put in so as to make the apartment of the usual -size. He also ordered him to have several men patrol the garden, and -to see that no one could approach the house, while he himself was to -move noiselessly through the adjoining rooms, and answer for it that -there should be no listener. Knowing that his orders would be obeyed, -he sat down, ordered tea and hibachi to be brought, and without further -ceremony opened the meeting. - -“Honorable Councillors,” he said, “two messengers have come from -Yedo. You have, no doubt, noticed them, for both were here during the -ceremony in my humble house. The first one is the new metsuke, Sawa, -whom it has pleased the Go rojiu to appoint to our clan. When Mr. -Hattori informed me of his arrival, I could not understand the cause of -his appointment. Our clan has had no trouble with the Tokugawa for many -years; and, although there can be no friendship between the house of -Iyeyasu and that of Mori, there has been no open hostility. - -“The arrival of the second messenger explains the situation. The Go -rojiu has entered into a new treaty with the barbarians, and permitted -them to dwell at Yokohama, near Kanagawa on the Tokaido. This fine -piece of news is discussed openly at Yedo, and there is no doubt of its -truth. The Regent, naturally I think, feels somewhat anxious as to how -the great clans will receive it, and has probably sent metsuke to other -model clans besides Choshiu. The news is so important that our friend -Hattori agreed with me to ask you to discuss it here privately, so that -we may decide upon the policy of our clan. Honorable Mr. OKubo, what is -your opinion?” - -The person thus addressed was the oldest of the councillors, a man -grown gray in the service of his clan. He was silent for some moments, -gravely sipping his tea. Then he said: - -“These questions are not for me to answer. I am only acquainted with -Old Japan, as it has existed for hundreds of years, and I am afraid -the arrival of these barbarians is a menace to our country. I don’t -know them, and do not wish to know them; but I do know that, before the -Tokugawa were thought of, the barbarians came, and were received kindly -by the children of the gods. What was their gratitude? They began to -teach a cult which destroyed the relations between parent and child, -master and servant, lord and retainer. They were finally expelled, but -it cost years of strife, and myriads of lives before their teaching was -rooted out of the country. Since then order has been restored, and we -have had peace. Now the barbarians will be admitted again, and fresh -troubles will commence. Younger and stronger heads than mine will be -needed to save our clan and the house of Mori, although, if it comes to -war, I shall claim the honor of dying fighting for our lord.” - -All bowed but protested that OKubo was strong and able enough to lead -the councils of the clan; but he replied that his time of usefulness -was past, and Kano, out of respect for his wish, addressed the -councillor next in years. That gentleman did not see any danger to the -clan. Yokohama was a long distance from Nagato, and if there was to be -trouble with the barbarians, the Tokugawa would be the first sufferers, -for it was within the territory belonging to the Shogun. As to the -metsuke, why, they must do as they had done before with such fellows, -surround him with spies of their own. - -Thus every councillor spoke in turn, the opinion of each being received -with grave courtesy. A little more interest was shown when Hattori -began to speak. It was known that he was in Kano’s confidence, and it -was a standing joke that Kano’s advice was always adopted. - -“Honorable Councillors,” said Hattori, bowing deeply, “it ill becomes a -man of my age to dispute the opinions of the leaders who for many years -have guided the policy of our clan with brilliant success. If I venture -to differ with them, it may be from lack of wisdom and experience, but -I shall be glad if I am corrected. It is only by the kind teaching -of such men as the honorable councillors, that men of my age can be -prepared to follow in their footsteps. - -“I am afraid that the coming of the barbarians promises evil days, not -only for the Tokugawa, but for all the clans. You, gentlemen, remember, -how the arrival of the fireships and the signing of the first treaty -was followed by incessant earthquakes,[B] how the ocean rose in its -fury, and overwhelmed the barbarian ship, supposed to be safely at -anchor at Shimoda.[C] Surely, gentlemen, the gods of Japan themselves -fought for our country. But the Go rojiu was blind. Was not the Shogun -Iyeyoshi himself killed for not defying the barbarians by expelling -them? ‘We are not strong enough,’ says the Regent. There was a time -when the countless hosts of Kublai Khan, the conqueror of the world, -were hurled upon our shores. What became of them? Tenshi Sama prayed to -his ancestors and they, the gods of our country, destroyed the invader. -We have nothing to fear, except our own faint-heartedness. Are we, the -samurai of Japan, unworthy of our ancestors? Have our muscles grown -weak that we can no longer wield the sword? Out upon us, then, for -cowards! If the Tokugawa be a coward, out upon the Tokugawa. Choshiu, -Kaga, Satsuma, and Tosa, ought to be able to dispose of the foreigners -and at the same time of the Tokugawa brood. Let us send confidential -messengers to those clans, and, after we have arranged with them, send -Mr. Sawa back to Yedo, securely packed in a box labelled: This side up; -handle with care!” - -A smile of approbation passed through the assembly; only Kano’s face -showed no sign. It was now his turn to speak, and, after toying with -his fan, as if collecting his thoughts, he began: - -“Honorable Councillors, I agree with the last speaker that the arrival -of the foreigners bodes evil for our country. I do not believe that -they will try to make war upon us, unless indeed, we provoke it -ourselves. At the present time, at any rate, we are not in a condition -to provoke a quarrel. For the past two hundred years the world has -moved, and we have stood still; that is why we are helpless. We have -found out something. These barbarians possess ships which go wherever -they want them, without regard to tide and wind. We must have such -ships and learn how to handle them. We, sons of Japan, are not -naturally brainless; we can learn what the barbarians have learned, and -by hard work, we may be able to surpass them. There may be some trouble -with the Tokugawa, but I do not think so, unless they send us another -metsuke besides Mr. Sawa. I have taken the measure of that gentleman, -and do not think that it would take much gold to make him deaf and -blind. But we need not take him into our confidence. We should send -a trusty messenger to Nagasaki, and at whatever cost buy some of the -books of the Hollanders. Surely, some merchants will be found there -who understand that language and teach us. Besides, we must repair -our forts, and buy new cannon. Our samurai must practice with their -arms during every moment of leisure. Then, gentlemen, when the time -comes, we shall be prepared, be it to avenge Sekigahara and the Castle -of Osaka, or to drive the barbarian into the sea. My honored ancestor -gave the same advice to our illustrious lord’s forefather. Oh! that it -had been accepted. Mori looks now upon Kii and Owari,[38] and grinds -his teeth at the thought that their people, once his property, are now -arraigned among his foes. Kano’s arm and muscle are as ready for the -fray, as those of the youngest warrior, and he will not be the last -to unsheath his sword, nor the first to return it to its scabbard. -Self-restraint is often much more difficult than exposure to danger. - -“The advice of Mr. Hattori supposes that the councillors of Kaga, -Satsuma, and Tosa are of our opinion. But we have a feud with Satsuma, -who might seize such an opportunity to bring all the power of the -Tokugawa down upon us. It is said, and I believe it from what I have -seen at Yedo, that the samurai of the Shogun have lost their courage. -But what of Mito, Aidzu, Kii, Owari, and the host of other daimiyo -ready to march at the Go rojiu’s bidding. Gentlemen, an excuse for -the Tokugawa to fall upon us _at this time_, would mean ruin for our -clan. We cannot even entertain the thought. But we must watch for -our opportunity, and when it comes we must be prepared to strike. At -present, let it be understood that Mr. Sawa must be perfectly safe in -whatever part of Choshiu’s domain, but let him be followed, and let -his every step be dogged. Every word he utters, even in his sleep, and -every syllable he writes must be known to us. Mr. Hattori, will you -please, see to it that this is done.” - -The council agreed with Kano, as it had always done; and it was decided -that a sum of money should be placed at Kano’s disposal to procure the -necessary books and a teacher at Nagasaki. These resolutions were drawn -up, and sent to the adviser of the daimiyo to be sealed, after which -they became a law. - -And the daimiyo? Oh! he was a _Great Name_ only. He never interfered -with the affairs of the clan, and did not know anything about them. It -was the same with the Shogun at Yedo. His seal was used, and laws were -made of which he had never heard; and so it was with Tenshi Sama at -Kyoto. All these men, Daimiyo, Shogun, and Tenshi Sama were considered -as gods, and nobody but their highest servants were ever allowed to -look upon them. If any of them was compelled to travel, they were -placed in a norimono, with close blinds, and men ran ahead crying: -Shita ni iru![39] Down on your knees. Very few people knew the names of -the councillors who did rule in Japan, but the names of those who did -not rule, were generally known. - - - - -VI - -YOUNG KANO GROWS UP - - -While the Choshiu clan as well as the other clans of Japan, were -anxiously watching the opening of Japan and the events which follow, -Young Kano or Kano Ekichi[40] was taken gradually out of his mother’s -hands and given to a faithful attendant of his father to be educated as -a true samurai should be. Japanese boys are not baptized for there are -few Japanese Christians, and in those days there were none; they have, -therefore, no baptismal name. They have, however, given names, which -are placed behind the family name instead of before it as we do. They -would say, for instance, instead of Henry Jones, Jones Henry; they do -the same with the words Mister, Master, Mistress or Miss, for all of -which they have only one expression: San. If we should speak to master -Ekichi Kano, we should say Kano Ekichi San. These given names can be -changed without any difficulty. Sometimes the parents change them, at -other times the owner of the name changes it himself, and again the -Emperor or Tenshi Sama gives an officer a new name. But in that case, -it is sure that the owner will keep it so long as he lives. - -I can’t say that Ekichi had a very pleasant time of it, although, of -course, his father and mother loved him. Only they did not show it, as -our parents do. As a little baby he was made to rest upon his knees, -so that they might grow flexible, for the Japanese do not sit upon -chairs, but squat upon their mats. When he rose in the morning from -his futon[41] or comforter which served him as a bed, there was no -running to his father or mother, shouting good morning, and giving them -a hug or a hearty kiss. When he did meet them, the first thing was to -fall on his knees, spread his hands flat before him, and bow until his -head rested upon the back of his hands. His father and mother gravely -returned the salutation in the same manner. When he took his meals, -he was not permitted to say a word. He ate what was put before him, -and it was every day the same. Asa meshi, hiru meshi, and ban meshi, -or in English, morning rice, noon rice, and evening rice, there was -no difference between breakfast, dinner, and supper. Until he was six -years old, Ekichi spent most of his time with his attendant in the -garden. They strolled around, and he asked questions which the man -answered as well as he could. He was taught how to speak to a superior, -to an equal, and to an inferior; how long he must remain prostrate -before a daimiyo, before a councillor, and before a simple samurai. -He was also taken to the grave of his grandfather, and told to kneel -down and say his prayers. That was something he could not understand, -and which his attendant could not explain; when he asked him, and he -did often, the man would say: “It is so, but you should not ask why, -because the gods only know.” So, when Ekichi was tired and sat down -on the sward, he would often think: What is the use of praying at the -grave of a dead man. But he was careful not to express his thoughts to -anybody. - -He was trained not to show pain, distress, or grief. Whatever happened -to him, his face must not betray it. Being constantly in the open air, -he grew up healthy and strong, and when he was six years old, he was -taken to a school for samurai boys. - -Ekichi had been with his attendant beyond the gates of his yashiki, -but after the first day, he was told to go and return by himself. -He met his schoolfellows with the courtesy which he had been taught -so carefully, and was treated by them in the same way. There was no -playground. Indeed, I do not believe that any of those boys knew what -the word “play” means. Many times, thirty years ago, I have seen -samurai boys from eight to sixteen years old, during recess or after -schooltime retire to their rooms to smoke their tiny pipes and carry -on a quiet conversation; but I never saw them play. The government of -Japan has found out that baseball, football, and cricket, are healthy -games, and is encouraging these boys to indulge in them. But at that -time, a samurai lad would have felt hurt at the thought that he could -do such a thing as play. - -[Illustration: “IT IS REALLY A DAY DEVOTED TO HACHIMAN, THE GOD OF -WAR.”] - -All Japanese boys are very quiet; they are brought up that way; but for -the children of the people certain holidays are set apart. The fifth of -May, or the fifth day of the fifth month is the boys’ festival. It is -really a day devoted to Hachiman, the god of war, but it is also called -the Feast of Flags. A tall bamboo is erected near every house where a -boy was born; for every son a fish, properly shaped and a very good -imitation made of air-tight sacks is fastened, with its mouth wide open -by means of bamboo hoops. The air enters and, besides inflating the -body, causes it to squirm, flap, and dart, about the bamboo. They have -other days, but the samurai boys do not observe them. There is still a -wide distance between them and the children of the people. - -At the time when Ekichi Kano went to school, the children squatted upon -the mats, and learned the Japanese syllabary,--for there is no alphabet -in Japan,--each vowel is connected with a consonant, and thus forms a -syllable. The vowels are the same as with us: - - a, i, u, e, o, - pron. ah, ee, oo, ay, oh, - and combined with the consonants - ka, ki, ku, ke, ko, - na, ni, nu, ne, no, etc. - -Ekichi, like almost all Japanese boys of his class, learned very -quickly, nor did the very difficult Chinese characters frighten him. -Long before a Chinese boy could have mastered one-half of them, Ekichi -could read and understand a book without much difficulty. - -He was now growing used to the restraint which was imposed upon him. -He began to understand that the word _pleasure_ can have no meaning -for a Japanese boy, and then he was made to learn that a boy is better -without comforts than with them, except when he is sick. He was taught -that there can be and must be but one motive for every action, and that -motive must be: duty. Ekichi was but a child, and small for his age; -but no boy twice as old in America or Europe, could have shown an equal -degree of self-control, and contempt of pain and death with this child. - -Japan’s laws were cruel, at this time, and most offenses were punished -with death. The criminal was made to kneel down, a flash of the sharp -sword, a blow, and the head lay severed from the body. Young as he was, -Ekichi was often taken to these executions, to accustom him to the -sight of blood. His face was closely watched to see if he showed any -emotion, and when he came home from these disagreeable sights, he found -his rice of the color of blood, for it had been colored on purpose -with the juice of salted plums. He was expected to eat heartily of -this dish, and, like other samurai boys, did so without the nauseous -feelings which our boys would experience under the circumstances. -Sometimes, at midnight, he was roused from a sound slumber, and ordered -to go to the execution ground, and bring a head. There was no refusal -possible. Whatever he might think privately of such an errand, there -was but one answer possible, a responsive hai! “yes,” and immediate -obedience. Thus Ekichi, as all other Japanese boys of his class, was -indifferent to heat or cold, and forgot that there was such a thing as -“fear.” He was not quite twelve, when he was given two real swords, -sharp, keen blades, made for use and not for show. He was taught that -“the sword is the soul of the samurai,” or, in the words of the law as -it then prevailed in Japan[42]: “The girded sword is the living soul -of the samurai. In the case of a samurai forgetting his sword, act as -is appointed: it may not be forgiven.” - -The child never considered his swords as toys; to him they were objects -of reverence; that little dirk, eight inches long, might at some time -be used to end his own life. He learned how he should behave and act, -if ever such a moment should come. There is an instance in Japanese -history, when a samurai boy only seven years old, committed suicide -that he might save his father. Such stories were told him constantly, -and roused his enthusiasm. At no time, after he was twelve years old, -would Ekichi have hesitated to take his own life, if he had thought it -his duty. - -At this age he divided his time between shooting with bow and arrow, -riding, fencing and wrestling, and the study of Chinese. He learned -to swim and to handle a boat, and as he grew stronger, all dainties -and comforts were taken away. If, in winter, his hands became numb, -he was told to rub them in snow or water to make them warm; but he -was not allowed the use of a fire. The duty of implicit obedience had -been planted in him. No Japanese boy would think of asking why? when -ordered to do something. Last of all he became master of that exceeding -courtesy, peculiar to Japanese gentlemen, and which we foreigners -cannot appreciate. - - - - -VII - -KANO’S JOURNEY TO YEDO - - -The 1st of July, 1859, had come and gone, and the barbarians had been -admitted into the Country of the Gods. They were only a handful; so -few that Choshiu’s samurai could have pushed them into the bay by -sheer force of numbers. While the Japanese people continued to toil, -and cared nothing if there were any barbarians in the country or not, -the samurai were getting more and more angry. Still, there was much -curiosity mixed with this anger. The barbarians were so few in number; -how could the Tokugawa, able to call an army of 80,000 men under arms, -be afraid of them. - -That puzzled Choshiu’s councillors. They had not succeeded in their -attempts to obtain books and a teacher at Nagasaki, and it had been -decided that another effort should be made at Yokohama. This time the -enterprise was thought so important, that it was determined to send -one of the councillors, and the choice fell upon Kano. He accepted the -commission. - -When the councillors separated, Kano requested his friend Hattori to -call that evening, as he wished to consult him. Hattori agreed to do -so, and punctually to the time appeared at the Kano yashiki. - -When the two friends were seated, Kano said, “I have been thinking how -I shall go. At first I thought of asking a Go rojiu passport through -our _honest_ friend Sawa, who will do anything we ask of him, as soon -as he sees our gold. But I am afraid it will not do. The Go rojiu must, -by this time, have grown suspicious at the excellent reports furnished -by their metsuke, and I should certainly be shadowed as soon as they -heard that one of Choshiu’s councillors was visiting the Kwantô.[43] -With spies constantly at my heels, I could not do anything; therefore, -nobody except you, must know of my absence. I must, of course, trust -my household, but I know that I can do that, I have decided to fall -suddenly ill and call for a physician who will tell me that it is a -slow fever. So I shall not want him again, since he cannot cure me -anyhow. You must call two or three times a week, and spread the report -that I am neither better nor worse. If our fellow-councillors ask for -me, tell them that I intend to start at an early day.” - -“But how will you pass the barriers on the Tokaido and the -Nakasendo[44]?” - -“I shall probably go by sea from Hyogo. I know that this journey is one -of danger, but I must not risk the clan. I have, therefore, written to -My Lord that I am no longer one of his samurai, but a _rônin_.[45] You -must keep this paper and deliver it to the Council only in case I am -arrested.” - -Hattori bowed in assent, took the paper and hid it within the folds of -his kimono. He then asked: “Are you going alone?” - -“No. I must take a trusty young fellow with me, if something should -happen to me. First I thought of Ito, but he is in Tokyo, and may be -watched. I have sent for his friend Inouye, who, I am sure, has his -wits about him.” - -“I hardly think that a man like Inouye, who is more given to studying -than to tramping about, will like such an adventure,” said Hattori, -smiling. “But if he consents, you could have no better man.” - -“That is what I thought. He has, moreover, this advantage, that he can -not be known to any Tokugawa officer, since he has never been at Yedo.” - -“When will you leave?” - -“The sooner the better, to-night, if I can induce my intended companion -to leave his books so soon. Ah! here he is!” - -A servant had announced the visitor by opening a sho ji, and permitting -him to enter. The customary salutations passed, and Inouye was -requested to join the two friends. Kano scanned him closely, and, -evidently pleased with the result, said: - -“Mr. Inouye, you can serve the clan; are you willing to do so, even -though it involves considerable danger?” - -“With all my heart,” replied Inouye simply. - -“Thank you, in name of the clan. How long will it take you to get ready -for a long journey?” - -“I can go now.” - -Both Kano and Hattori smiled with pleasure at the young man’s brief -replies, and the former explained his scheme in all its bearings. When -he had finished Inouye said: - -“I thank you, Mr. Councillor, very much for having thought me worthy of -this honor, and I shall try not to disappoint you. If you permit me, -I shall now write a similar letter to My Lord Mori, and perhaps Mr. -Hattori will do me the favor to keep it with that of your honor.” - -Hattori bowed, and Kano, begging to be excused, withdrew while Inouye -was writing his letter. Kano went directly to the room where his wife -was. He entered, and, without forgetting to pay her due respects, he -said: - -“I am leaving on a long journey, but I want people to think that I am -ill. I shall, therefore, lie down, and do you send for a physician. -Before he comes, send for Mr. Fujii,[46] I shall tell him what to do in -my absence.” - -Kano’s instructions were followed. The physician went home very proud -at having discovered at once the councillor’s sickness. He was sorry -that he had been dismissed, but felt that Kano was right. All his -medicines could not cure such a fever. And when he thought of the fee -in his pocket, his heart almost leaped for joy. It was more than he had -received in six months. - -The following morning, long before sunrise and while everybody in the -Yashiki was fast asleep, Mr. Fujii cautiously opened the little gate, -and two samurai, with their faces half hidden in a cloth wrapped around -their heads, stepped briskly out. They wore straw sandals, so that -their footsteps were inaudible. Fujii bowed deeply, and received a -parting bow in return, but not a word was spoken. After passing across -the moat, they came to the great highway and turned eastward. When the -sun rose they had covered ten miles, and decided to stop for breakfast -at the first yadoya[47] they should see. - -After six days’ traveling without meeting any adventure, although they -had met several ruffian-looking rônin, they approached Hyogo. They had -carefully discussed their plans and decided to take passage in some -trading junk, bound for Yedo or Kanagawa. If they could not do so, -they would hire a boat. Kano had been many times along this road, in -charge of Mori’s procession, and knew Hyogo well. But as he knew that -passports were demanded from every traveler stopping at an inn, they -decided to pass the night at a village yadoya, and proceed to Hyogo on -the following morning. - -They found what they wanted two miles west of Hyogo. After securing -their rooms, they had their bath, and ordered dinner. Presently they -heard the shrill voice of the landlady scolding somebody roundly. - -“You little lout” (hyakusho[48]), she shouted, “I sent you for fresh -fish, and you come back to tell me that there was none. No fresh fish -in Hyogo! Just think of it! And here are two honorable gentlemen, who -have ordered their supper! You shall go right back, you blockhead, and -bring me fish, fresh fish, do you hear?” - -Kano was amused, but Inouye whispered to him, “Suppose we ask that -little hyakusho to find out if there is any ship sailing for Yedo. -Those little fellows who look so stupid, are often keen enough, if they -know that there is some cash for them. Shall I see him?” - -Kano nodded assent, and Inouye descended to the ground floor. The -boy, a strong built lad of fifteen or sixteen, was receiving the last -instructions, and Inouye strolled slowly on the road toward Hyogo. -He had not gone a hundred yards, when he heard steps behind him, and -turning round saw the boy coming at a great pace. As the boy was about -to pass him, Inouye said: - -“Wait a moment.” - -The boy stopped and bowed. Inouye continued: - -“You are going to Hyogo, are you not?” - -The boy bowed again and muttered:--“I am, your honor.” - -“Very well. My brother and myself are stopping at yonder hotel. We have -had a long march and are tired, but we must go to Yedo as soon as we -can. Can you find out if any ships are leaving, and if they take any -passengers? You are a sharp boy, and can find out if you try. If you do -your errand well, slip up-stairs so that the landlady does not see it, -and I shall pay you well.” - -The boy looked up when he heard himself called a sharp boy, and Inouye -felt that he had struck the right chord. He returned to the yadoya, -where he found Kano fast asleep. He, too, stretched himself out upon -the soft mats, and closed his eyes. - -They awoke at the shuffling of feet, and the noise of dishes being -brought in. Both enjoyed their supper. It was dark and the rain doors -had been closed; but they opened them to enjoy the soft sea breeze. -Neither of them spoke, when a whisper came from under the balcony: -“Sir, sir, I have brought him.” - -Inouye recognized the boy’s voice. Quietly measuring the height, he -took one of the comforters serving as bed, and fastening one end to the -railing swung himself over, holding the other end in his hand. A man -was standing near the boy, and Inouye asked who he was. The boy told -him that he was a sendo. He had found a ship that would leave for Tokyo -at dawn, and told her master that two gentlemen at his inn wished to -take passage. This sailor had been ordered to show them the way, and to -carry their baggage. - -Kano and Inouye were highly pleased. They left enough money to pay -their bill handsomely, and, after Kano had joined his friend, rewarded -the boy. Preceded by the sendo, they made their way to Hyogo and -reached the junk in safety. They secured sleeping accommodations, and -when they awoke the following morning, and went on deck, they saw that -they had left Hyogo far behind. - - - - -VIII - -YOKOHAMA IN 1859 - - -The junk had a fair voyage. The passengers who had not been on the -ocean before, had suffered from seasickness, but, since the junk -generally followed the coast, and often passed through smooth water, -they had quickly recovered. The voyage up Yedo Bay had been very -pleasant. But they met the tide when they were off Kanagawa, and as -there was but little wind, the master had anchored. - -If they had known it, they would have looked behind them with some -interest, for there was the spot where Commodore Perry had anchored, -and with his fire ships, had battered down the door of Japan’s -isolation. That was five years ago. These five years had brought -serious trouble upon their country, and there promised to be graver -disturbances; for, as there was restlessness in their clan, so there -was restlessness everywhere. - -As Kano stood thinking thus, he heard Inouye ask the master of the junk -how long it would be before they reached Yedo. The answer was that they -must wait six hours before the tide turned, and that then it would take -many hours unless the breeze freshened. “But,” he continued, “if your -honor is in a hurry, I can call a sampan (row boat) and you may be set -ashore at Kanagawa. Then you can follow the Tokaido, and reach Yedo -to-night.” - -Kano turned toward the master, and said briefly: “Do so!” A little -while after a sampan passed within hailing distance, and soon the two -rônin were speeding toward the shore. - -Kano and his friend made their way to a quiet yadoya at Noge hill, -where they could be sure not to be disturbed by the trains of daimiyo -passing to and from the capital, and would be free from impertinent -questions. After they had secured accommodations and refreshed -themselves with a bath, they took their dinner. Neither spoke of the -subject uppermost in his mind, their future plan of action. They were -now in the Tokugawa country, and every man might be a spy. Besides, -there was no privacy in a house where the walls consisted of sho ji, -and even a whisper could be plainly heard in the next room. Therefore, -when they had finished their dinner, Kano proposed a stroll. They -set forth, and walked in the direction of Yedo. They were sure to -be unobserved, since the Tokaido was crowded with travelers of all -classes, and samurai were not likely to be questioned after they had -passed the barrier. - -When they had reached a part of the road where they could talk without -danger of being overheard, Kano said: - -“We have arrived at the first stage of our journey. Have you thought of -any plan to attain our end?” - -“I have been thinking, of course,” replied Inouye, “but I have no -doubt that you have conceived an excellent scheme.” - -“No, I have not. Every plan I thought of, when I came to work it out, -offered some very serious obstacle. I feel as if I am running my head -against a stone wall. We may go into Yokohama, and if we are asked who -we are, we may answer that we are rônin. But if they ask what we are -doing, and we reply that we are curious to see the barbarians, they -will say: Very well, you have seen them now, so you had better go about -your business. From that time we shall be beset with spies, or we must -leave. This is a difficulty which I had not foreseen.” - -“Your idea is to study the barbarians, is it not?” said Inouye -thoughtfully. - -“Yes. Our clan must not act blindly. We must know what is the purpose -of those men in coming here; but that is not all. We must also know -their strength and their weakness.” - -“There is but one way in which that may be done,” muttered Inouye, as -if speaking to himself. - -“Then that way must be chosen,” said Kano. “What is it? You do not -hesitate on account of the danger, I hope?” - -“No; but I do hesitate on account of the humiliation. Look here, Mr. -Kano, I will give you my views frankly. If I were alone, that is, if I -had been commissioned by you, I would have left my swords behind, and -offered my services to these barbarians in any capacity. I would have -entered into such employment as promised the best opportunity to watch -them when they were among themselves and off their guard.” - -“But how would you understand their speech. You do not suppose that -they converse in our language, do you?” - -“No,” replied Inouye, smiling, “but our Japanese interpreters at -Nagasaki tell me that it does not take long to learn that tongue, and I -do not suppose that there is much difference in the languages spoken by -these barbarians.” - -“Well,” said Kano, “I admire your scheme and like it. But such a step -requires consideration. Let us return to our yadoya and think it over. -To-morrow morning we can decide upon our future action.” - -When they arrived in their room, the two friends sat down before the -hibachi, smoking and sipping their tea. After some time Kano stretched -himself on the mats, and was soon sound asleep. Inouye noiselessly -opened a sho ji and slipped through, closing it in the same manner. -He then went down to the lower floor, and entered the front part of -the house which serves as office, kitchen, and as refreshment hall for -transient wayfarers of the poorer class. - -Here he found the landlord, squatting behind his tiny desk. As Inouye -approached, the landlord bowed low, since, although the guest was -now dressed in kimono only, and had left his swords up-stairs, he -remembered having seen him enter as a samurai. Inouye sat down within -easy reach of the landlord, and asked: “How far is it from here to -Yokohama?” - -“That depends, your honor, upon the way you may choose. Across the new -causeway it is about two miles, but it is further by sampan.” - -“Are there any guards?” - -“There were, your honor, but the barbarians made so much fuss about -them, that they were withdrawn.” - -“Then anybody may go in there without any impertinent questions being -asked?” - -“Oh yes, your honor. The barbarians do not seem to care as to who -comes.” - -“Have you been there?” - -“Yes, I have been there twice. When the first barbarians landed I -thought that I would go and see how they looked. I was disgusted! Not -one of them possessed any manners. They shouted at the top of their -voices, pushed and crowded each other, and acted as if they were -possessed of demons. It was horrible.” - -“Then why did you go again?” - -“My little son was very sick, and some traveler told me that these -barbarians possessed powerful charms. Every physician said that the -boy must die, and I thought that I would try to obtain a charm that -would save the child’s life. So I went to the gate at the causeway and -asked where I could purchase those charms. He told me that he did not -know, but when he knew what I wanted them for, he advised me to go -to an American physician who lives in Kanagawa near the causeway. I -did so, and found him at home. He was a tall, powerful man, but very -kind. There was a Japanese in his house who could understand me, and -when the physician knew what was wanted, he and the Japanese gentleman -went with me. When we came home, he asked some questions, examined the -child tenderly, and gave it some medicine. He and his friend remained -three hours, and only when the child was sleeping peacefully, did he -leave. The next day he came again, and the next, and the next, and now -the child is as well as ever. And he would not accept any money. All -barbarians are not bad men, that is sure, but most of them are very -rude.” - -“Do you know how they live in their homes?” - -“No. I have heard some young good-for-nothings of this place who had -served them as kodz’kai[49] (attendant, servant) speak about them, but you -can not believe what they say. Decent men will not enter their service. -Only a few days ago the good physician asked me to get him an honest -man, but, although I have tried hard and the wages are high, nobody -cares to take the risk.” - -“Is there any chance to secure work from them in Yokohama?” - -“Oh! there is plenty of work, and the pay is good. But our people do -not like it much. They have to work too hard. They are not allowed to -rest a minute, and when one of them should smoke a pipe for a moment, -and he is seen, he receives his pay up to that time, and is sent about -his business. If they treat our people in that manner, it will not be -long before they will have to do the work themselves.” - -Inouye agreed with the landlord, and, while that worthy was giving -change to a servant girl, he slipped up-stairs. He found Kano still -asleep, and sat down before his hibachi thinking deeply. There was -absolute silence in the room, save when he knocked the ashes out of his -pipe. - -It was quite dark when Kano awoke. “What, is it so late!” he said as he -looked out on the balcony, and saw the lights of the ships in Yokohama -harbor. “I thought I would sleep for an hour or so, and here I have -taken a whole afternoon!” - -“I am glad of it,” replied Inouye. “After supper we must stroll to the -beach, for I have much to tell you. I do not think that there will be -so very much difficulty in carrying out our plans. But it is best not -to speak of them here.” - -Kano nodded, and clapped his hands as a signal to serve up supper. -They spoke about the food, and joked with the servants. After having -satisfied their appetites, they strolled to the beach. - -It was a calm, bright night; the only noises disturbing the almost -oppressive silence, came from the ships in harbor, or from the shrill -whistle of the blind shampooer, as he offered his services in the way -peculiar to that trade. Kano led the way until they came to a little -hillock where they could notice the approach of strangers. He sat down, -and courteously motioned Inouye to take a seat by his side. Inouye did -so, and at Kano’s request related his conversation with their landlord. - -He then suggested that Kano should apply for the position of house -servant of the barbarian physician, while he, Inouye, would try to -secure work at Yokohama. But Kano would not hear of this. “No!” he -said. “This physician seems to be a good man; you must go there, and -I shall mingle with those rude people at Yokohama. But on ichi-roku -nichi[50] we must meet here at eight o’clock, and communicate each -other’s experiences. But what shall we do with our swords? They would -betray us at once?” - -“That, certainly, is a difficulty, but not a serious one. Let us think -it over, we are sure to find some way out of it.” - -The two samurai then returned to their inn and retired. - - - - -IX - -NEW EXPERIENCE - - -After eating their breakfast at an early hour on the following morning, -Inouye went down stairs in search of the landlord. He found him sitting -at his desk, as if he had not left it since their last conversation. He -called for the bill, and gave such a generous tip that the landlord was -highly pleased, and showed it by his repeated and humble bows. Inouye -made a suitable reply, and then said: - -“Landlord, I have spoken with my elder brother about what you told me -yesterday. The Go rojiu is anxious that some of our young men should -learn the barbarian language, and we came here to look for the best -ways and means, for it was decided in our family that I should try. -It seems to me that the easiest way would be to live with them, and -after what you have told me about the physician, I think I would like -to serve him, and my brother agrees with me. Now, it does not matter -who we are, but I am no good-for-nothing, and shall do my duty. For the -present my name is Tomori, and I ask you if you will direct me to this -physician?” - -“I shall do better than that,” replied the landlord. He clapped his -hands, and when a servant appeared, he told him to bring OKichi[51] -San. Soon after the Honorable Master Kichi appeared. “Honorable Master -Kichi,” said his father to the eight year old urchin, “take this -gentleman to the house of the American physician.” Kichi bowed, and -leading the way, brought Inouye to a private house, off the Tokaido -and near the causeway leading to Yokohama. There was a small but well -kept garden in front. It was a house which had evidently been built for -a well-to-do samurai, but Inouye noticed that the sho ji, instead of -being of paper, were of a transparent substance, probably glass. - -Kichi pulled the rope of a gong, the sound of which brought a pleasant -looking Japanese gentleman to the door. - -Inouye bowed, and his salute was returned in the same ceremonious -manner. He then asked if he could see the barbarian physician. “I am -sorry,” said the other, “but he is out. He will be back very soon, I -think; be pleased to enter.” He showed Inouye the way to a back room, -with tatami[52] on the floor, and, after repeating the salutations, -said: - -“I hope that it is not on account of illness that you wish to see the -physician?” - -“No,” replied Inouye. “I shall tell you frankly what brings me here, -for I hope to secure your valuable assistance. I have always had a -love for books and knowledge, and am very anxious to study foreign -languages. I consulted my elder brother, and we came to Kanagawa -together. At the inn we heard how kindly this physician had treated -our host, and also that he is in need of a servant. My brother and I -thought that if my services were acceptable, I should offer them such -as they are.” - -“You are not a Tokugawa man, I fancy.” - -“Why should I not be?” - -“Because your speech savors from the south,” was the answer. “I did -not ask you that question from motives of curiosity, but because most -of the men who enter into the service of foreigners, are such as are -bound to find their way to jail. Every foreigner prefers any servant to -one from this neighborhood. What name do you wish to go by? I hear the -physician’s footstep, and will speak to him at once.” - -He left the room, but returned quickly, preceded by a bearded man in -the full vigor of life. Inouye prostrated himself before the stranger, -who said in Japanese which sounded quaint although quite intelligible: - -“Mr. Tanaka tells me that you wish to enter my service, and I am -willing to try you. You are expected to be here from seven in the -morning until nine in the evening, and will receive a salary of five -riyo.[53] You shall have a room, which Mr. Tanaka will show you, and -you can share the meals with the other servants. If you need anything, -ask Mr. Tanaka; or if you want to speak to me, come to my room. I shall -expect you to-morrow morning; you can now go and bring here what you -may have as baggage.” - -Inouye prostrated himself again. Tanaka then showed him his room, -which was in one of the outhouses, but far more pleasant than his own -quarters in Choshiu. Everything was clean. He was then taken to the -room where the servants took their meals, and to the bathroom reserved -for them. At last Tanaka told him that he could take possession at any -time during that day, so as to feel more at home when his duties should -commence. - -When he had left the physician’s house, Inouye hastened back to the -inn. He was dazed and did not know what to think. He would tell his new -experience to Kano and consult with him. He entered the yadoya, and, -answering the smiling landlord’s humble welcome with a slight bow, he -hurried up-stairs. Kano was evidently expecting him, but showed not -the least sign of curiosity. Both saluted as became samurai, and upon -Kano’s invitation, Inouye sat down and lit his pipe, waiting for Kano -to speak first. - -“Have you succeeded?” - -“I have.” - -“When will you enter?” - -“I have agreed to begin to-morrow morning, but I can occupy my room -to-day, and bring in my baggage.” - -“Then you had better make some purchases. Here are a hundred riyo. Nay, -do not hesitate,” for Inouye was surprised at such a large sum being -offered to him, “for your work is of great value to the clan, and you -may need it; something may occur, or you may be suspected, and Choshiu -can not afford to lose so worthy a samurai as my young friend Inouye -has proved to be.” Inouye bowed low, to hide his confusion. It was -so rare that a samurai of Kano’s rank bestowed praise that Inouye was -deeply moved. Kano pretended not to notice the emotion, and continued: -“While you are making your purchases after dinner, I shall go to -Yokohama and see what success I may achieve. But what shall we do with -our swords?” - -“I could take them with me to the physician’s house.” - -“Very well. You will wait here for me until I return?” - -Inouye bowed assent. Dinner was ordered and brought up; after it was -eaten, the two left the house, barefooted and in simple cotton kimono. -They went together as far as the Tokaido, where Inouye pointed out -the physician’s residence. Kano noticed it closely. They then parted, -Inouye turning to the left to visit the stores, while Kano descended to -the causeway, and followed it toward Yokohama. - -It was six o’clock before he returned. Inouye had noticed that Kano -had avoided asking for particulars. He, as younger in years, and less -high in rank, would have committed a severe breach of good breeding -amounting to a crime, if he had asked a question except in explanation. -The same ceremonious salutations took place, and supper was ordered. -After it was over, Kano said: - -“We are now about to part. I am to begin to work to-morrow as a -ninzoku.[54] I have been engaged by a fellow, a Japanese, who will have -a taste of the lash before I am entirely through with him.” The false -smile and suppressed emotion with which this was hissed out between his -lips, proved how pitilessly in earnest he was. “But we shall reserve -our observations for a month from now. We meet every fifth day, as we -agreed yesterday. Here are my swords,” saluting reverently as he handed -them to his companion, who received them with marks of even greater -reverence. - -Inouye concealed the swords, with his own, among his clothes. He then -took the bundle to the door. Here he turned round, and prostrating -himself, bent his head three times upon his outstretched hands. Then, -rising, he bowed once more, drawing in his breath. Kano replied in the -same manner. Not another word was said, and Inouye carried his bundle -to the scene of a new life. - -Kano remained alone, deeply buried in thought. Not the slightest -token of emotion was visible, yet the man was terribly wroth. His -long-practised self control enabled him to conceal the passion he -felt by that stolid look of contemplation which completely veils the -thoughts. He sat motionless, regardless of the time, mechanically -answering the servant who arranged the comforters for his couch. The -streets were silent, the yadoya had closed up for the night, and still -Kano was sitting there motionless as a statue. Midnight was past, -when he felt for his tobacco pouch. Stirring up the few sparks in the -hibachi with the chopstick-like brass tongs, he took a few whiffs at -his pipe, and then, confident that he had schooled himself for the -coming ordeal, he lay down upon his couch. - - - - -X - -FRIENDSHIP OR HATRED? - - -Six weeks had passed. It was in the evening after supper, when three -samurai were sitting in the room overlooking the garden of Choshiu’s -yashiki in Yedo. Guards were stationed within easy distance, so as -to encircle the principal building, one room of which was occupied -by Kano, in virtue of his influence within the clan. It was known -that the Go rojiu had scattered more spies about the yashiki of the -great southern clans. Kano, who, had arrived only that morning, had -immediately ordered the captain of the guard, to produce a list of -every person living within the yashiki or its grounds. Together they -had scanned every name, and those who were not personally known to the -Councillor or the Captain, were served with a notice to depart, and had -been escorted to the gate. Kano had also given orders that a report -should be prepared at once, explaining who was responsible for their -presence. Until this had been sifted to the bottom, a number of young -samurai of known loyalty had been selected to guard the palace, in -turn, and they had received orders to cut down any one found prowling -in the grounds. A search was made under the palace, and it was only -when satisfied that floor nor ceiling had been tampered with, that Kano -felt he could speak without fear of being reported. - -After he was satisfied of his privacy, he had sent word to the guard -at the gate that, when Mr. Inouye should arrive, he was to proceed -immediately to the palace. The answer was that Inouye was in the -yashiki, and in the apartments of Mr. Ito. Kano had then sent a request -to the two friends to visit him in his room. They had returned with the -messenger, and had taken supper together. The servants had brought tea -and tobacco, and had been dismissed. - -“Gentlemen,” said Kano, “we shall now proceed to business. Mr. Ito, -your friend has probably informed you of what has brought him to Yedo?” - -“Beyond mentioning incidentally that his visit was connected with -business of the clan, he has not done so, your honor.” - -“That is entirely like _my friend_ Inouye. It was like a true samurai, -although, in this case, so much caution was superfluous. I am, however, -pleased, because I shall have the satisfaction of enlarging upon the -merits of our friend.” - -Inouye bowed to the ground, and protested that he had only acted as -every samurai of Choshiu would have done. Kano then proceeded to unfold -the events leading to their mission, and their adventures, until -the time when they entered upon their novel experiences, while Ito, -although deeply interested and astonished, preserved the same placid -countenance. Kano continued:-- - -“We met, as agreed upon, every fifth day. It was, I confess, a relief -to me to see a face I could trust, but I would not permit our friend -to tell me his experience. It was because I desired facts, and not -mere impressions. The investigation regarded the welfare of the clan, -hence, of course, no sacrifice could be too great. Above all, the -council desired impartial accounts; justice, full justice, must be done -to the barbarians and to the Tokugawa, and that the judgment might be -unbiassed, time nor expense should be taken into account. I am, even -now, sorry that an accident drew the attention of the Tokugawa spies -upon me, and compelled me to leave suddenly. It was not difficult to -baffle those dogs, and I am quite sure that they lost all traces of -me. They are probably burying my body now. It was owing to my supposed -death that I could warn our friend here, who will now, I am sure, -entertain us with his experience.” - -Inouye bowed and said: “If I had been permitted to give your honor my -impressions, when I was first engaged by that _good_ man, the American -physician, they would not vary materially from what I can now state -as my knowledge. From first to last, he and his family treated me with -the greatest kindness. I was known to him as Tomori, the kodz’kai; yet -when he _requested_ me to do something, it was always with a ‘please!’ -and he invariably thanked me. He observed that I was anxious to acquire -his language, perhaps Mr. Tanaka, his interpreter, had told him so. The -first day, when the work was done, he sent for me, and, taking a book -from his shelves, began to teach me. Thanks to his patience, I can now -fairly read and speak his language. - -“The work was light; to be sure, it was not the work of a samurai, but -I was not made to feel that I was a menial. At first I was shocked -when I saw that his wife was really the master in the house, and that -he paid her marked deference whenever they met. They ate together and -walked out together. But I found out very quickly that, while she -directed the affairs of the household, and looked after the children, -she did not interfere with his work, except to help him. She looked -after all of us, to see that we were made comfortable, and often, when -my morning’s work was finished, she would say: ‘Tomori San, bring your -books; perhaps I may be able to help you.’ Truly, she is a good woman, -as her husband is a good man. - -“Everybody in the house was required to come in the dining-room, in the -morning before breakfast, and in the evening after supper. When Tanaka -came for me the first morning, and I asked him what this meant, he only -smiled, and told me to ask again, in about two weeks. I thought it was -part of my duty, and, of course, I went. I watched Tanaka, and did as -he did. We sat down, and the physician read to us in his own language; -what it was, I could not understand. Then they all fell on their knees, -while he spoke aloud; at last, he and his family sang, and then we were -dismissed. I saw that Tanaka was unwilling to explain, and did not -press him. In about two weeks I began to understand some of the words, -and then it dawned upon me with horror, that this physician belonged -to the jashui mono,[55] the corrupt sect. Then I remembered the edict -of Iyeyasu[56]:--‘The Christians have come to Japan to disseminate an -evil law, to overthrow right doctrine, so that they may change the -government of the country and obtain possession of the land. If they -are not prohibited, the safety of the state will surely be imperiled; -and if those charged with the government of the nation do not extirpate -the evil, they will expose themselves to Heaven’s rebuke.’ I was -horror-struck, and felt that, indeed, I was running in danger for the -sake of the clan. But that same thought calmed me. What was the danger -compared to the clan. And as I grew calmer, I remembered that I did -not see any crosses, and that the priests of Iyeyasu’s time were not -permitted to marry. Still, as my duty permitted me to go into any room, -at any time of the day or evening, I watched the physician, his wife -and children so closely that they could do nothing without it being -known to me. I had my pains for my trouble. I discovered nothing, -because there was nothing concealed. I kept watching, I never relaxed -until the time I left, because it was my duty to the clan. I have since -discovered that the physician and his wife are Christians, but surely -there has been either a terrible mistake made, or there are two sorts -of Christians. At any rate, they do not belong to any corrupt sect. - -“I will now sum up my experience. I have learned their language to -a considerable extent. I have learned that there are many foreign -nations, differing in language, habits, customs, as much as we differ -from those of China and Korea. I have also received from the physician -a book which gives the size of each country, the population, the army, -navy, and a great many other interesting facts; but I would doubt its -accuracy, only the physician tells me that it is very nearly correct. -What made me doubt is that, in referring to Dai Nippon, which they -called Japan, it is stated that we have two emperors, one spiritual and -one temporal, whom they name Tai Kun.[57] When I showed this to the -physician, he smiled, and said that it was our fault that foreigners -knew so little of our country, because we had never permitted them to -come and enjoy its beauty.” - -Inouye then produced one of the large geographies used in our schools. -He showed them the map of the world, and the size of Japan compared -with that of other nations. The map of the United States was closely -examined, as well as that of the ocean which separates it from Japan. -All this was new to Kano and Ito, and both were absorbed in the -subject. Inouye explained as much as his limited knowledge of English -would permit; although his progress in that language, considering the -time he had been able to devote to its study, was simply marvelous. -At last Kano requested Inouye to put the book up until some other -opportunity. The geography was then carefully wrapped up in cotton, -and again in embroidered silk, showing the great value attached to it. -Both Kano and Ito asked minutely about the daily life of the physician, -whom they did no longer mention as “barbarian,” but Oisha-san,[58] -Honorable Mr. Physician, a token of the favorable impression made upon -them by Inouye’s simple account. All these questions were answered -promptly, and it was past midnight when Kano broke up the meeting with -the words:-- - -“Gentlemen, this has been a very pleasant evening to me, none the less -because I am surprised. My experience is very different from that of -Mr. Inouye. I intended to give it to you this evening, but he has -beguiled us with his interesting account. The clan will appreciate what -he has done: the knowledge he has acquired will be of great usefulness, -and his loyalty to the clan deserves recognition.” - -Kano called a guard to conduct the two friends to their quarters, and -all retired to rest. - - - - -XI - -CHOSHIU’S YASHIKI - - -The next morning had been a busy one for Kano. All the officers of the -clan, entitled to the privilege, had called to pay their respects. -It was eleven o’clock when the Commandant requested an audience. He -was admitted, and reported that the evening before one of the younger -samurai, returning home from a visit to a Tosa friend, had been grossly -insulted by two men; that he had drawn his sword and had killed one and -seriously wounded the other. The affair had taken place not far from -the yashiki, and the captain of the guard had despatched some men to -the scene. The wounded man was carried in and had since died. He bore -the Tokugawa crest, and a letter addressed to the Go rojiu was found -upon him. The Commandant delivered the letter, and asked what was to be -done. - -Kano had listened with little interest, only ejaculating sometimes a -polite nara hudo![59] to show that he was listening. When he read the -inscription,--the name of the sender is always upon the address of a -letter,--there was no longer lack of interest. It was from Sawa! Was it -a trap or was it fate? His questions showed the importance of the case. - -Had the samurai been placed under arrest? - -Certainly. - -Who is he? ’Hm! a man above reproach. - -What are his habits? Regular? Very well, but let him be closely -investigated. Enjoin the strictest silence upon the guard. Let the body -be placed in a coffin, ready for funeral. Was the man’s comrade dead? -That was ascertained? Very well. The matter would be duly considered, -and instructions would follow in due time. - -Kano was toying with the letter. What should he do? This was a business -that must be decided by the Council of the Clan. But who constituted -the council? Kano smiled, for he was alone. Hattori and himself. -Hattori had his own opinions--until he was made acquainted with those -of Kano. That was all true, but this was a matter of life and death, -and Kano hesitated. Suddenly a thought struck him. “Yes,” he thought, -“that young man has brains, and thinks for himself; he is the man I -need.” He clapped his hands, and when the attendant appeared, desired -him to invite Mr. Inouye to call at once, and that his friend Mr. Ito -should favor him with a visit after dinner. - -He had not long to wait before Inouye appeared. Kano at once invited -him to enter, and at once told him of the fight and the difficulty it -involved. Inouye’s face was expressionless, but when Kano asked him -what he would do in this case, he inquired: - -“Has your honor examined the samurai?” - -Kano replied by requesting him to act as secretary, and together they -repaired to the Commandant’s quarters. Writing materials were brought, -and the prisoner entered. - -He was a manly youth, twenty or twenty-two years old. He prostrated -himself before the councillor, and, upon being told to give an account -of the affair, he told simply that he had applied for and received a -pass from the Commandant to visit a friend in the Tosa yashiki. That he -had returned home by way of the inner castle wall, and, after crossing -the bridge, two samurai had purposely run against him, and called him -a lout. He had demanded an apology, whereupon one of them had ordered -him upon his knees. At that insult he had drawn his sword, and had -duly punished the insolent braggards. He had then returned home, and -reported the affair to the Commandant. - -Kano had the prisoner removed, but when the Commandant reported that he -was of exemplary antecedents and conduct, he was brought in again, and, -after exhorting him to keep silence, he was commended for his courage -and discharged. The Councillor gave orders to have the body cremated, -and returned with Inouye to the Palace. - -They had dinner together, and after the room had been cleared, and the -servants withdrawn, Kano deliberately opened the letter, and read it. -He then handed it over to Inouye, who also read it carefully, returning -it to Kano, who said: - -“It seems that we must return to Nagato. Sawa’s conscience begins to -prick him unless the council has stopped his supply of money, or he has -been reproved by the Go rojiu. He says in his letter that it is said -that I am ill, but that he does not quite believe it. Well, as soon -as I get back, I shall invite him to call, and scold him roundly for -neglecting me so long. That, and a few hundred riyo, will appease his -tender conscience. I wish I could sweep the whole Tokugawa breed from -the soil of Dai Nippon! Ah! here is your friend Ito!” - -As soon as the expected guest was seated Kano said: - -“It is now my turn, gentlemen, to go over my experiences with the -foreign devils. Mr. Inouye will remember how I went to Yokohama in -search of work. When I arrived, I entered a tea house, and after -taking a cup or two, inquired where I might get work. I was directed -to the hatoba,[60] where I found a number of ninzoku, moving cases -and bales. I asked of one of them who was their employer. He rudely -pointed to a man of about my own height, who was scribbling in a book. -I went to this person, and offered my services. The rude dog said -curtly:--‘Wait!’ I tell you, gentlemen, it was well that I had left -my swords behind, for I came very near forgetting myself; as it was, -my palms itched. The people close by seemed accustomed to this sort -of treatment, for no one paid attention, except one who looked at me -curiously for a moment. After about five minutes, the fellow came up -to me, looked me over as you would look over a horse you wished to -buy, and then said curtly: ‘Come to-morrow at seven. If you are late, -you need not come at all,’ I said nothing, but promised to teach that -fellow manners, before we parted finally. Nevertheless, I was on hand -in time the next morning and enjoyed some very wholesome muscular -exercise. It was then that I had occasion to notice the first foreign -devil. He was a tall and well-built man with reddish hair and beard, -and walked as if the earth belonged to him. A small coolie was in his -way, and he lifted his foot, and kicked, actually kicked, that poor -fellow out of his way. I jumped up as if I had been struck myself, when -the same man who had looked so oddly at me the day before, seized me -by the girdle, and without looking up, whispered:--‘You are forgetting -your purpose!’ He was right, and brought me to my senses. Well, -gentlemen, that day I saw Japanese wantonly struck and knocked down, -without any provocation whatever, by several of those foreign devils. -At noon most of the coolies ate their lunch where they worked, but the -man who had spoken to me came up and said: ‘There is a small yadoya -close by, shall I show you the way?’ I thanked him, and followed. I -secured a room and was back in time to train my muscles into whipcord. - -“When evening came, I went back to the yadoya, and after taking my -bath, had supper. I must say that I enjoyed both more than I ever had -before. I was about to lie down, when I remembered that I had not -thanked my unknown friend, who decidedly was not what he seemed. I was -going down to ask the landlord if he knew him, when I saw him standing -in the door. He motioned to follow him; so, securing a lantern from the -landlord, I did so. He led the way past many houses built of stone, to -a creek. There was a rude bridge, leading to a path ascending to the -hills. At the crest he stopped and waited. We were at a point where -nobody could approach us unobserved, and he bowed as only gentlemen do. -Of course, I returned the salute in the same manner. He then said:-- - -“‘Disguise between you and me is useless. Down below there, I am -Eto,[61] a ninzoku; here I am Teraji,[62] a Satsuma samurai, at your -service.’ - -“I have not yet decided what I am down below,” I replied, “but at this -moment I am Kano of Choshiu, very glad to acknowledge the service -rendered to me by the Honorable Teraji of Satsuma.” - -“‘Oh! that is nothing. The situation _is_ sometimes a little awkward. I -understood your feeling, and was on the lookout. These foreign devils -_are_ brutal, but it is their nature, I suppose, and they can not -help it. But I grieve to notice that this sort of conduct renders our -people, who come in contact with them, brutish. They lose all respect -for authority and the Tokugawa, or whoever succeeds them in power, is -going to have trouble with this class of people.’ - -“You do not mean to say that the ninzoku are deficient in respect to -our authorities?” - -“‘If they are not yet, they are rapidly growing so. You will notice -it yourself. At the same time, you will observe that there is a very -great difference among the foreigners. While none of them possess the -breeding of a gentleman, there are some naturally wicked, while others -have a kindlier disposition. I do not believe that there are many who -like to inflict pain. It is easy to perceive that none of them have -learned self-restraint, but that they are all under the influence of -the passion of the moment. The brute who kicked that poor ninzoku for -instance. He was in a hurry, and it was less trouble for him to reach -his destination by making room for himself in this manner, than to wait -until the coolie could make room for him.’ - -“What astonished me is that the ninzoku took the attack without -resenting it.” - -“‘Well, there are two reasons. Some did resent it at first, but these -foreigners are trained to use their fists, and, man for man, our people -have no chance. But wait until the coolies grow acquainted. At present -they are from the poorest and most thriftless classes of all parts of -Japan. Soon, however, they will all be residents of Yokohama, and then -they will form into a union. When that time comes I will venture to say -that there will be few foreigners who will dare use either fists or -feet. But it is getting late. To-morrow we do not work. Every seventh -day, the foreigners have a holiday, and we shall be able to take a long -walk.’ - -“We returned to the inn, and parted at the door with a boorish bow. -That was the extent of my experience on the first day. It was enough to -supply me with food for thought.” - - - - -XII - -SONNO-JOI - - -Kano rose slowly and left the room. When he returned after a brief -absence, he was in kamishimo,[63] a white or hemp-colored dress used -only upon the most solemn occasions. He sat down between the two -friends, who, astonished as they felt, maintained the same impressive -countenance. After thinking for a few minutes, which to Ito and Inouye -seemed an age, he resumed:-- - -[Illustration: “HE WAS IN KAMISHIMO.”] - -“Gentlemen, Mr. Teraji and myself have given the barbarians a fair -trial, and we have come to the conclusion that they are not wanted in -this fair land of ours. We do not believe that they have any other -object in view except trade, but whether they have or not, it is -immaterial: they must be expelled. It is the duty of the Shogun to do -this, and, were Iyeyasu or Iyemitsu living, I have no doubt the -Tokugawa clan would be quite able to accomplish the work in such a -manner that the barbarians would think twice before they returned to -these shores. Unfortunately, the long peace we have had, has exercised -a bad influence upon the Shogun and the clan. Gentlemen, I must trust -you entirely. There can be no doubt of the loyalty of Kano to the house -of Mori, and yet I dare not repeat, even to my old friend Hattori, what -I am about to say to you now. You notice my dress? I put it on because, -unless you agree with me, I shall commit seppuku.[64] But pray, give me -your close attention. - -“It is said, at Nagato, that Kano governs the Choshiu clan, and, in the -main it is true, although the other councillors are always consulted. -But our Lord Mori is not. He does not know any more about the affairs -of the clan, than the ordinary samurai. He is a brave, kind gentleman, -who would lead his clan into battle, or commit seppuku, as well as the -bravest among us. But he has been trained to have others think for -him, and provide for all his wants. That is all very well, so long as -peace reigns, and in a small territory like Choshiu. But the same rule -prevails in every clan, and not only there, but in the Yedo government. -The last Shogun were children, and died young. Iyesáda,[65] the present -Shogun, is only a boy. The government is, therefore, conducted by the -Go rojiu, and the regent. Ii Naosuke occupies the same position which I -hold in our clan. - -“I do not know him, but from what I hear, he has brains and courage. He -is entitled to those qualities, for his ancestor was one of Iyeyasu’s -most trusted captains. Yet he has granted all that the barbarians -demanded. It has puzzled me, and is puzzling me still, why he did so. -Teraji told me that these barbarians had defeated the flower of China’s -army, and were ready to throw their hosts upon these shores. But the -80,000 samurai of the Tokugawa clans should be strong enough to prevent -any army from landing. - -“I remember, however, what Mr. Ito told me about the Tokugawa samurai, -and my own observation has confirmed his opinion. They are worthless, -and a disgrace to us. Why, look at that fellow whose body was cremated -yesterday but which should have been thrown to the dogs. He was -intrusted with a dispatch, yet engaged in a brawl before executing his -commission. Such a man is unworthy of being a samurai. Ii Naosuke must -have known this, and submitted out of loyalty to the descendant of -Iyeyasu. He, too, labors under great difficulties. The Tokugawa family -is divided. Mito,[66] notwithstanding his ancestor’s will, hopes to see -one of his sons succeed as Shogun. If, then, the barbarians must be -expelled, it is not the Tokugawa who are able to do it, and therefore -that family must be deprived of their power. - -“That is the first step. It will take, however, the united efforts of -several clans to accomplish it, and the question is: Can a sufficient -number of clans be brought to do the work without jealousy. I think -not, unless we can secure the person of Tenshi Sama and thereby use his -seal.” - -Both Ito and Inouye, trained in self-control as they were, could not -help giving a start. Kano did not seem to notice it, and continued: - -“The seal of Tenshi Sama will be obeyed by every clan. The Regent -knows that, and has applied to Kyoto to have the treaties confirmed. -Happily, there are some among the Kugé,[67] who do not want Tenshi Sama -to be mixed up in this matter. They have replied that ‘if there must -be treaties with the barbarians, the Go rojiu must see to it that they -are admitted into the vicinity of Kyoto.’ Therefore, the Regent is -sorely disappointed. No doubt, he will make further efforts. But some -of us must enter into communication with some Kugé, and prevent his -success; and, if there is any possibility of securing possession of the -Gosho,[68] it must be done. - -“We can not confide our plans to other clans. They would think at once -that Choshiu wishes to succeed Tokugawa. Perhaps it does. All we do -know is that Iyeyasu, who humbled the proudest clan, humbly begged -Tenshi Sama to appoint him as Shogun. If he had not possessed the -imperial authority, not even he could have prevented constant revolts. -But he did possess it, and that is why my ancestor advised his lord -not to join the insurgents. It may be, however, that the time has come -to wipe out the clan’s disgrace, and my ancestor’s death. If so, let -Tokugawa look to it! That proud clan shall feel what it is when the -hand of the despoiler wields a conqueror’s magic wand. Now, gentlemen, -I have given you my opinion, and if I have spoken treason, I shall -expiate my sin at once and in your presence, that no taint may rest -upon my son. If, on the contrary, you agree with me, I need all the -help that your devotion to the clan can offer. But perhaps you would -like to ask any questions?” - -Inouye waited for Ito to speak, but when he perceived his friend to be -buried in thought, he said:-- - -“Perhaps your honor may be willing to explain what caused your hurried -departure from Yokohama, and why I was ordered to resign at a minute’s -notice.” - -“Teraji was to blame for it,” replied Kano, “although I share in the -blame. A boy committed an error in piling up cases to be loaded in a -ship, and was brutally maltreated by the master. Sorely hurt, he was -unable to go on with his work, when the Japanese who engaged me, after -ridiculing the lad, gave him such a push that the lad fell and broke -his leg. It happened just before the time when we were dismissed for -the day, and I found Teraji waiting for me. He told me that he wished -to speak to me right after supper, and I knew at once that my sword -would be required. So I hastened to Kanagawa, and had no difficulty in -securing speech with you. After you had given me my swords, I told you -to be at our yashiki here the next day, and returned to the yadoya, -where I found Teraji, standing motionless in the shadow of a house. He -too, had buckled on his swords, and I scarcely recognized the former -ninzoku. We saluted as became gentlemen, and he told me that he was -waiting for a messenger. It was almost midnight when a boy appeared, -and after looking first at me and then at him, beckoned us to follow. -In one of the new streets we saw the master of the ship staggering -home. Teraji followed him as a cat steals up to a mouse, crouching, -ready for the spring. And as he did leap, out flashed his sword. -Satsuma has lost neither nerve nor muscle. There was one barbarian -less, gentlemen, and as Teraji wiped his sword upon the clothes of the -dog, he said: ‘Now let us begone.’ ‘No, not yet,’ said I. This time I -took the lead to the house of the Japanese brute. I disliked to soil -my dagger in the scoundrel’s dirty blood, but I desired to avoid an -outcry. When we came to his house, I called him and told him he was -wanted at the hatoba. He did not hesitate. We took him through the -street where the master still lay, and when he bent over to see who it -was, I took care that he did not get up again. When we examined him -to see if he was dead, Teraji exclaimed at the likeness with me. To -make it appear more so, he helped me to exchange kimono, then I gave -a few cuts in his face, and we left him. We made our way unobserved -into Kanagawa, and from there to Yedo. Teraji went to Satsuma’s yashiki -and I arrived here, wholly unobserved, I am sure. I had some little -difficulty in convincing our worthy commandant of my identity.” - -“Then your honor thinks that there is no suspicion among the metsuke of -your being here?” - -“I think not.” - -“What orders does it please your honor to give us?” - -“Then you agree with me that I am right. That is well. Now, gentlemen, -this may cost your lives. The clan must not be compromised. Mr. -Inouye has written his resignation, you Mr. Ito must do the same. -Inouye must go to Kyoto, and enter into communication with the Gosho. -I shall join him there, after I have shown myself to the clan, and -given the necessary instructions to my friend Hattori. You, Ito, must -visit the clans, as a rônin. Do not spare money. Entertain freely. -Tell every samurai who is willing to listen of how the barbarians are -desecrating the land of the gods. Be prudent, but raise the battle-cry -of Sonno-Joï[69]; Revere the Emperor, Expel the Barbarian! That cry -must be heard from Hokaido to Kiu-siu. Yours will not be a difficult -task. Our young samurai, except those Tokugawa she-monkeys,[70] are -anxious enough to test their blades. You will find many of them willing -to provoke a war. Direct them to Kyoto. It will need a very strong cry -to awaken the court to action, after its centuries of sleep. But do not -supply them with money. We do not want any hirelings within our ranks, -we need patriots.” - -Ito bowed, and said thoughtfully: “Your honor is right in saying -that mine is an easy task. There will be no difficulty in raising the -cry of Sonno-Joï, nor in getting brawny arms to clasp the hilt of the -sword. But who shall stifle the cry or sheath the blades, after they -have served the purpose? I have heard of little boys, in the mountains -of the north, starting a snowball down the hill; and when it did come -down, a whole village lay buried.” - -“That is so,” replied Kano. “But our country has never in vain called -for men to guide it in time of danger, nor will it now. One or two -clans are powerless to preserve it from the barbarians, but all the -clans united, are invincible. Here is an order upon the treasurer. Take -an ample supply of money, for you will need it. When will you be ready -to start?” - -“As soon as your honor commands,” replied Ito bowing. - -“Do so, then, as soon as possible. Mr. Inouye will keep me company as -far as Hyogo. I have a passage engaged by a ship leaving to-morrow. In -all our actions let us never forget our motto: Sonno-Joï, Revere the -Emperor, Expel the Foreigner!” - - - - -XIII - -PLOTTING - - -Two men, dressed in kimono, haori, and hakama were sitting in one -of the numerous temples which add to the natural beauty of the old -imperial capital of Japan. The noon meal was over, but neither had an -eye for the glorious landscape spread out before them. To the right and -left a wave of mountains seemed to roll up in ever increasing height, -until those in the background pierced the deep-blue sky. The hills -about the city were clad in a mantle of green of every shade, from the -dark needles of the fir to the light shoots of the bamboo. Crag and -cliff bore the crimson torii, the unique indication of the proximity of -temple or shrine. Yonder, at their feet, lay the holy of holiest, the -Gosho, the residence of Tenshi Sama, the representative of the Yamato -Damashii,[71] the fierce Spirit of Old Japan. A fierce spirit! Men -trained to consider duty the sole motive, reckless of pain, and inured -to the sight of blood, are not sparing of that precious fluid when they -are bent upon the execution of a purpose. Yet the recluse yonder, the -very incarnation of that spirit, dwelling in the temple-like building -surrounded by enchanted gardens, seemed unconscious of his power to -stir millions of brave men into action, by a mere use of his seal. - -“Then his lordship thinks that it can be done?” asked Inouye, for he -was one of the occupants of the room. - -The man thus addressed, bowed low, and said:--“My master has sent -your honor a haori with his crest. I passed through the gate, and left -my name ticket; then pretending that I had forgotten something, went -in again, and when I came out I deposited the ticket of Mr. Kida, a -distant relative, who was admitted in the service of my master. It is -time that we should go. If your honor will put on this haori, and, upon -entering the gate, demand Kida’s ticket, there will be no difficulty.” - -Inouye dressed, and the two descended toward the city. The road passed -by one of the Gosho gates, and the guide entered, exclaiming his -name, whereupon he received a wooden ticket with his name in large -characters, and passed through. Inouye followed his example, and -received a similar ticket bearing the name of Kida. The two then walked -up a broad gravel path toward one of the enclosures. - -Notwithstanding all his self control, Inouye experienced great -difficulty in not betraying his intense curiosity. He, as every -Japanese of his class, thought with intense reverence of Tenshi Sama. -His heart would have leaped for joy if he had received orders to die -that moment for the man he had never seen. We can not understand that -feeling. Loyalty is a meaningless sound compared to it. Yet it was that -feeling which metamorphosed a federacy of some three hundred autonomous -oligarchies, poverty stricken and at war with one another, into a -powerful empire which bids Russia defiance. This marvel, too, was -accomplished in less than three decades! - -Inouye’s curiosity was, therefore, blended with awe. The guide -stopped before a house of modest dimensions, but of light and -elegant construction, and, bowing, preceded his companion. Stopping -on the verandah, he uttered his name in a low but distinct voice. -An answer was returned, and he beckoned Inouye to enter. The latter -did so, and, prostrating himself, ejaculated rapidly such phrases of -self-depreciation as the high rank of a Kugé demanded. - -Karassu Maru,[72] the master of the house, was a young man of about -Inouye’s age, dressed in haori, hakama, and kimono all of fine silk. He -scanned Ito’s features keenly, and appeared satisfied with the result. -He was evidently of a quick, impulsive temper, but used the courtly -language, and strictly observed his own dignity. - -“I am informed that you have a proposition to place before me on behalf -of Mori.[73]” - -“I am but the messenger, My Lord, and my authority extends only to -requesting an audience of your lordship for the first councillor and -friend of my Lord Mori.” - -“But, you know, there is some danger in coming to and going from the -Gosho. Our friends of the Aidzu Clan, whom the Go rojiu has kindly -deputed to guard us here, seem to scent danger, for they have drawn the -lines tighter and tighter. It would be better if I knew something of -what Mori wishes, so that both time and risk could be saved.” - -“I will tell you, my lord, what I know.” - -Inouye then gave a comprehensive but concise review of Kido’s -intentions, reserving, of course, the conclusions of his leader, and -the share he intended to assign to the Gosho. Karassu Maru listened -attentively, and when Inouye concluded, he said: - -“When do you expect the councillor of your clan?” - -“He will come, your Lordship, as soon as I let him know that he may -have an audience.” - -“I am willing to hear him, but he will need great powers of persuasion. -Of my personal friends, one is an idiot, and the other a fool. No; I -can’t do a thing, although I would like to try. The affair ought to -be begun by one of the Miya,[74] but that is altogether out of the -question. Ni-jo?[75] bah! he would not stir. Sanjo? Yes, he might. Aye, -I think that he would. Hold on! There is Tomomi. He is the man!” - -This was evidently not destined for the ears of Inouye, who was -listening but without any expression in his features. Karassu Maru -looked up, and said:-- - -“See that Mori’s councillor is here on the tenth day from now. The same -retainer who brought you here will call for him, and I shall arrange -a meeting. Now about getting out. He clapped his hands, and when the -attendant appeared, he said: ‘Get the football ready, and invite -Honami and Gojo with their retainers to join me in a game. You, sir, -come along. When we come to the wall near the gate the guard will be -watching us. See to it that you do not kick it over the wall, for I am -a good hand at scolding, and you would not care to be called clumsy, -would you? If, however, you should send it flying over the wall, run -after it, and throw it back. We shall entertain the guard.’” - -It was dark when Inouye returned to the temple, but he wrote at once to -Kano. The letter was foolish, and made the writer appear to live only -for amusement. It described the magnificence of the temples and urged -Kano to be present at a festival to take place on the tenth day. There -was nothing in it of the slightest interest to any spy. - -Kano was at home when the letter was delivered to him. He saw, after -a close examination, that it had been opened, but smiled after he had -read its contents. He knew the spy. Why had Sawa so earnestly requested -him to admit among his retainers a young friend who had some slight -trouble in his own clan? Kano had demurred to keep up appearances, -but finally he had agreed, and he knew that there was no longer any -privacy in his house. It was immaterial to him. He did not know of one -member of his clan in whom he could trust. Not that there was any doubt -whatever of their loyalty, but one thoughtless word or action would -upset all his plans. He was glad that he had two such friends as Ito -and Inouye. Sonno-Joï! Why he had heard that cry in his own clan, here -at the confines of Hondo. There had been no communication from him, and -this was the first that he received from Inouye. Truly, there was a -chance for Choshiu when the clan numbered among its members such men. -O! if Ekichi might only grow up to such a standard. - -He clapped his hands and ordered the child to be called. The boy came, -knelt at the threshold, and saluted his father with the reverence due -to him, and the gravity of a man. Kano bowed in return, and said:-- - -“Come here.” - -The boy came, bowed, and squatted down. - -“Are you doing well at school?” - -Ekichi bowed. - -“Read that to me,” he continued, taking up a book. The boy began to -read in the sing-song tone necessary to render ideographic writing -intelligible to the reader. His father then inquired after his progress -in athletic exercises, and finally said: “Come, we shall go into the -garden!” - -They walked together to an artificial hillock, found in every Japanese -garden of any pretensions, and ascended to the top. Here, safe from -spies, Kano turned to his son: - -“Listen, Ekichi,” he said. “You know the new attendant who came here -some months ago?” The child bowed. “Very well; I want you to be the -shadow of that man. He must not be anywhere, or you must see him; he -may not say a word, or you must hear what it is. I am going away for -a few weeks, and when I am back, you must read on this hillock every -afternoon, until I come up, and then you must tell me what this man has -done, whom he has seen and what he has said. Can you do that do you -think?” - -The little fellow felt overjoyed at this token of his father’s -confidence, but not a look betrayed that feeling. He accepted the -charge with a simple bow, and went with his father back to the house. - -Kano dressed, and ordered his chair. When he entered it, he said -briefly: “To the castle!” Alighting at the inner entrance, he -distinctly ejaculated his name; a servant appeared and bade him enter. - -The room was almost the same as his sitting-room in his own house. -There was no furniture, but a kakemono,[76] of priceless value in -Japanese eyes, hung from the wall so that the light fell upon it. A few -bronze pieces, masterworks of art, stood where they appeared to demand -admiration. In the middle of the room sat the owner of the estate, -an estimable gentleman of middle age, dressed in magnificent silk. -Kano saluted dutifully and was bidden to approach. He sat down at the -prescribed distance, and waited for his master to address him. - -“I am glad you called,” said Mori. “I want the garden changed, and my -cousin told me that the council had appropriated too much money for -the fortifications at Shimonoseki. What fad is this? Those works were -constructed under my grandfather, and could not be made better. It is -more important by far that the garden be altered. Come here! Do you not -see that if I sit here and look out, that hillock yonder interrupts the -view? It must be changed.” - -Kano bowed low and said: “It shall be done, my lord. I am going to -Kyoto on business for the clan. Is there anything I can do for you?” - -“Why, certainly. If you can pick up any fine antiquities, do so. And -you must order new haori for the retainers. They will need them on our -next journey to Yedo.” - -Kano promised to attend to these matters, and took his leave. Closing -the sho ji behind him, he went to a distant part of the palace, and -called an attendant. “Request Mr. Hattori to come here,” he said. -Hattori came, and his friend told him that he was called to Kyoto -on private business, and would be absent for two or three weeks. He -requested him to see that the garden was altered according to the -wishes of the Lord of the Manor. Hattori promised to comply. Kano then -proceeded to Sawa’s yashiki, and told him that he had come to bid him -good-bye, as he was going to Kyoto under orders from my lord to buy -some new ornaments. He asked for a letter to the commandant of the -castle at Kyoto, a request which was willingly granted. When Kano left, -a small bag of gold remained on the cushion which he had occupied. - - - - -XIV - -WITHIN THE PALACE - - -In one of the kuge residences, not far from the palace occupied by the -Tenshi sama, four men had just exchanged the protracted salutations -prescribed by their rank. All knew that this very meeting would be -considered as treason if it were known to the authorities at Yedo, and -they felt, intuitively, that it would exercise a great influence upon -their lives. Yet every face bore but one expression, that of placid -contentment. - -Sanjo, as the highest in rank, spoke first:--“His Lordship, Karassu -Maru has informed us that the chief Councillor of Mori desires to make -a communication. It is long since the chief of a clan desired the -intercession of a kuge.” - -Kano bowed:--“It is the fault of the Tokugawa, My Lord. The clans -are shut out from Kyoto. We are not permitted to occupy our yashiki -here, unless we secure the gracious consent of the men who rule at -Yedo. I know none of the old families, Mori, Shimadzu,[77] who would -not willingly enroll himself among the lowest servants of the Son of -Heaven. If you are robbed of the homage which is your due, surely we -suffer more severely by being shut out from the sacred presence.” - -Sanjo bowed, and looked at Iwakura Tomomi, who said:--“You speak -well, Sir Knight, and we do not hold the clans responsible for their -compulsory neglect of His Majesty. But we shall be glad to hear what it -is that Mori of Nagato desires of us.” - -“Your Lordships, the Tokugawa has admitted barbarians within the realm -of the divine ancestors. They are now upsetting all our time-honored -customs at Kanagawa, and demand admittance at Hyogo. Your humble -servant has dwelt for six weeks among them. I desired to study -them, because I was anxious to know if their unhallowed presence -foreboded evil to our country. I am convinced that it does. The five -relations[78] upon which our social system rests are disregarded and -set at nought by them. They respect nothing we respect. They are rude -and insolent, and act as if the country of the gods was theirs by right -of conquest. They defy our laws. Who ever heard of a merchant talking -back to a samurai? Not only do they do this, but they dare order them -about.” - -“Have you seen that yourself?” asked Sanjo. - -“I have, my Lord.” - -“And what did the Tokugawa Knights do?” - -“They did as they were bidden; they obeyed the orders of the insolent -dogs.” - -“Was no complaint brought?” - -“Who would bring a complaint, and before whom? The samurai is not -accustomed to seek protection. He protects, and in such a quarrel, -his good sword is both judge and executioner. But, alas! the Tokugawa -samurai is no longer a knight. He has forgotten the existence of the -word duty, and has substituted the word pleasure. The country is no -longer safe under the guidance of the Tokugawa. It must be taken away -from them.” - -“And given to Mori?” asked Karassu Maru. - -“That may be decided later, my lord,” said Kano calmly. “At present it -is not a question of who shall rule with Tenshi Sama’s consent, but if -the country shall be safe from the invasion of the barbarians. They may -not come in large numbers for some years; but if they upset all our -sacred customs, they can ruin Japan without any armed invasion. They -are but few in number now, your lordships, and we can expel them. But -if we wait for a few years, they will have obtained such a foothold -that we may not be able to succeed.” - -“But what can we do?” asked Iwakura. - -“Your lordship, there is but one way. Tenshi Sama may order the -Tokugawa to expel the barbarians, the order will not be obeyed, because -the clan can not do it, and will not entrust the work to other clans. -But Tenshi Sama can give an order to all the clans to do it, and I know -of some who will obey His Majesty’s orders, regardless of consequences.” - -“But,” said Sanjo, “you know that Tokugawa is Shogun; all orders must -be issued to him; such is the law and the custom.” - -“But if Tokugawa can not, or will not obey?” - -Here was a supposition which was very unpalatable, and the three kuge -were silent. Orders had been issued from the Palace before, and had -been disregarded, but the kuge had been respectfully assured that -they had been obeyed. Iwakura knew of one instance, and the angry -blood appeared almost through the thick coating of self-control and -restraint. At last Karassu Mara said: - -“What would you have us do?” - -“Send peremptory orders to the Go rojiu, and let the clans know that -such orders have been sent.” - -“Do you know, Sir Knight,” he asked, “how we are situated here? Aidzu, -one of the Tokugawa clans that will fight, confound it! has a guard at -every gate. Not a soul goes in or out, but they know who he is, and I -shall be very much astonished and glad for your sake, if you return -home without some disagreeable encounter. Why! They discovered after -your messenger had left that a stranger had been in the palace grounds, -and there was a fine hue and cry. The captain of the guard came to -me and dared ask questions; I don’t think he will do it again, for I -made him understand the difference between a kuge and a dog. We could -contrive, perhaps, to send a secret order. But an open order to the -clans! Why, that messenger must be nimble-footed who could get as far -as one hundred yards from the gate!” - -“No!” said Sanjo, “that suggestion is worthless. Mark you, Sir Knight, -I do not deny that the Tokugawa hand has rested heavily upon the Gosho, -but under whatever circumstances, the Court has maintained its dignity. -Nor would any infringement be permitted. Besides, while it is true that -his Lordship Iwakura and myself are members of the Inner Council, we -are but two, and the majority is composed of old men, wedded to the -secluded, contemplative life we lead. If you have no other suggestion -to offer, I am afraid that we can not help you.” - -“But, my Lord,” said Kano, “surely, that life of seclusion and -contemplation ends as soon as the barbarians land at Hyogo. They are, -even now, clamoring to be admitted into Yedo. It is only a question of -time, perhaps of very brief time, before they will demand admittance -in Kyoto, and from what I have seen of them, they will not show any -respect for the Sacred Enclosure.” - -Karassu Maru grasped the hilt of his sword, while Iwakura and Sanjo -were startled. - -“Ah! That must be prevented at any cost!” said the former, and Sanjo -bowed assent. - -After a few moments Iwakura made a movement indicating the termination -of the audience, saying: “Sir Knight, we shall report our conference to -the Council. We do not pretend to know what the result will be, but I -suppose that, if we wish to communicate with you, his lordship Karassu -Maru will know how to reach you.” Deep bows and sucking of the breath -followed, and Kano left escorted by Karassu Maru, who led the way to a -secluded part of the grounds. - -“Now then, Sir Knight, what do you think of the prospect? Encouraging, -is it not? And the two gentlemen whom we have left just now, are the -most progressive. Now, let me give you a hint. The Miya and kuge, I say -it with all respect, have taken root into the ground. That root must -be torn up by main force, before they will move. Pull the ground from -under them and you will succeed. If you can not find means to do that, -return to your clan and prepare to defend yourself. By the way! Are you -acquainted with a gigantic Satsuma knight, who loves the Tokugawa as -much as you do?” - -“I am not, my Lord,” said Kano, surprised. - -“Well, he, too, is in hiding in some temple. Hunt him up, and work -together. Two can do more than one. Now, how are you going to leave -here?” - -“I saw a nosimono going to one of the palaces a moment ago, is it going -beyond the gate?” - -“Yes, that is his lordship Honami, who is so exceedingly bright that he -can go wherever and whenever he pleases, but why?” - -“Can not your lordship arrange that I shall be one of the bearers?” - -“Why, certainly. Come this way and wait in that copse.” Karassu Maru -returned after half an hour’s absence, evidently in great glee. He said -that Honami had consented to carry a package to the temple where Inouye -had rooms. Karassu Maru then handed to Kano a chair-bearer’s coat, and -kerchief to tie around his head. It took only a minute to change the -clothes, and to make a bundle of haori, hakama, kimono, and swords. A -little later Honami’s well-known nosimono passed through the gate borne -by four stalwart men. When it returned there were only three. One had -been lost, and poor Honami’s privileges were curtailed, while the other -chairbearers were subjected to a severe but useless examination. - - - - -XV - -UNDERGROUND RUMBLING - - -The Choshiu Clan was by no means alone in taking the alarm at the -admittance of foreigners. The Japanese, as a nation, possess a dual -character, which was typified in their government. Just as the -Gosho at Kyoto presented the highest degree of refinement attained -by the nation, as well as the amiability, natural kindness, and -light-heartedness of the people, so did the Camp at Yedo picture the -sterner side of their character inculcated and developed to the utmost -in the samurai. But the samurai shared with the people the curiosity -which is a national characteristic, and many had visited Yokohama -for the sole purpose of examining and taking the measure of these -strangers. The early history of that open port, is one of bloodshed. -Numerous are the names of foreigners in the graveyard upon the bluff, -with the inscription: Murdered. Yet in not one single instance was the -perpetrator brought to justice. Not one of these murders was for the -purpose of robbery; in every instance the sharp sword had been used to -avenge some real or fancied insult. - -Except the missionaries who arrived as soon as Japan was opened, there -were few, very few foreigners who made any effort to propitiate this -people. Most of them had lived for some time in China, where they had -met a submissive people. They treated the Japanese in the same manner, -with very unexpected results. The resentment turned from the foreigners -upon the government which had admitted them, and the Tokugawa dynasty -was doomed. - -But of the Genrô, the statesmen of revolutionary time, no one had -any thought of uniting Japan into an Empire under the direct rule of -Tenshi Sama. They knew of no history save that of their own country, -and that demonstrated the Son of Heaven as too sacred a person to be -troubled with mundane affairs. All desired a strong country under a -strong Shogun. There is not the least doubt that Satsuma, Choshiu, and -Tosa, to whom Japan chiefly owes its present greatness, worked with -that end in view. Nor does it detract from their credit that probably -each worked with the ultimate hope to see his own clan take Tokugawa’s -place. There was not an atom of selfishness in this. The chief impulses -constituting our motives in life, the acquisition of wealth and honor -or fame, were unintelligible to the Japanese at that time. - - * * * * * - -Kano returned to the temple, where he had left his chair and bearers, -for he was stopping at the Choshiu yashiki, and entered the room where -Inouye was waiting for him. Having satisfied himself that there were no -listeners, he briefly summed up the result of his interview with the -kuge. “There will be no opening of Hyogo,” he said. “The Court will -move heaven and earth, before it concedes that demand. But Karassu Maru -is right. The ground must be pulled from under them, before they will -abate one jot of their dignity, such as they understand it. By the way. -Go back to Nagato as soon as you can. The attention of the spies will -be drawn toward this temple, because one of the bearers of Honami’s -chair disappeared here. I shall follow you in a few days.” - -The two devoted samurai reached their own province in safety, and the -affairs of the clan continued peaceably, except that a considerable -number of young samurai resigned as members of the clan, and -disappeared. It was not generally known that their names were not -stricken off the rolls, but that the letters of resignation were held -in a safe place, in case of emergency. Nobody heard from Ito; at -least not directly. Indirectly the cry of Sonno Joï! growing more and -more common, showed that he was still gathering recruits in the ranks -against the Tokugawa. - -Kano smiled grimly when he received from Yedo a copy of a letter -sent by the Court to the Daimiyo of Mito. “The Bakufu” (Camp or Yedo -Government) it ran “has shown great disrespect of public opinion in -concluding treaties without waiting for the opinion of the Court, and -in disgracing princes so closely allied by blood to the Shogun. Tenshi -Sama’s rest is disturbed by the spectacle of such misgovernment when -the fierce barbarian is at our very door. Do you, therefore assist the -Bakufu with your advice, expel the barbarians, content the mind of the -samurai, and restore tranquillity to his Majesty’s bosom.” - -The wedge had entered, but time was required before it could be driven -deeper. Kano had gradually prepared his friend Hattori to share his -hopes and fears, and effective improvements had been made in the -fortifications on the coast of Nagato. Cannon, not of very modern -make, but decidedly better than the rusty fire pieces of old, had -been purchased at Nagasaki and smuggled in at Shimonoseki; a supply -of powder was also procured, and several companies of young samurai -practiced daily with the guns. Ekichi had attached himself to Inouye -and was rapidly growing into an expert swordsman. - -One evening, in the beginning of April, Kano was sitting in his room, -talking to his son. The rain doors were up, for it had been blowing -hard all day, and it looked like rain. Kano began to think that it was -time to retire, when Ekichi told him that there was a knock at the rain -doors. Kano took up a lantern, and went on the verandah, when he heard -a muffled voice calling him. He opened a door and asked who was there, -when he recognized the voice of Ito. He gladly invited him to enter, -and reclosing the door, led the way to his room. After the customary -salutations, seeing that Ito was cold and wet, he ordered dry garments -to be brought, and then inquired when he had arrived. Ito replied that -he had come straight to Kano’s yashiki, and then asked him if he had -heard the news. He received a negative answer and said:--“Before I -tell you what it is, I must warn you that you have a spy in the house.” - -“O! I know that, but he is harmless.” - -“Yes; he is harmless now; but he must have found out something because -the Go rojiu dogs were hot on my trail.” - -“Ekichi,” said Kano, “watch around the rooms; and if you see any one -trying to listen, silence him.” - -The boy bowed and slipped out. - -Ito sipped a cup of tea, and, seeing that Kano expected him to speak, -said: - -“Ii Naosuke is dead.” - -“Is that so? When did he die?” - -“He was assassinated in Yedo on the 23rd of last month.” - -Kano knocked the ashes out of his pipe, put it up, and looked for -further particulars. Ito continued:-- - -“It was blowing a severe storm in Yedo that day. There was rain and -sleet, and sometimes it snowed very heavily. The streets within the -moats of the castle are almost always deserted, but this time they -were wholly so on account of the weather. It appears that there was -some meeting at the castle. At all events the Daimiyo of Kii and Owari -with their respective retinues were marching across the bridge into -the inner walls, when the retinue of the Lord Regent also approached. -The last of the Kii samurai had just left the bridge when the head of -Ii’s retinue reached it. Several men in rain coats had been loitering; -they flung off their coats and as samurai in full armor, attacked the -regent’s escort. These men were taken unawares, and before they could -drop their rain coats a number of them had been killed and Ii was -dragged out of his nosimono, and decapitated. Several of the assailants -lost their lives, but the leader escaped with the head. It is said that -they were Mito rônin.” - -Kano was silent for some time. At last he said: “This is a death -blow for the Tokugawa, for Ii Naosuke was the only man, so far as I -know, who could have propped up that falling house. For that reason I -am glad. But I am sorry too, for Ii was a patriot. I disagreed with -him, but he may have been right when he said, in defense of the treaty -which he had made: ‘Let us have intercourse with foreign countries, -learn their drill and tactics, and let us make the nation united as one -family.’ I do not think that he could have succeeded, but--” - -There was a stifled cry and a blow. A moment later a sho ji opened, and -Ekichi came in holding in one hand the bleeding head of the spy, and in -the other his drawn sword. The boy said simply: “I have silenced him.” - -Kano and Ito both looked at the boy. He stood there, waiting patiently -until his father should address him. Ito, however, took some paper from -his sleeve, and placed it upon the woodwork of the grooves, motioning -Ekichi to put the head on it. The boy did so, and Kano told him to come -near and tell him what had happened. - -“I have watched him several times, as you told me to, when he was -trying to listen, and once when he was looking over some of your -papers. Every time he made some excuse, but I did not answer him. A few -moments ago, I passed into that room, and saw his form crouching before -the sho ji. You had ordered me to silence him, and I did so.” - -Kano said a few words in praise, and bade him go to sleep. Ekichi bowed -and withdrew. - -Kano went out of the room and in a few moments returned with Fujii. -The old man looked grimly at the head as he took it up. The body was -removed, and the bloodspots cleaned. It was merely an incident in the -life of old Japan. - - - - -XVI - -THE COURT AROUSED - - -The death of Ii Naosuke decided Kano to return to Kyoto with his -friends, Ito and Inouye, as he said grimly “to help pull the ground -from under the feet of the Court.” His acquaintance with Karassu Maru -was of material assistance to him. This kugé was of a very impulsive -temperament, with none of that self control, characteristic of the -samurai. Generous to a fault, he was implacable as a foe. While he -frightened some of the more timid kugé by the boldness of his speech, -he attracted others. The Court mustered the courage to summon the -Shogun to Kyoto, to answer the charge of misgovernment brought against -him by several clans. No Shogun had deigned doing homage to Tenshi Sama -since 1634. The humble reply from the Go rojiu was followed by another -command, in which it appeared plainly that Tenshi Sama’s advisers would -not entertain a thought of his assuming the government. It said:-- - -“Since the barbarian vessels commenced to visit this country, the -barbarians have conducted themselves in an insolent manner, without any -interference on the part of the Yedo officials. The consequence has -been that the peace of the empire has been disturbed and the people -have been plunged into misery. Tenshi Sama was profoundly distressed -at these things, and the Go rojiu on that occasion replied that -discord had arisen among the people, and it was therefore impossible -to raise an army for the expulsion of the barbarians, but that if His -Majesty would graciously give his sister in marriage to the Shogun -that then the court and camp would be reconciled, the samurai would -exert themselves, and the barbarians would be swept away. Thereupon His -Majesty good-naturedly granted the request and permitted the Princess -Kazu to go down to Yedo. Contrary to all expectations, however, -traitorous officials became more and more intimate with the barbarians -and treated the imperial family as if they were nobody; in order to -steal a day of tranquillity they forgot the long years of trouble to -follow, and were close upon the point of asking the barbarians to take -them under their jurisdiction. The nation has become more and more -turbulent. Of late, therefore, the rônin of the western provinces have -assembled in a body to urge the Tenshi Sama to ride to Hakone, and, -after punishing the traitorous officials, to drive out the barbarians. -The two clans of Satsuma and Choshiu have pacified these men and are -willing to lend their assistance to the court and camp in order to -drive out the barbarians. The Shogun must proceed to Kyoto to take -counsel with the nobles of the court, and must put forth all his -strength, must despatch orders to the clans of the home provinces and -the seven circuits, and, speedily performing the exploit of expelling -the barbarians, restore tranquillity to the empire. On the one hand, -he must appease the sacred wrath of Tenshi Sama’s divine ancestors, -and, on the other, inaugurate the return of faithful servants to their -allegiance, and of peace and prosperity to the people, thus giving -to the empire the immovable security of Taisan.”[79] (Ta shan--Great -Mountain, the Sacred mountain of China.) - -The effect of Kano’s visit to the Gosho is plainly visible in this -document. Iyemochi, the Shogun, paid homage to the Tenshi Sama in April -1863, and the same year released the Daimiyo from their compulsory -residence at Yedo. At the same time Kano at last secured the long -coveted imperial order to commence the expulsion of the barbarians, and -he returned to Nagato in high glee. - -In the south-western part of the main island of Japan, known as Hondo, -a narrow strait separates it from the island of Kiusiu. This strait -is named after the city of Shimonoseki,[80] situated on the northern -shore, in Nagato. This shore is composed of bold bluffs, formed of -solid rock, covered, however, with abundant verdure owing to ample -moisture and the heat of the sun. These bluffs control the strait -which forms the western entrance to the Inland Sea, and is used by -all vessels plying between Japan and China as offering a safe and -quick route. It was here that the Choshiu clan had reconstructed its -fortifications, and supplied them with new cannon. The clan had also -purchased at great expense two sailing vessels and a steamer and was -thus, as the Council thought, well equipped to expel the handful of -barbarians. - -[Illustration: “THE FRIENDS WERE STANDING IN A GARDEN OF A TEAHOUSE.”] - -In the beginning of July, 1863, the friends were standing in the garden -of a teahouse, whose upper story overlooked the entrance to the strait, -when an attendant appeared and informed them that a barbarian vessel -was approaching. The party went up-stairs and watched the ship, as, -unable to stem the current, she came to anchor. “She is going to stay -there all night” said Kano grimly. “Well, we don’t want any more -foreigners nor their vessels, and we will give that one yonder a hint -not to come back again.” He went out around the batteries and ordered -the officers to open fire as soon as it should be light enough. - -There was grim expectation among Choshiu’s samurai at the prospect of -an early battle. They had imbibed the dislike of Kano, and the cry of -Sonno Joï had excited them. Still, they retired to rest as usual, but -were up with the first dawn. The American bark, the _Pembroke_, was -not expecting any hostilities. When the tide turned in the morning, -the captain gave orders to hoist the anchor, when he was startled by -firing and a moment later a ball went through one of his sails. He had -the American flag hoisted, but it produced no effect, except that more -batteries opened upon her. The two sailing vessels and the steamer -appeared to be preparing to increase her danger, but the sailors worked -with a will, and soon had her under weigh. The marksmanship of the -Choshiu gunners, however, was very poor, and the _Pembroke_ escaped. - -It is scarcely credible that Choshiu intended to destroy an unarmed -vessel; it is more likely that they meant the firing as a warning to -keep away. Kano was satisfied at the effect which he thought had been -produced. On the morning of the 16th, about ten days after firing upon -the _Pembroke_, he was called by one of his retainers, and informed -that a steamer was coming toward the Strait from the Inland Sea. After -dressing himself hastily, he went to one of the bluffs where he could -observe and at the same time issue orders. He soon perceived that it -was a war vessel, and sent Ekichi down to the ships at anchor under -the bluff to instruct them to clear for action. He then ordered Ito -and Inouye to take charge of two of the batteries, and to open fire as -soon as possible. The barbarian ship, however, did not remain in the -channel, but made at once for the bluff, where, since the guns could -not be sufficiently depressed, she was safe from the batteries. She -immediately engaged Choshiu’s vessels, and, although the samurai were -anxious to fight and to come to close quarters, they could scarcely -inflict any damage upon their opponents, because they had not been -drilled to this sort of warfare. Kano was furious when he saw his -expensive ships destroyed, and he was more angry still when Capt. -McDougal of the saucy U. S. Sloop-of-war _Wyoming_ by a few parting -shots destroyed one of the batteries, and then steamed away, apparently -none the worse for her late encounter. It did not improve his temper, -when the breeze carried the laughter of some of the barbarian sailors -to his ears. - -After the _Wyoming_ had steamed away, Kano sent for his two friends, -and together they discussed the event of that morning. - -“It is easy to understand,” he said, “why our ships suffered defeat. -Our samurai can scarcely be expected to learn to handle strange craft -in so short a time. What puzzles me is that we could not sink her with -our batteries.” - -“Why,” said Ito, “that was plain enough. She steamed straight under us -and for the vessels. If we had been able to loosen the rock, we might -have sunk her by letting it fall, but if we had depressed our guns, the -shot would have fallen out of them.” - -“Then they are cowards!” Kano cried, “they knew that we could not hit -them there, and so crept under shelter. I don’t call that honorable -warfare.” - -“I don’t see that,” said Inouye smiling. “It is fair in war to take -every advantage over an enemy; besides, it was decidedly no coward who -would come with one small vessel and attack three, while facing the -guns of our batteries. No! We lack the skill. Suppose we put armor on -our peasants and arm them with our swords, would they be able to fight -as well as we, who are trained from our youth? The biggest and most -powerful peasant, in armor, would not be a match for Ekichi. It is the -same thing in this case. We have the weapons, but we do not know how to -use them.” - -“We fired well enough when she was in the channel,” objected Ito. - -“Yes, but you confessed yourself that you could not depress your guns, -while that fellow raised his cannon high enough to bring the whole -battery about my ears. I don’t call it unfair, but it was a very -one-sided affair.” - - - - -XVII - -A CONFERENCE - - -A few days after the experience gained in the conflict, Kano decided -to go to Kyoto. He announced his decision to the Council, where no -opposition was made. Indeed, several members, Hattori among the number, -declared that they too would go. They felt that the Clan had thrown -down the gauntlet, and that there must be victory or annihilation. -There had been a steady emigration of the young samurai, and even -Ekichi had besought his father to let him go. It was decided that all -should be recalled and ordered to report at Choshiu’s yashiki at Kyoto. - -When Kano, accompanied by his friends, and escorted by a corps of six -hundred well-armed samurai arrived at the Capital, he could scarcely -credit his senses. The quiet and almost solemn city had changed -apparently into a garrison town. Everywhere samurai were met. The -crests of Satsuma, Choshiu, Tosa, Hizen, and Kaga, jostled with those -of the Tokugawa, with the result that brawls and street fights were -common, and peaceable citizens scarcely dared leave their houses. The -shout of Sonno Joï was heard everywhere and at all hours. A revolution -was imminent. - -It was not long after Kano was installed in his apartments of the -yashiki when an attendant announced a visitor, who declined giving his -name. Receiving directions to admit him, a samurai in rônin dress, -that is without crest and his face concealed by a cloth entered. After -saluting, the visitor discarded his disguise, and Kano recognized the -features of Karassu Maru. - -“Well, Mr. Councillor,” said the Kuge after they were seated, “you -have indeed heeded my advice of pulling the ground from under the -court; you have produced chaos, my friend. What has struck Aidzu, I can -not conceive. Our chairs go in and out of the palace gates and, instead -of being stopped and turned back, we are politely saluted by the guard. -There must be more of this, and I believe Tenshi Sama will order the -Phoenix Car, and promenade in the city. But how do you propose to -restore order out of this chaos?” - -Kano did not confide enough in his visitor to disclose his plans. He -replied: “Before building a new house, my lord, it is best to clear -away the debris, especially after a conflagration. But, as your -lordship knows, I have been at Nagato for some time, and am very -anxious to know what has happened. I shall feel much relieved if you -will inform me.” - -“I do not know how it came to pass, but after Iyemochi’s visit it was -easier for the palace attendants to secure passports, and finally they -were no longer demanded. Sanjo, Iwakura, and myself, went in and out as -we pleased, and I met a great many rônin, all good fellows. Sometimes -we had a little bout, and swords were drawn. Taken altogether, there is -a very pleasant change in our condition, and I only hope it will last.” - -Kano saw that Karassu Maru would not help him much in his scheme. When -his visitor departed, he called Inouye: - -“Have you still the haori which Karassu Maru lent you?” - -“I have, my lord.” - -“Very well; I have mine. Let us see if they will carry us past the -gates of the Gosho.” - -The two gentlemen went out. Although they met numerous parties of -boisterous samurai, they were not molested, since the crest they wore -was known as that of a kuge. When they came to the gate, Kano walked -boldly in, followed by Inouye. - -“Your tablets, please, gentlemen,” said one of the guards, bowing. - -“How now, fellow,” cried Kano haughtily, “who has dared instruct you to -address gentlemen of our quality? Take his name,” he said to Inouye, -but the man disappeared, and they passed in. - -Kano remembered the way, and, arriving at the house where they had met -before, he inquired for Sanjo. He found, however, that this was the -residence of Iwakura, and requested to be announced. After waiting a -few moments, he found himself in the presence of the man who was one of -the chief instruments in the re-organization of the empire. - -“I am glad to see you, Mr. Councillor,” said the kuge, “and you come -at an opportune time. Some of us who are interested in the present -movement, were going to meet later on. But I will request them to come -as soon as possible.” He clapped his hands, and gave some directions to -the kneeling attendant. Presently a handsome screen was brought in and -placed behind Kano; then he heard the opening of the sho ji behind the -screen, and surmised that the meeting would be attended by a person of -so exalted a rank as to be invisible to him. - -Iwakura entertained his visitors in that charming manner, peculiar -to the highbred Japanese. It appeared only a few minutes to Kano, -when norimono began to arrive, and he and his friend were presented -to the possessors of names, familiar to every Japanese, high or low. -Ichijo, Nijo, Higashi Kuze,[81] all historic names, appeared. At last a -norimono arrived, and Iwakura himself hastened to receive this visitor, -who, with his attendants was ushered into the room behind. The other -kuge kept up their conversation, but Kano noticed from the terms of -self-debasement, and the frequent drawing of the breath, that the last -caller must be, indeed, near to the throne. At last Iwakura reappeared, -and took his seat. - -“My lords,” he said, “we have the unexpected but very gratifying -pleasure of having as visitor the man who really started the movement -which led to such surprising results. Mr. Kano is the trusted -Councillor of our friend Mori of Nagato, and this gentleman, Mr. -Inouye, he tells me, is his right hand. He has also informed me, -while waiting for your lordships to arrive, that he has a thousand -brave and devoted samurai at hand, ready to do His Majesty’s bidding, -and declares himself ready to answer any question it may please your -lordships to ask.” - -Five minutes passed in performing the prostrations incident to this -introduction, and Nijo, as the oldest of the kuge present, spoke:-- - -“I do not understand quite, Mr. Councillor, why the peace of the Gosho -should be interrupted. His Lordship Iwakura tells us that you are the -cause, and I doubt not that you have good reasons. At the same time, I -protest that all these proceedings are highly improper, and that there -is no precedent for them. I am told that the barbarians are at our -door. Well, so they were six hundred years ago;[82] but His Majesty, as -in duty bound, visited the shrine at Isé,[83] and implored the aid of -the divine ancestors. The result is well-known. But the Gosho was not -disturbed. To guard his country properly, His Majesty needs repose and -contemplation. We like it not, Mr. Councillor, that his sacred presence -should be disturbed.” - -Kano and Inouye bowed low, and were silent. After some moments of -decorous silence, the kuge next in years spoke:-- - -“I agree with my lord Nijo. Why does not the Shogun expel the -barbarians, as is his duty? The Court has ordered him to do so, and he -has replied that he will do it as soon as the necessary preparations -are made. So that matter is settled, it seems to me. I do not see what -Mori, Shimadzu, and other captains have to do with it. His Majesty -issues his commands to the Shogun who executes them reverently. These -proceedings are highly improper, as my Lord Nijo said. If Mori desires -any favor from the Fount of All Honor, let him apply to Iyemochi, and -when his request, properly endorsed, reaches us through the proper -channel, it will be considered and answered in due time.” - -It was now Sanjo’s turn. “I have listened, my lords, with profound -satisfaction to the lessons drawn from the ripe experience of my -seniors. But I submit that our visitors be heard, since, having the -misfortune to be mere soldiers, they may not be able to appreciate to -the full extent the wisdom concentrated within the Council of Kuge.” - -At this appeal to their forbearance, the kuge bowed, and Kano, seizing -his fan, began in a low but distinct voice:-- - -“I feel deeply, my lords, my own unworthiness, and appreciate the -honor of being admitted to this august assembly.” Here he prostrated -himself, and remained fully three minutes, his head resting upon his -outstretched hands. He then recovered his position, and continued:-- - -“Only a few years ago the country of the gods was at peace, thanks -to Tenshi Sama and his intercession with the divine ancestors, and -the repose of the Son of Heaven was undisturbed. Suddenly black ships -appeared near the capital of the Tokugawa, and, being ordered to -withdraw, refused to obey this reasonable behest. What did Tokugawa -do? Smite the disobedient barbarians and hurl them back to their own -desolate country? No! _Tokugawa was afraid._ The strangers departed -but returned with reinforcements the next year. There had been ample -time to call upon the clans to prepare for their visit, but _Tokugawa -was afraid_. The Go rojiu pretended to be unprepared, and conceded all -that the barbarians saw fit to ask. It was not much, but it was only -the beginning of their demands. Four years later they asked more. They -wanted land and the Tokugawa sold what was not his to sell. It was -only a few tsubo,[84] in a poor fishing village, but it was soil of -the country of the gods, part of the inheritance of the Son of Heaven. -What did the divine ancestors say about this alienation of their sacred -soil? My lords, you lay the blame of the disturbance of the sacred -bosom upon me. I and my clan are ready to expiate our sin, if by doing -so we can restore peace to the Light of our Day, to Tenshi Sama. But -that peace can be restored only by placating His Majesty’s ancestors, -when they receive back their own.” - -Unconsciously, for Kano was not acting but meant every word he said, he -stopped and allowed time for his words to sink into their breasts. No -one lost his decorum, still, a movement of the fan, or a readjustment -of the haori, betrayed the uneasiness of the kuge. - -Kano resumed suddenly, with a slightly elevated voice: - -“Aye, the divine ancestors must be placated, peace must be restored -within the sacred walls of the Gosho, but the barbarians must be -expelled before it can be accomplished. Hark ye! my lords. Myriads -of samurai have come to this capital, and there is but one shout: -Sonno-Joï! Revere the Emperor! Expel the foreigners! The breeze from -the ocean gently fans our cheeks, so long as the gods look placidly -down, while we, their humble servants, pay them our dues in respectful -homage. But sometimes we fail in our duty. The breeze turns into a -wind, the wind into a tai-fu,[85] and it sweeps all before it, the -hovel of the laborer and the roof of the temple. What mortal can bid -it refrain? The Yamato Damashii is the lovable zephyr of our country, -but the presence of these insolent barbarians has converted it into a -mighty wind. Hark ye, my lords, do you hear it swell? Sonno Joï! It is -turning into a tai-fu now!” - -Assuming the plaintive and appealing voice to which the language lends -itself so well, Kano continued as if in self-commune:-- - -“We heed it not. The storm centres in our beloved land where the sun -rises, but there is no rift in the clouded sky. The sun smiles upon -the myriads of ships, cleaving the blue waters, and hurrying to the -shores of our land. It is one long procession. Their spies have told -the barbarians in their inhospitable regions of the one country where -the gods love to dwell. From tens of rude, insolent men, they have -increased to hundreds; they are now thousands and will soon be myriads. -Tokugawa is no longer a vassal of Tenshi Sama, he is a servant to men -scarce better than brutes. Hyogo and Osaka, are in their possession. -The two roads to the sacred capital are crowded with them. Ye gods! -will ye not at least preserve the Gosho and your child? They press -against the wall, it gives way. Where is the peace and contemplation of -the sacred enclosure now!” - -His sighing voice melted into the silence, when in a strident tone that -made them start, he concluded:-- - -“No! Sonno Joï roars out of a myriad throats. Myriads of brawny -hands clasp the swords of Japan. Tenshi Sama has spoken through his -brave miya and kuge. Clan after clan marches on, sun of victory for -Yamato Damashii has come forth from behind the clouds and inspired -Dai Nippon’s sons. The Tokugawa has paid the penalty of treason; the -barbarians have fled before the edge of the Soul of Samurai. Peace is -restored and flowers innumerable and of brilliant colors delight the -eye. After the tempest calm. Not that treacherous, oppressive air, -forerunner of disaster. But the bright atmosphere which succeeds the -storm as surely as prosperous peace will follow the tempest raging now, -and which is the punishment for our neglect of duty.” - - - - -XVIII - -FLIGHT - - -Solemn was the scene, after Kano had concluded his address. He himself -was prostrate once more, and remained in that position for more than -five minutes, while not even the rustling of a silk hakama disturbed -the silence. They sat like men of wax, immovable and serene. There was -a rustling of silk behind the screen, it was removed, and a gentleman -on whose haori appeared the imperial crest entered. All prostrated -themselves, and he answered with a dignified bow. One of his attendants -brought a cushion, and when he had squatted down, he said: - -“Rise, Mr. Councillor.” - -Kano and Inouye obeyed. - -“We have heard your statement and we approve of Mori’s loyalty as -expressed by you. Your report will receive our early attention and will -be submitted to the proper authority. Fear not, son of Nagato, Tenshi -Sama and our ancestors are keeping guard. Now go! You will receive our -orders. Tomomi,[86] see to it that these gentlemen are refreshed.” He -bowed slightly and left the room. The other kuge followed as if they -were glad to get away, and only Sanjo and Iwakura remained. - -The latter ordered refreshments, and when they were brought, said: “Mr. -Kano, I, and I suppose my lord Sanjo, are highly pleased. We have been -in the minority, and have been in grave danger of our lives. But you -have converted the miya nearest to the throne, and whatever happens, -he is beyond danger, and a most powerful ally. Still, our council is -large; and if Tokugawa replaces the present commandant by one who will -make his authority felt, we shall be just where we were before.” - -“My lords, may I speak freely? I do not ask safety for myself. My life -is worthless, but my cause and my clan are dear to me. Promise me that -if I exceed the limits of propriety, or if what I say appears to you -as high treason, you will permit me to let me expiate my transgression -alone, and that it shall never go beyond these walls. My young friend -will share my doom, so that the secret will remain locked up between -you.” - -Both Iwakura and Sanjo bowed assent. - -Kano after thanking them, said:--“Imperial orders are issued over His -Majesty’s sign manual, and the tenor of those orders depends naturally -upon the sympathy of the kuge in charge. Could not a change be effected -by which it was placed within the hands of one favorable to the cause -of Japan?” - -Iwakura looked at Sanjo and shook his head. “Impossible,” he said. “The -sign manual is held for life by one appointed by Tenshi Sama upon the -request of a majority of the council. No,” he repeated, “that can not -be done.” - -“In that case,” suggested Inouye, speaking before Kano could commit -himself, “can not his Majesty be induced to ride to Hakone and drive -the foreigners into the ocean. This would call forth such a host as Dai -Nippon has never seen. There would be no danger, no risk even, for I am -sure that the barbarians would not await the approach of such an army. -They would take ship and depart, with the conviction that Dai Nippon -was opposed to their presence.” - -“That might be done,” said Sanjo, approvingly. “Send me an official -letter signed with the seal of your clan and containing that request, -and I shall submit it to the Council. But do it at once, and while the -impression made by Mr. Kano is vivid. Let there be no delay.” - -“If your lordships will order one of your servants to go with us, the -letter shall be written at once,” replied Kano, preparing to depart. -As they were leaving, a gentleman approached followed by a page. “Are -these the gentlemen from Nagato?” he inquired. Being assured of their -identity, he took a long package from the page and severing a cord, -presented one to Kano and one to Inouye. “His Imperial Highness Prince -Arisugawa bids you accept these as a token of his good will,” he said. -Both prostrated themselves and lifted the present to their forehead. -When they arrived home, they found each a costly sword. - -The letter was written and submitted to the Council. Kano’s address -must have made a deep impression, for he was informed in a private -communication from Sanjo that his suggestion had been adopted, and -orders had been issued to make the necessary preparations. At this time -the fate of the foreigners in Japan hung by a thread. - -Of all the clans of the Tokugawa family,--Iyeyasu had endowed his sons -with ample estates,--all but Aidzu seemed as if stricken with palsy -at the storm raging about them. But Aidzu, in its mountain home, had -preserved its manhood, and despatched to Kyoto a man of penetration -and dauntless courage. Shortly after taking command, the guards at the -palace gates were quadrupled, and all ingress and egress prohibited, -except under a most severe system of passports, obtained from the -commandant himself. - -On the 30th of September, 1863, Kano was sitting in his room -overlooking the accounts of the clan, when Ito and Inouye entered -hurriedly. There was no diminution of the salutations, and both waited -until the Councillor spoke. Kano, however, saw at once that something -important had occurred, and he simply requested them to speak. - -“Your lordship,” said Ito, “there is something in the air. The -commandant of the castle has issued orders to the people to close their -houses and keep within, on penalty of being cut down. Armed patrols are -in every street, and strong bodies of Aidzu men have taken up positions -near the palace.” At this moment an officer of the guard at the gate -entered, and beckoned to Kano, who rose angrily and demanded if he had -forgotten his manners. His explanation, however, seemed to satisfy -the Councillor, for he said: All right, and hurried out. Presently -he returned accompanied by seven gentlemen, among whom Ito and Inouye -recognized Sanjo and Iwakura. - -Rigidly observant of the salutations the company was at last seated, -when Karassu Maru remarked: - -“Mr. Councillor, I hope Mori’s larder is well supplied, for I am afraid -you are going to have us as your guests for some time.” - -Kano bowed and calling a servant ordered dinner to be prepared, when -Sanjo spoke. - -“My lord Karassu Maru chooses an odd time for pleasantry, but I am -afraid, Mr. Councillor, that there is more truth in what he says than -can be agreeable to you or us. The Council has honored myself and the -gentlemen with me, with a decree of banishment.” - -Perturbed as he was, Kano bowed, and said simply:--I hope that it may -please your lordships to accept the hospitality of Mori such as it is, -but which is freely offered. Permit me to look after the safety of your -lordships. - -He went to the quarters of the commandant. “Have all the men under -arms, and prepare to defend the gates. See that no man bearing the -Tokugawa crest enters upon your life. Admit all stragglers, but no -one is permitted to leave the yashiki except on written order over my -seal. See that the arms and equipments are in proper order, for at five -o’clock we march. Any disobedience will be punished most severely. Is -this understood?” - -“It is.” - -“Very well. Send for Mr. Hattori.” - -“He is in my room now.” - -Kano entered. “Hattori,” he said, “we have received a severe check, -but there is no time to explain. Ride for your life to Nagato, and -inform Mori that seven kuge have been banished, and will accept his -hospitality. Do not let him entertain the idea of changes in the rooms -of the palace, but tell him that we shall be there almost as soon as -you. As you pass by, engage rooms in the usual temples.” - -Hattori at once ordered a horse. Satisfied that there would be no -delay, Kano sent for Ekichi: - -“Dress as a boy of the common people,” he said. “In a few minutes Mr. -Fujii will give you a basket of eggs, and tell you their price. Then go -slowly to the castle; notice closely everything you see, and report to -me. Try to sell your eggs to the soldiers of the guard, but be careful -that they do not suspect you. Be back by about four.” - -The boy was ready in a few minutes, and the Councillor himself saw him -through the gate and gave him the pass word. He then returned to his -guests, and informed them that they would leave for Choshiu at five. - -While they were eating their dinner, Karassu Maru entertained the -company, this was the time for relaxation, and his remarks elicited not -unfrequently peals of laughter. - -“I think that Honami is to blame for the whole thing. He came to me -this morning, and said:-- - -“‘What do you think? I am going to buy some rabbits.’ - -“It did not interest me very much, but for the sake of politeness, I -asked: ‘where?’ - -“‘Oh!’ he said, ‘I have seen some beauties in Karassu Maru cho.’[87] - -“I thought that he was indulging in personalities, and said: - -“‘You don’t take me for a rabbit-warren do you?’ - -“‘You? No; I wish you were.’” - -Shouts of laughter greeted this sally, and the speaker laughed as -heartily as the others. “Well,” he continued, “I grew tired of his -interesting conversation, and remarked that the rabbits might be -waiting for him. This suggestion seemed to strike him, for away he -trotted. - -“He was not gone long before he came back in a great temper, and begged -me to go with him to the gate, because they would not let him pass. He -had told the guard, he said, that he had a very important appointment, -but they would not listen to reason.” There was a dangerous glitter in -Karassu Maru’s eye, as he continued: “I thought that the guard might -have taken liberties with a kuge, and was going to give him a lesson in -politeness. But when we came to the gate, an officer stepped out and -said: ‘Pardon me, my lord, but I am under orders to let no one pass. -The Council is in session and your lordship will soon know the reason. -I am compelled to escort you to your house.’ The fellow was serious -enough, and under guard of a dozen men I returned, Honami in his chair -asking constantly about his rabbits. I had no stomach for them then.” - - - - -XIX - -BATTLE AND DEFEAT - - -It was a sullen procession which filed out of Choshiu’s yashiki on -that 30th of September, and it was well for the Tokugawa that no -armed opposition was offered to them. Twelve hundred deeply insulted -samurai could make sad havoc among any force, and these men hoped for -the fray. They had marched in close ranks with seven norimono, well -guarded between them. Kano was on horseback and had assumed command. -He, too, had thought of the possibility of a conflict; but Ekichi had -discovered that Satsuma had also been expelled, and that Choshiu would -have to face the united power of Tokugawa. Loyalty to his clan, and the -responsibility for the safety of the kuge imposed self-restraint; but -they did not prevent him from being exasperated. - -Past Fushimi[88] they marched, and on to Osaka where they remained -over night. The next morning they stopped at Hyogo; it was eight days -after they had left Kyoto when they were within their own province, -and shortly after Mori in his state dress received the highly honored -guests, and bade them make themselves at home. - -Kano heard that Sawa had disappeared. That was well. Choshiu’s samurai -might not have liked to see the Tokugawa crest among them, and the -blood of such a poor worthless creature, could not further the cause. -But Choshiu thirsted for vengeance, and drilling went on from morning -till night. Nagato was an armed camp. - -Thus passed the winter and spring of the year 1864. Kano heard that -the number of rônin multiplied at a frightful rate, and that many were -congregating in the suburbs of Kyoto. Several young samurai applied -for leave of absence, and, when they received a refusal, sent in their -resignations and disappeared. - -The men were exasperated. On the 4th of August a courier from Kyoto -brought news which caused Kano to call an extra meeting of the Council. -When they had come together, Kano informed them that in the beginning -of July a body of rônin had petitioned Tenshi Sama to remove the decree -of arrest from Mori, and to recall the seven kuge and restore them to -honor; but the Council of the Gosho, now wholly under the influence of -Aidzu had not even vouchsafed a reply. Several hundred Choshiu men had -joined the rônin, and were preparing to march upon Aidzu. - -This was serious news. What if Aidzu, in triumph at its success, should -secure a decree of _Choteki_[89] against Mori from the servile court. -That must be prevented at any cost! Kano and Hattori were commissioned -to proceed in all haste to Kyoto, and to restrain their clansmen. They -arrived at the capital on the 15th, and, appealing to the loyalty of -their men, succeeded in bringing them back under Choshiu’s banner. - -Aidzu did not appreciate this self-control. On the 19th a Court -messenger delivered a notification at the yashiki that Mori was to be -punished for contumacy, and that Tokugawa Keiki[90] would command the -loyal army commissioned to enforce the Court’s order. - -Kano and Hattori deliberated long and earnestly. There was not much -choice. It was either to submit to punishment, which would strike their -innocent lord the hardest of all, or trust to the spirit of unrest and -leave the decision to the sword. The latter alternative was chosen, and -Kano prepared a proclamation. He demonstrated the justice of his cause -and mentioned the crimes committed by the Tokugawa since the arrival -of Perry; he called upon the samurai of Japan to aid him in punishing -Aidzu, who was desecrating the private grounds of Tenshi Sama, and -implored the pardon of the Son of Heaven “for creating a disturbance -so near the wheels of the Chariot.” - -The number of Choshiu men had increased to 1300. Kano had divided his -men in three divisions, and, at dawn of the 20th of August, marched -to the attack. His intention was to surround the flower garden of -the palace where Aidzu’s troops were encamped. They were opposed by -the samurai of Aidzu who had been reenforced by those of Echizen, -Kuwana, Hikone, and other Tokugawa clans. There were some cannon and -muskets; but most of the men were in armor, and trusted to the keen -native sword. With terrible odds against them, and no clan coming to -their assistance, Choshiu maintained the fight for two days. A native -historian states that 811 streets, 18 palaces, 44 large yashiki, 630 -small yashiki, 112 Buddhist temples, and 27,000 houses were destroyed. -The same historian says: “The city, surrounded by a ninefold circle of -flowers, entirely disappeared in one morning in the smoke of the flames -of a war fire. The Blossom Capital became a scorched desert.” The end -was such as might have been expected. The Choshiu men were utterly -defeated. Thirty-seven men were taken prisoner and beheaded in prison. -Kano died in battle, and his body was probably cremated, for it was not -found. - -When the fugitives began to arrive in Nagato, there was almost a panic -among the samurai. Ito and Inouye, now recognized as leaders, restored -quiet. It was not the defeat which had the effect of frightening men -for whom pain nor death has any terror: it was the term _choteki_, -which rendered their arm nerveless. It was only when Inouye proved -to them that it was Aidzu and not Tenshi Sama who had inflicted this -disgrace upon them that their courage returned together with their -self-control. - -The clan would soon stand in need of it. By Kano’s order they had -continued to fire upon vessels entering the Strait of Shimonoseki. -They had Tenshi Sama’s mandate to do so, and it had not been revoked. -On the 5th of September a fleet of powerful vessels appeared, and -bombarded Choshiu’s forts. The men stood to their guns like heroes, but -again the odds were against them. The batteries were blown about their -ears, and when landing parties attacked the forts, individual daring -backed by swords, could not stand before the withering fire of trained -troops. The clan despatched Ito and Inouye to make peace, and the terms -hard as they were, were accepted. - -It was two days after the bombardment, and a meeting of the Council -had been called in the great hall of the castle. Ito and Inouye, both -Councillors now, were present. After all were seated, Ito opened the -meeting. - -“Gentlemen,” he said, “there is little use in mourning for losses, -since it will not repair them. But losses may be turned into an -advantage, if we profit by the lessons we may derive from them. - -“The foreign fleet which attacked us had such heavy metal, that our -guns and gunners could not stand before it. It was a hail storm -of iron and we went down before the blast. But when I saw that the -barbarians were landing men, I thought that we were going to have our -turn. They were but a handful, those barbarians, and man for man, our -samurai would have made short work of them. But we could not get near -them. They moved as one man and in the thickest of the fight a word of -command was obeyed as if it was a machine instead of a body of men. It -was their discipline and drill that defeated us, gentlemen, and we must -acquire that same order and skill. - -“We have met two foes, and twice we have been defeated. The barbarians -will not molest us so long as we do not molest them, and, for the -present at least, we shall leave that to other clans who may wish to -pay for some experience. We stand face to face with another foe, and we -are fighting for our very existence. Tokugawa would have us Choteki, -gentlemen, and we must turn the tables upon them. We can do it, never -fear! But first we must learn the drill and tactics from the barbarians -that we may give Aidzu a surprise as the foreigners surprised us. -For that purpose we must engage instructors and purchase arms. I now -propose that Mr. Inouye be appointed with full authority to act in this -matter, and that the treasurer of the clan furnish him with money.” - -“But,” objected one of the older members, “the barbarian instructors -will have to live among us; will they be safe? We do not want any more -trouble with them now.” - -“Your lordship speaks well. We do not want any more trouble with them -_now_. The next time we have trouble with them, it will not be we who -pay the bills. They will be as safe here as in their own homes. Our -samurai shall know why they are here. They shall know that we must -dissemble; pretend that we are pleased with our defeat, and that we -love the men who invaded our soil. But this dissembling will not last -forever, and a time shall come when this defeat is wiped out. May we -live to see it!” - -The order was then passed and Ito resumed: “The next thing that _must_ -be done is to come to an understanding with Satsuma and the other -Southern clans. Yes, I know, gentlemen, the dish is not palatable, but -there is nothing for it but to eat it.” A feud existed between Satsuma -and Choshiu and to the older Councillors this advice was extremely -repugnant. “We have no choice. Choshiu alone can not reduce the united -Tokugawa Clans, and Tokugawa must be deposed unless we wish to see the -barbarian our master. Satsuma, after all, is of our blood, and has the -same interests. Tosa too, must join. I propose then that I undertake -this disagreeable work; somebody must do it, and I do not suppose that -any one cares for the honor.” - -There was a silence. At last one of the Councillors spoke: I suppose -that Mr. Ito is right. Let it be as he wishes. I agree with him that of -the two, Satsuma is preferable to the barbarians. - -The order was entered upon the books and the council adjourned. The -two friends left together. Inouye said he would start the next day. - -“Have you any objection if I take Ekichi with me?” - -Ito looked up, smiled, and said: “None at all.” - - - - -XX - -DRILLING - - -The severe defeats suffered by Choshiu had reduced the number of -samurai of the clan. After thinking deeply upon the matter, Ito -proposed to the Council a measure which met with the most strenuous -opposition, and, being earnestly supported by Inouye, was at last -adopted with many an ominous shake of the head. It was, namely, that -the ranks should be recruited from among the young and strong members -of the people. The older members of the council urged, not unnaturally, -that the samurai would never suffer such an infringement upon the -privileges of their rank. Both Ito and Inouye had more confidence -in the loyalty of the samurai, and they were right. The very best -of foreign rifles had been purchased by Inouye and arrived in due -time. Then the instructors came, and drilling went on from morning to -night. The young men of the people vied with the samurai in zeal and -enthusiasm, they were all equally and regularly paid and well treated. -After some time artillery began to arrive, and a corps of men was -detailed to learn gunnery. Among all the young men there was none more -zealous than Ekichi. After a year’s drill, when officers were appointed -he was made a lieutenant. - -In the shadow side of the dual part in the Japanese character, there is -no passion so strong as that of revenge. Subterfuge, the most dastardly -treachery, are praiseworthy and commendable, if they serve to obtain -revenge for the killing of a near relation. The written constitution of -old Japan (Legacy of Iyeyasu), prescribed: - -“In respect to revenging injury done to master or father, it is granted -by the wise and virtuous (sage)[91] that you and the injurer can not -live together under the canopy of heaven. - -“A person harboring such vengeance shall notify the same in writing to -the Criminal Court; and although no check or hindrance may be offered -to his carrying out his desire within the period allowed for that -purpose, it is forbidden that the chastisement of an enemy be attended -with riot. - -“Fellows who neglect to give notice of their intended revenge are like -wolves of pretext, and their punishment or pardon should depend upon -the circumstances of the case.” - -Ekichi suspected Sawa. If he had been asked for the reason, he would -have been at a loss, except that he had seen him at Kyoto on the day -of the flight of the kugé. He had never liked the spy, and he had -worshiped his father. The lesson of self-control, thoroughly mastered -by him, enabled him to bend his mind upon his studies. But the moments -which he allowed himself for relaxation, were spent in brooding upon -revenge. - -Inouye suspected it, and for that reason had taken him with him to -Yokohama. While there he had found time to go to Kanagawa where he -called upon the physician in his samurai dress. The family scarcely -recognized their former houseboy who, in gratitude for former kindness, -presented his late employer with a choice piece of lacquer. Inouye -had watched Ekichi keenly during this visit, and had noticed the -absolute self control with which he received the advances of the -barbarians. At dinner, he simply imitated Inouye but with such perfect -self-possession, that it seemed as if he had been using knife and fork -all his life, although it was the first time he saw them. - -At Yokohama, too, his face expressed no emotion at what he saw; only -when in passing the hatoba, Inouye remarked that his father had -worked here, the boy prostrated himself and saluted. He was utterly -unconscious of the laughter of some rude barbarians. Inouye noticed, -however, that he asked for the names in English, after he had heard him -converse in that language. - -When they returned to Nagato, he had asked to be enrolled in the army -and his request was granted. Inouye had offered to teach him English, -an offer which was gladly accepted, and he made such progress that he -was able to read understandingly and to keep up a fair conversation. - -The Tokugawa in the meanwhile was boasting of how the Shogun would -annihilate Choshiu, and in 1865 Iyemochi himself took the field. The -foreigners at Yokohama were permitted to witness the march of the -redoubted troops. They came straggling by, as an eye-witness describes -in bands of three or four, a motley array, with very little stomach -for the business in hand. The same witness states that, upon arrival -at Odawara[92] the majority of the higher samurai applied for leave -of absence on account of sickness; whereupon they were told that they -could go, but that their revenues would be taken from them, whereupon -they recovered their health. They remained that year quartered at Kyoto -and Osaka, for the Shogun did not care to lead such an army against a -brave and desperate clan. He tried to induce other clans to join him, -but they refused flatly. - -Stung by the ridicule heaped upon them by Japanese and foreigner alike, -the Tokugawa troops at last opened the campaign, in the summer of 1866. -Instead of attempting to overwhelm the clan by sheer force of numbers, -Iyemochi divided his army into three divisions, each of which was -separately routed by Choshiu. This restored the prestige of the clan, -while it ruined that of Tokugawa. - -In every battle Ekichi had excelled for coolness and courage, and it -was predicted that he would rise as his father had done before him. -In the latter part of September the news was brought to Nagato that -Iyemochi, the Shogun was dead. Shortly later it also became known that -Tokugawa Keiki had succeeded, but by appointment from Tenshi Sama. - -The death of Tenshi Sama Osahito,[93] better known by his posthumous -name of Komei[94] Tenno, and the succession of his son Mutsuhito, then -a boy of fifteen produced a great change. Ito and Inouye held frequent -and long conferences, and the former was often absent from the clan. - -Their own experience within Choshiu’s narrow limits, had convinced -them that they were on the right track. The whole strength of -Choshiu’s clan had been called out, and had repeatedly defeated the -overwhelming forces of the Tokugawa; but it had been able to do so only -after acquiring the principles of foreign art of war. Ito disliked -and mistrusted the foreigners, whereas Inouye’s experience as well -as his strong power of discernment rather inclined him toward them. -Both, however, were agreed in their love of their country; and both -agreed that the Japanese must acquire every particle of knowledge -in the possession of the barbarians. More than that: their manners, -habits, and customs, must be studied and such as served in any way -to strengthen the national life, must be introduced and adapted. But -before anything could be done in that direction, the Tokugawa must -be laid low. Nothing could possibly be done so long as a clan so -degenerate was foremost in the country. - -Ito went to Satzuma, and met OKubo, Saigo, and Terashima. In OKubo and -Terashima he met men who felt and thought like he. Saigo, a splendid -specimen of manhood, over six feet in height, was equally predisposed -against the Tokugawa, but was not able to look beyond the clan. As -there was no warrant against any of these men except those of the -Choshiu clan, they moved to Kyoto, and the rebuilt capital again became -a hotbed of intrigue. - -Tokugawa Keiki declined the appointment of Shogun, but was compelled to -accept. The councillors of the several Tokugawa clans were very well -aware that their sun had set, and urged his appointment as of a man -who was personally popular with the other clans. But Keiki perceived -that the days of the Shogunate were past. It is not improbable that he -himself perceived, as Ii Navsuke had done before, that united Japan -only would be able to maintain its independence and such a Japan could -not exist under two heads. He offered repeatedly to resign, but the -Gosho had no liking for the idea of leaving its repose. The majority -of the members clung to the ideas of Nijo. As to the boy emperor, he -had no more voice than his father had had before him, or than Mori -possessed within Choshiu’s clan. In the regeneration of Japan, no help -could be expected from Miya, Kuge, or Daimiyo, long since converted -into puppets by the very duality of the national character. The men -who undertook the work were unknown nobodies; but it was exactly by -such men that the different clans had been ruled separately, and by -combining together they could rule all the clans, that is Japan, -collectively. - -Strictly speaking, therefore, there was no vital change in the affairs -of Japan so long as the government was nominally in the hands of a -figurehead, and in reality in those of the samurai. In all these -troubles, the people had no share, nor did they take any interest in -them, except when their own personal interests were directly affected. -In the eyes of the dominating class the people had no existence; and -when, in the documents of those days the word “people” is used, it -refers solely to the samurai. - -Although Aidzu was still in possession of Kyoto, and in charge of the -gates of the Gosho, the half-hearted orders of Keiki permitted the -leaders of Satsuma and other clans to communicate with their friends -within the Council, and once again the men who were for repose at -any cost felt the ground moving from under their feet. They brought -pressure to bear upon the Shogun, and he once again offered his -resignation. It was accepted on the 9th of November, 1867, but upon -condition that for the present he should continue the administration. - - - - -XXI - -DOWN WITH TOKUGAWA! - - -Great events were expected when the year 1868 dawned. Couriers arrived -daily at Nagato from Kyoto, and our two friends, as well as the -banished kuge were in a fever of expectation. Ekichi had asked and -obtained furlough, and had left for Kyoto. He was greatly attached -to Inouye, and frequently forestalled his wishes, but in a quiet, -unobtrusive way. He was, moreover, so sedate in his habits, that there -was no cause for watching him. However much Ito and Inouye would have -done for him for the sake of his late father, they felt that his future -could be safely left to himself. - -The two friends had taken dinner together on the 7th of January, when -the galloping of a horse was heard, and the animal stopped evidently -in front of the yashiki. After a slight delay, a servant appeared and -announced Mr. Kano. A moment later Ekichi entered, somewhat flushed. -They saluted, and Inouye who observed him closely, said: - -“You came on horseback and evidently had a long journey. Have you had -dinner?” - -“No, sir, I did not wish to loiter on the road.” - -A servant was ordered to serve dinner to the guest. After he had -finished, Inouye resumed: - -“You bring important news, do you not?” - -“Satsuma, Tosa, and some other clans took possession of the Gosho, four -days ago, and Arisugawa no Miya is guardian on His Majesty.” - -Inouye clapped his hands. When his attendant appeared, he told him -to go to the castle, and request the kuge to honor him with a call. -Ito, who had been charged with the command of the army, rose and said: -“Shall we march in the morning?” - -“Yes,” was the reply, “that will be best.” - -The two friends had so often considered what they would do when this -time should arrive, that no further consultation was necessary. Ito -went first to the most active Councillor, and explained to him what had -happened; he then proceeded to the barracks, and gave orders that the -army was to march at six in the morning. When he returned, he found -the kuge, highly pleased at the prospect of their speedy return. They -knew that, with Arisugawa as adviser, Tenshi Sama would restore them -to honor, and Mori would be exculpated. Indeed, at four o’clock in the -morning a messenger arrived bringing the official papers. - -The two Councillors breakfasted with the kuge. During the meal, Ito -said: - -“We must make hurried marches, gentlemen. Tokugawa will not submit -peaceably. If our friends prevail, it means the ruin of the Tokugawa -men; hence I expect we shall have trouble.” - -The army marched out, leaving only a sufficient number of men to guard -the territory of the clan. It was now that the difference between -samurai and an army on the march could be best observed. The men -stepped out evenly in close ranks, and easily, and without apparent -fatigue performed a two days’ journey. The kuge were surprised. Ito and -Inouye explained what had been done, and the reason for it. Whereas -the daimiyo had never traveled to Kyoto in less than seven days, the -Choshiu men arrived at their yashiki within four days from the time -they left Nagato. - -The kuge were escorted to the Palace. Here they found that an entirely -new order prevailed. The allied clans guarded the gates, but permitted -free ingress and egress to all samurai except such as bore the Tokugawa -crest. An imperial decree had been issued abolishing the office of -Shogun, and declaring that the government would be conducted by the -imperial court. Negotiations were being conducted with Keiki to arrive -at an equitable settlement. - -Brought up as he had been as the son of Mito, Keiki had always trusted -to his councillors, and was quite as ignorant of affairs as Mori. He -has been accused of vacillation, but personally he was not consulted -at all. Answers, of which he knew nothing, were given in his name -and under his seal. It was quite natural that among his councillors -there should be two parties, the one advocating submission, the other -resistance. The answer depended upon the majority among his councillors. - -At last it was decided by his advisers that he should leave Kyoto -and withdraw to Osaka. He was escorted by the two clans of Aidzu and -Kuwana, both intensely attached to the house of Iyeyasu, and unspoiled. -Their leaders urged, and almost compelled Keiki to fight. Himself -possessed of patriotic impulses, he refused. - -The new government at Kyoto dreaded war; not from fear, but on account -of the probable consequences. Sanjo and Iwakura had been reinstated and -were often in conference with Ito, Inouye, Goto, OKubo, and Saigo. It -was plainly evident that the government could not be carried on without -revenue, and the Court possessed nothing but a pittance allotted to -it from Tokugawa’s superfluity. If war should follow, Tokugawa had -resources, while the court had none. Even at present the Court depended -entirely upon the generosity of the clans which had been instrumental -in effecting the revolution. - -But the ex-Shogun or his party had also very good reasons for avoiding -civil war. It was they who would be Choteki this time, and every -Japanese has a horror of that word. Besides, the Tokugawa clans were -divided among themselves. Echizen and Owari had openly declared for -Tenshi Sama, and had, in fact aided in ousting Aidzu. There was thus -every prospect of peace, and the Court, to facilitate negotiations, -despatched the daimiyo of Echizen and Owari, to offer the Tokugawa clan -a fair share in the government. - -Keiki wished to accept; indeed, he was most anxious to wash his hands -of all interference with politics, but Aidzu and Kuwana would not -have it. They expected to restore the old order of things, and Keiki -escorted by the two clans, much against his will, set out upon the -return journey to Kyoto. - -The army of the allied clans was small, being almost completely -composed of Satsuma and Choshiu men. But these men were excellently -drilled, for Satsuma, too, had had a lesson from the barbarians, and -profited by it. The loyal army, that is the army of the allied clans -had taken a strong position at Fushimi. The Yodo river connects this -town with Osaka, with a good road on each bank. The Tokugawa forces -marched by both banks, and were received by a well-directed artillery -fire. The rice fields prevented them from deploying and, as they -understood nothing but a hand to hand mêlee, they had no chance in -taking a strong strategic position. Three days they attempted to carry -Fushimi and failed. Then they broke and fled, pursued by the victorious -imperialists. - -Ekichi had commanded a battery in this battle, and had again -distinguished himself by his calmness and steadiness under fire. When -the battle was over, he went to his commanding officer, and begged -to be detailed for the pursuit. His request was granted, and soon he -was among the foremost of the imperialists. It was noticed that he did -not use his sword, except in self-defense. Half-way toward Osaka the -pursuers were commanded to halt. - -The imperial forces were not strong enough to cope with those of -the Tokugawa, and orders were sent to the loyal clans to send -reinforcements. From all parts of the South and West samurai hurried to -support the Tenshi Sama’s cause and it was not long before the loyal -army set out in pursuit. - -Keiki had escaped from Aidzu by departing for Yedo on one of his -steamships; upon his arrival there he sent in his submission, but the -mountain clans would not obey his orders. It is odd that he should not -have taken his seal with him; if these same orders had been issued over -his seal, there is no doubt that Aidzu and Kuwana would have submitted. -But personal government had for centuries been unknown in Japan. If -Mori, personally, should have given an order to Choshiu, nobody would -have paid any attention to it; and if an order to exactly the opposite -effect had appeared over his seal, it would have been obeyed at once. - -We shall now return to our friends. - -While the Choshiu forces, escorting the recalled kuge were marching -toward Kyoto, Ito remained behind, quietly biding his time. After the -battle of Fushimi was fought and Keiki had embarked for Yedo, the -Tokugawa officials deserted their posts and fled. Ito at once went -to the administration building, and declared himself governor for -his Majesty Tenshi Sama. He took over the government, and prevented -lawlessness. - -Kobe, a part of the beach in the immediate vicinity of Hyogo had been -opened to foreigners, and Ito declared it his purpose to protect -them. The same policy had been adopted by those who advised the young -Emperor. Japan was never in a worse position to defy a foreign power -and her leaders were aware of the fact. One and all they hated the -barbarians, but they loved their country more. They had roughly -outlined a policy which was to make of Japan a united and great -country, and that object they lost never out of sight. - -At Yedo the Aidzu clan made a stand at the beautiful temple at Uyeno -(Pron. Oo-way-no). Here Ekichi was in the van. Both parties fought with -desperate courage, but Tokugawa lost. Among the dead was Kano Ekichi, -the son of the dead leader. - - - - -XXII - -CONCLUSION - - -Thirty-seven years have passed since this story opened. It is in the -month of May, 1895, and two men are sitting at a hibachi in an upper -room in Shinagawa, formerly a suburb of Yedo, now a part of the city -of Tokyo. The men were hale and hearty, but their gray hair, bordering -on white, showed that they were beyond middle age. Their hair was cut -after our fashion, but one wore a straggling beard, while the other’s -snow-white moustache showed off to advantage his small mouth. - -The room where they were sitting was at the back of the second story -of a house, which, apparently at least was of our cottage style of -architecture. If one had pressed the electric bell, and entered it, -he would not have seen anything except what might be expected in the -home of a well-to-do American or European. He might have noticed the -taste displayed by the owner, and the quiet, unobtrusive elegance, but -it would not have caused him to suspect that he was in the house of a -Japanese. - -The whole of the lower floor, except the kitchen and servants’ rooms, -was such as one might have expected in an opulent American or English -city. The upper story, however, retained the native simplicity, save -that walls, instead of the light, airy sho ji, helped to support the -roof. The prospect from every side was lovely, for the house stood -on one of the bluffs, bordering the former Tokaido. That highway was -there still, but its glory has departed. Every hour, and sometimes more -frequently, trains run between Yokohama and Tokyo, and thousands of -passengers mingle daily in the large waiting-rooms and in the depot at -Shinbashi. There the former daimiyo comes in actual contact with the -ninzoku, and the kuge of old stands by the side of the merchant. - -The front of the house gives a view of the bay, lovely at high tide but -disagreeable when the ebb exposes mud-banks extending three miles from -the shore. It will not be long before the government will perceive the -value of this land, and the eyesore will disappear. If Rome could have -been built in a day, these Japanese would have done it. - -If Ito looks from the windows on the right, toward Shinagawa, his eye -must fall upon the handsome residence of Mori, where the son of his -former lord now leads a life of quiet elegance. He is well satisfied -with it. When Ito, now higher in rank than his former lord, calls to -pay his respects as he often does, the same relation seems to exist as -in former days. Again Ito is the simple samurai, his lord the daimiyo, -and in both there is a secret longing for the days that are past. But -when they look about them that longing ceases, and they are glad and -proud of what they see. - -From the windows in the left, Ito looks upon Tokyo, now grown into one -of the world cities. Has it changed in these thirty-seven years? To -be sure it has, but not oppressively. As we walk through the streets -where dwell the people, we notice that they are wider and cleaner; but -the houses are still as they were before, although there is evidence -of greater prosperity. In Ginza, the street of the large shops, we see -a mixture of the occident and orient, not altogether pleasant; houses -built in foreign style, divided into Japanese rooms or Japanese houses -with imitation foreign stores. Still it is all Japanese, that is, we -can not, even for a moment, lose sight of the fact that we are in Japan. - -[Illustration: “BUT THE HOUSES ARE STILL AS THEY WERE BEFORE.”] - -But it is within the former castle grounds that a great change is -noticeable; especially at Sakura, near the spot where Ii Naosuke -paid with his head the hatred of Mito. Where his yashiki stood is -an elegantly built edifice of brick, a girls’ school, formerly the -polytechnic, and facing the moat are a number of villas. In the first -of these dwelt Sanjo during his life; next to it is the house once -occupied by Shimadzu, the head of the Satsuma clan, and up the hill is -the palace of Arisugawa, now in mourning, for its head died some months -ago. - -It is quite evident that two strong forces are working in Japan. The -leaders of the people are sincere in their desire to conform more and -more to occidental ideals, whereas the people are striving strenuously -to return to their former habits and customs in domestic life. Both -parties are impelled by the same motive, love of country. But the -leaders have more experience and a wider horizon. They have been -abroad, and judge occidental life, with all its virtues and vices by -the results which they produced. The people know nothing of foreigners, -except of such with whom they come into contact, and they have no love -for them. - -Thus, as an old friend expressed it to me, all our modern improvements -such as tend toward enhancing the nation’s greatness and wealth, have -been assimilated. Japan, to-day, could no more do without railroads, -than we could do without them. It is the same with telegraph and -telephone and other inventions where steam or electricity are the -motive. The army and navy have been organized according to the highest -standards, and will keep pace with the best of the world. Industries -have been and are being organized, and receive careful protection from -the government. But in the home life, the Japanese have turned back. - -“The luxury of your homes,” said my friend, “tends toward enervating -the race. We do not need your furniture; it is expensive and inelegant. -We sleep upon our futon as well as you do upon your spring mattress. -In your clothing you are the slaves of a thing you call fashion, and -every year or oftener you are called upon to pay tribute to it. Who -ever heard of anything so foolish? Our clothing keeps us cool in -summer, and hot in winter. It is inexpensive, becoming, and leaves our -limbs to their natural action; what more do we want? As to your food, -I acknowledge that a meat diet is more strengthening than our usual -bill of fare, and most of us indulge in it once a day. But to prepare -dishes merely to tickle the palate, is both foolish and wicked. We want -no waste. That is the reason why I prefer dressing in haori, hakama, -and Kimono, and why I prefer to live in a Japanese house. If I, or any -other Japanese, visit your country, we conform with your customs and -habits, because we do not wish to give offense. When you come here, -you bring your customs and habits with you, and parade them before us, -regardless if you give offense or not. I think in doing so, you act -wrongly or at least in bad taste.” - -“You believe in doing at Rome as the Romans do,” I said smiling. “But -surely one can not always do so. Excuse me, but most of your dishes are -absolutely repugnant to me.” - -“What does that prove, but that you are a slave to your stomach. Do you -remember when we first met? It is a long time ago, but I shall never -forget it. The impression of that day is still vivid within me. I had -heard that a barbarian had come to live in our next door yashiki, and I -wondered what sort of an animal he was. My father had told me I must be -very civil when I should see you, and, of course, there was nothing for -it but to mind. I had come from school when I heard steps behind me and -then somebody grabbed me and I saw you. It was well that I did not wear -my swords at that time, or we should not be talking here, and Japan -would have paid another indemnity. You don’t know the fury you raised -in me at your unceremonious introduction. Well, you dragged me in your -yashiki, and placed bread, butter and sugar before me. Do you remember -that, when your kadzukai came in, I asked him what those things were, -and what you wanted me to do with them? He told me they were bread, -oil from the cow, (niku no abura), and sugar, and were there for me to -eat. Talk of repugnant! It was nauseous to me to think of such a thing -as eating ‘oil from the cow.’ But when I am in America now, I enjoy my -butter and sometimes help myself twice.” - -“That may be,” I replied, “but for the life of me, I could not eat -your raw fish, and many other dishes.” - -“Pshaw! It is on account of an imagination which we call prejudice. -You don’t possess the nerve to try them, and if you did from some -reason, for instance false shame, they would probably upset your -stomach. You could not turn my stomach in those days, child though I -was, but sometimes you tried me pretty severely. When I came home that -first evening, I told my father all about you, and if you had heard my -description, I do not think that you would have felt flattered. But he -told me to cultivate your acquaintance, and his word was law. - -“It took me sometime to grow accustomed to--to--, well, I shall draw -it mild, to your lack of manners and of good breeding. But then, as -my father explained to me, you were only a barbarian, and without any -education; and you were, or tried to be, kind; I appreciated that. So -you taught me English, and I taught you Japanese, and you tested my -self-control by the funny mistakes you made. Let me see how long is -that ago? Twenty-six years? How long will it be before you can speak -Japanese, do you think?” - -“Come, that is rather rough on me,” I laughed. “I find I can get along -very well.” - -“Yes? I always did admire my fellow-countrymen. They have now another -claim to my regard. I speak in Japanese with you for the sake of old -times; but, do you know that I sometimes need all my equanimity to -bear with the way in which you murder our language. Sometimes you use -expressions as if I were your superior in rank; that is all right and -proper; but when, a moment late, you hurl a word at my head fit only -for a coolie or a servant, I admire the perfect control I have of my -temper. No!” he continued slowly and looking thoughtfully at me, “I -don’t think you will ever learn Japanese.” - -“I am satisfied with what I know,” I replied, “but if my use of your -tongue shocks your ear, I am willing to converse in English, and I -promise you that I shall not criticize either your pronunciation or -grammar.” - -He bowed ceremoniously and replied: “No, thank you! When I am in -the United States, or in England, I speak English and try to act as -regardless of the feelings of others as your fellow Anglo-Saxons act. -As soon as I begin to think in English, it seems as if I forget that I -am a Japanese gentleman.” - -“You must have mastered our language better than I have yours, then, -for when I speak in Japanese I can never bring myself to use those -elegant circumlocutions which we call by a name which to us has an ugly -sound.” - -This time it was my friend’s turn to laugh. “Do you remember when poor -Kato first came to see you? We were at our lessons, and he to do you -honor had spent a few days in learning the phrases: ‘I have heard of -your famous name,’ and ‘I am happy to see your face.’ He came in and -recited those two sentences in very fair English, I thought. I see you -jumping up yet. What a spitfire you were! Poor Kato! He did not know -what to make of it. You roared: ‘Now, what is the use of talking that -way? You never heard of my name, for it is not famous, and you don’t -care about my face any more than I care about yours.’ Kato’s stock of -English was exhausted, and he politely requested me to come to his -assistance. Well, I had manners if you had not, so I told him that -you were overpowered at the honor of his call, and that this was your -manner to invite him to make himself at home.” - -“So that was the reason that fellow bored me until eleven o’clock. I -owe you one for that!” - -“Yes? We paid you foreigners well in those days, more than we could -really afford, but most of you were worth the money. Not on account of -the duties you performed, not always satisfactorily but generally to -the best of your ability, but on account of the never failing amusement -you afforded us. At a time when you thought yourself a fair Japanese -scholar I have heard you criticized right before you, and you were as -unconscious as a babe.” - -“Don’t you think that you show by what you say the real difference -between you and our race. By your own confession, I showed you -kindness, and, my memory deceives me badly, or you reciprocated to some -extent my friendship for you. Yet you could stand by and patiently -listen to an adverse criticism of one who was your friend, and, instead -of resenting it, as I would have done in a similar case, you could be -amused by it.” - -“Ah! but you forget. At that time you were still an object of suspicion -to us. Shimonoseki and Kagoshima were recent recollections, and we were -eating humble-pie. It is different now. We know your strength and your -weakness and we know also our own strength, and we can magnanimously -condescend to treat you as our equals. At that time the whole nation -dissembled; we hated you and every foreigner, although we treated you -so as to flatter your conceit. It does not raise a people in its own -eyes when it forces itself to discard, even for a time, its national -pride, and pretend to honor those whom it despises and hates. I tell -you, my old friend, I am proud of my country and of my people. We -passed through a fiery ordeal, and came out purified. But I acknowledge -also that the fire has left scars which only time can heal. We are -growing better, not worse. The fact that we two still find pleasure -in each other’s company proves that we are better able to appreciate -each other’s good qualities, and that is a type of the feeling of Japan -toward foreign nations.” - - - - -NOTES - -_Meanings and Pronunciation of Japanese Words used in the Text._ - - - 1. Pron. Day-shee-mah, little island. - - 2. Pron. Nang-ah-sah-kee. - - 3. Pron. Shoh-goon. General-in-chief. - - 4. Pron. Die-mee-yoh. This word means Great Name. - - 5. Pron. Sah-moo-rye. - - 6. Pron. Yed-doh, now Tokyo (pron. To-kee-yoh), or Eastern Capital. - Yedo was the capital of Old Japan, from 1600 to 1868. - - 7. Pron. Kee-yoh-toh, the real capital of Old Japan. - - 8. Pron. Ten-shee Sah-mah. Lord of Heaven. - - 9. Pron. Toh-koo-ngah-wah. - - 10. Pron. Ee-yay-yas. - - 11. Pron. Say-kee-gah-hah-rah. - - 12. Pron. Moh-ree. - - 13. Pron. Cho-shu, in the southwest part of the Island of Hondo, - the mainland of Japan. - - 14. Pron. yash-kee. - - 15. Pron. Ee-yay-meets. - - 16. Pron. Moots′-shtoh. - - 17. Pron. hah-kah-mah, loose trousers, part of the dress reserved - to knights and nobles. - - 18. Pron. kah-yah-kee, a hardwood. - - 19. Pron. show-jee. - - 20. Pron. ah-may. - - 21. Pron. hee-bat-chee, a charcoal brazier, to warm the hands or - light the pipe. - - 22. Pron. keé-moh-noh. - - 23. Pron. Hie, hie! meaning “yes” or “coming”. - - 24. I have translated the conversations in intelligible English. To - give the forms of self-abasement of the speaker, and the - titles of honor to the person addressed, would sound - ridiculous to us. - - 25. Pron. On-nah Die-gah-koo, a book giving the rules for married - women. - - 26. Pron. sah-kee. - - 27. Pron. Hat′ toh ree. - - 28. Pron. mets′ kay, an official spy, appointed by the Shogun - government. - - 29. Pron. Go-roh-jiu (_u_ the French sound), Hon. Great Council - which issued all orders from the Shogun to the great Daimiyo. - - 30. Pron. Sah-wah. - - 31. Pron. noh-ree-moh-noh, a sort of sedan chair. - - 32. Pron. Ee-toh. - - 33. Pron. Toh-kie-doh, the great highway running from Tokyo to - Kyoto. - - 34. Pron. Mee-toh and I-dzoo, two clans belonging to the Tokugawa - family. - - 35. Pron. Ee-ee Nah-oh-skay, Daimiyo of Hikoni and regent of Japan, - who was afterwards assassinated. - - 36. Pron. Ee-no-yay. - - 37. Pron. how-ree, a thin mantlet of crêpe, with the coat of arms - worked on the back and sleeves. - - 38. Pron. Kee-ee, and Oh-wah-ree, the two estates taken from - Choshiu and given to the sons of Iyeyasu. - - 39. Pron. Shtah nee eeroo. - - 40. Pron. Ay-kee-chee. - - 41. Pron. f′ton. - - 42. The legacy of Iyeyasu, the law book of Old Japan. - - 43. The plain, east of the Hakone Mountains which contains Yedo. - - 44. Pron. Nah-kah-sen-doh, another highway between Yedo and Kyoto. - In the narrowest passes of both roads barriers were placed - which no one could pass, except when provided with passports - from the government. - - 45. Pron. roh-neen, a samurai who did not belong to a clan. The - Yedo government held the clan responsible for the acts of its - samurai. - - 46. Pron. Foo-jee, Kano’s chief retainer. - - 47. Pron. Yah-doh-yah, an inn. - - 48. Pron. hee-yahk-show, literally peasant. - - 49. Pron. Kodz′kie. - - 50. Pron. ee-chee-roh-koo nee-chee, literally one-six-day. Until - 1874 every fifth day was a holiday for the samurai; these days - were the 1st, 6th, 11th, 16th, etc. - - 51. O before a name means honorable. Pron. O Kee-chee. - - 52. Pron. tah-tah-mee, thick rush mats. - - 53. Pron. ree-yoh, old Japanese coin equal to about $1.00. - - 54. Pron. neen-zoh-koo, a coolie or day laborer. - - 55. Pron. yah-shwee moh-noh, the name by which the Roman Catholics - were known. - - 56. Issued Jan. 27, 1614. - - 57. Pron. Ty Coon. This is really a Chinese word and means Great - Prince. - - 58. Pron. O Ee-shah-sahn. - - 59. Pron. nar-rah foo-doh! which may be translated by; Is that - so?--You don’t say so! and similar expressions. - - 60. Pron. hat′-to-bah, jetty or landing. - - 61. Pron. Ay-to. - - 62. Pron. Tay-rah-jee. - - 63. Pron. Kah-mee′-shee-moh. - - 64. Pron. sep′ poo-koo, suicide by disemboweling, commonly called - hara-kiri. Pron. hah-rah′ kee-ree′. - - 65. Pron. Ee-yay-sah-dah. - - 66. Pron. Mee-toh. Of the three great Tokugawa families, Mito, Kii, - and Owari, Mito, by a secret clause in Iyeyasu’s will was - debarred from succeeding as Shogun. - - 67. Pron. Koong-ay, court nobles, descendants from former emperors, - who held the same position at the court as did the - councillors in the clan. - - 68. The Court of Tenshi sawa. - - 69. Pron. Son-noh Joe-ee. - - 70. Saru-me (pron. sah roo may), an approbrious term used to - express contempt and indignation. - - 71. Pron. Yah-mah-toh Dah-mash-yee. - - 72. Pron. Kah-ras-soo Mah-roo. - - 73. A kuge was of much higher rank than a daimiyo, and even of the - Shogun. They did not mention the daimiyo by their estate, but - by their family name. - - 74. Pron. Mee-yah, families accounted as Princes of the Blood. Most - of them were nurtured like the daimiyo, and wholly unable to - think for themselves. - - 75. Pron. Nee-joh, one of the leading Kuge families. - - 76. Pron. kah-kay-moh-noh, hanging scroll. - - 77. Pron. Shee-mad-zoo, family name of the lord of Satsuma. - - 78. According to Confucius. - - 79. This document is quoted in F. O. Adams’ History of Japan. - - 80. Pron. Shee-moh-noh-say-kee. - - 81. Pron. Ee-chee-joe, Nee-joe, Hee-gash-ee Koo-zay. - - 82. Nijo refers to the repulse of the Tartars in A. D. 1281. - - 83. Pron. Ee-say. - - 84. Pron. tsoo-boh, a square measure. - - 85. Pron. ty-foo, our typhoon; lit. great storm. - - 86. A member of the Imperial family, addressing one of inferior - rank of the same, uses the given name. Iwakura’s given name - was Tomomi. - - 87. There is a street of that name in Kyoto. - - 88. Pron. Foo-shee-mee. - - 89. Pron. Cho-tay-kee, _i. e._, rebel against Tenshi Sama. - - 90. Pron. Kay-kee. - - 91. Confucius. - - 92. Pron. Oh-dah-wah-rah, a town at the foot of the Hakome range. - - 93. Pron. Oh-sah-shtoh. - - 94. Pron. Koh-may. - - -THE END - - - - -FOOTNOTES: - - -[A] It was the American fleet, under Commodore Perry, who was sent by -President Millard Fillmore to make a treaty with Japan. - -[B] In the month of September, 1854, a series of earthquakes began -which lasted almost without interruption until the end of December. -Twenty thousand houses and sixteen thousand fire-proof warehouses were -destroyed in Yedo alone. Over 100,000 people were reported killed. -Osaka and Hyozo were destroyed, and Kyoto suffered considerable damage. - -[C] The Russian frigate _Diana_. - - - - -TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES: - - - Text in italics is surrounded by underscores: _italics_. - - Obvious typographical errors have beeen corrected. - - Inconsistencies in hyphenation and use of diacritical marks have been - retained. - - Archaic spelling which may have been in use at the time of original - publication have been retained. - - Errors in numbering in the Notes section have been corrected. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A Boy of Old Japan, by Robert Van Bergen - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A BOY OF OLD JAPAN *** - -***** This file should be named 56297-0.txt or 56297-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/6/2/9/56297/ - -Produced by MFR, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/56297-0.zip b/old/56297-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6a3c15b..0000000 --- a/old/56297-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h.zip b/old/56297-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ee37d66..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/56297-h.htm b/old/56297-h/56297-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 7debcd6..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/56297-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7046 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of A Boy of Old Japan, by R. Van Bergen. - </title> -<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - - h1,h2 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -p { - margin-top: .51em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .49em; -} - -.hangingindent { - padding-left: 22px ; - text-indent: -44px ; -} - - -div.titlepage {text-align: center; page-break-before: always; page-break-after: always;} -div.titlepage p {text-align: center; font-weight: bold; line-height: 1.5; font-size: x-large; margin-top: 2em;} - -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} -h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} - -a {text-decoration: none;} - -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; -} - -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} -hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} - -.ph1 {text-align: center; font-size: xx-large; font-weight: bold;} -.ph2 {text-align: center; font-size: large; font-weight: bold;} - - - -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; -} - - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; -} - - - - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.right {text-align: right;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -p.drop-cap { - text-indent: -0.25em; -} - -p.drop-cap2 { - text-indent: -0.5em; -} -p.drop-cap:first-letter, p.drop-cap2:first-letter -{ - float: left; - margin: 0.15em 0.1em 0em 0em; - font-size: 250%; - line-height:0.65em; -text-indent: 0em; -} -@media handheld -{ - p.drop-cap, p.drop-cap2 { - text-indent: 0em; /* restore default */ - } - p.drop-cap:first-letter, p.drop-cap2:first-letter - { - float: none; - margin: 0; - font-size: 100%; - } -} - - -.caption {font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; -} - - -.footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} - -.footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} - -.fnanchor { - vertical-align: super; - font-size: .8em; - text-decoration: - none; -} - - -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; - color: black; - font-size:smaller; - padding:0.5em; - margin-bottom:5em; - font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Boy of Old Japan, by Robert Van Bergen - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: A Boy of Old Japan - -Author: Robert Van Bergen - -Release Date: January 3, 2018 [EBook #56297] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A BOY OF OLD JAPAN *** - - - - -Produced by MFR, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - -</pre> - - - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="" /></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_0" id="Page_0"></a></span></p> -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_frontis.jpg" alt="A BOY OF OLD JAPAN" /></div> -<p class="caption">A BOY OF OLD JAPAN.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="titlepage"> -<h1><i>A BOY of<br /> -OLD JAPAN</i></h1> - -<p><small><i>BY</i></small><br /> -<i>R. VAN BERGEN</i></p> - -<p><small><i>Author of<br /> -The Story of Japan, The Story of<br /> -China, Heroic Japan, etc., etc.</i></small></p> - -<p><i>Illustrated with original<br /> -Japanese Color Pictures</i></p> - -<p><small><i>BOSTON<br /> -LEE and SHEPARD<br /> -M C M I</i></small> -</p></div> - - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Copyright 1901, by LEE & SHEPARD</span><br /> -<br /> -<i>All rights reserved</i><br /> -<br /> -<span class="smcap">A Boy of Old Japan</span><br /> -<br /> -Norwood Press<br /> -Berwick & Smith, Norwood, Mass.,<br /> -U. S. A.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - - -<p class="center"> -TO<br /> -MY LITTLE SON<br /> -HENRY A. S. VAN BERGEN,<br /> -IN RECOLLECTION<br /> -OF OUR PLEASANT VISIT<br /> -TO CAMBRIDGE</p> - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak"> -PREFACE</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">I am</span> under deep obligations to the publishers, -for giving me an opportunity to tell -the story of the rejuvenation of Japan. -I was a witness, although at that time I did not -comprehend the movement, but I, and those -few who are still living, do now.</p> - -<p>From a federation of mutually autonomous -oligarchies, Japan was metamorphosed into an -Empire which holds Russia at bay. From a -nation occupying 150,000 square miles, it has -expanded by the addition of Formosa, and its -population has grown from thirty millions to -forty-five millions. An oriental people adopted -occidental progress, and within three decades or -little more than one generation, digested and assimilated -our progress.</p> - -<p>I have known, and was personally known to -the men, whose story I have endeavored to tell. -They are now honored under the simple name -of Genr,—statesmen of Revolutionary Times. -Of the brilliant array of patriots whose names -appear in these pages, only Ito, Inouye, and -OKuma remain!</p> - -<p>I have kept the names. Why should I not? -Only honor can be bestowed upon such patriots -as they; and the world delights to honor them. -Besides, there is a healthy spirit for the young -in a <i>true</i> story of devotion, sacrifice, and self-restraint. -How often does a child, when reading -an interesting story, ask: “Papa, is this -true?” In this case the father may conscientiously -answer: It is.</p> - -<p>All the characters as portrayed in these -pages, were living actors in the great national -drama. Of those whose names have never before -appeared in print, Karassu Maru, the only -<i>impulsive</i> noble I have ever known, was the -first imperial governor of Yedo. He died in -August, 1872, and I attended his funeral. -Honami came to Yedo with the emperor, but he -was soon sent back to Kyoto, where he was -placed under guardianship.</p> - -<p>I have enjoyed the retrospective communication -with my old friends. If my readers do so, -they owe the pleasure to the publishers, who -suggested the composition of the book.</p> - -<p class="right"> -<span class="smcap">R. van Bergen.</span></p> - - -<p><span class="smcap">Cambridge, Mass.</span>, <i>Nov. 12, 1900</i>.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak">Contents</h2></div> - -<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" summary="table"> - -<tr><td align="right"><small>CHAPTER</small></td><td> </td><td align="right"><small>PAGE</small></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">I.</td><td>Japan Asleep</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">II.</td><td>The Old Yashiki</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_10">10</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">III.</td><td>The Messenger</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_21">21</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">IV.</td><td>The Fifth Day of the Eleventh Month</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_32">32</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">V.</td><td>The Council of the Clan</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_44">44</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">VI.</td><td>Young Kano Grows Up</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_55">55</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">VII.</td><td>Kano’s Journey to Yedo</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_65">65</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">VIII.</td><td>Yokohama in 1859</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">IX.</td><td>New Experience</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">X.</td><td>Friendship or Hatred</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XI.</td><td>Choshiu Yashiki</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XII.</td><td>Sonno Jo!</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_118">118</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XIII.</td><td>Plotting</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XIV.</td><td>Within the Palace</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XV.</td><td>Underground Rumbling</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_151">151</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XVI.</td><td>The Court Aroused</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_161">161</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XVII.</td><td>A Conference</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_171">171</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XVIII.</td><td>Flight</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_184">184</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XIX.</td><td>Battle and Defeat</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_195">195</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XX.</td><td>Drilling</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_206">206</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XXI.</td><td>Down With Tokugawa</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_216">216</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td align="right">XXII.</td><td>Conclusion</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_226">226</a></td></tr> -</table> - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak">Illustrations</h2></div> - - -<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" summary="table"> - -<tr><td>Inouye in Samurai Costume</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_0">Frontispiece</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td> </td><td align="right"><small>PAGE</small></td></tr> - -<tr><td>Peace reigned over the country</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_5">5</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>A Japanese Family</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_24">24</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>Ito’s mother, suffering from rheumatism, to receive -a massage treatment from one of the servants</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_31">31</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>It is really a day devoted to Hachiman, the god of -war</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_59">59</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>He was in Kamishimo</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_118">118</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>The friends were standing in the garden of a Teahouse</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_165">165</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>But the houses are still as they were before</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_229">229</a></td></tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - -<p class="ph1"><span class="smcap">A Boy of Old Japan</span></p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">I<br /> -JAPAN ASLEEP</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Japan</span> had been asleep for more than two -hundred years. About the time when -the Pilgrim fathers landed in what is -now known as the New England States, the -man who ruled over Japan had made up his -mind that he would have nothing more to do -with the people of Europe, and he gave orders -that no more foreigners should be admitted. -He made one exception in favor of the people -of Holland, but on condition that only a very -small number of them should reside in Japan -at a time; and they must be satisfied with the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span> -tiny island of Deshima<a href="#A1">[1]</a> in the harbor of Nagasaki,<a href="#A2">[2]</a> -and promise that they would obey the -governor of that city.</p> - -<p>It was not many years before this time, when -the Japanese had been glad to receive every -European, but they had found out that the Portuguese -and Spaniards wished to be masters of -their country, and so their kindness had -changed first into dislike and afterwards into -hate. The Portuguese had taught many Japanese -about our Lord, and a number of them -had become Christians. But the Shogun<a href="#A3">[3]</a> ordered -that all Christians must be killed, and -thousands of them were put to death. He gave -also orders that all large ships must be destroyed, -and that thereafter only small vessels -could be built. Besides, he threatened to put -to death any Japanese who should return to his -country after having been abroad, even if he -had been carried away against his will. No -foreigner could come to Japan and no Japanese -could leave his country. They could, therefore, -learn nothing from other people. That<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span> -is why I said that Japan had been asleep for -more than two hundred years.</p> - -<p>In all that long time there had been no -change. Just as Japan was in 1621, so it was -in 1853. The houses were still built in exactly -the same way, the men and boys dressed exactly -as their ancestors had done before, and so -did the women and girls, and they lived in the -same manner.</p> - -<p>The people worked hard from early in the -morning until late at night. The merchants, -mechanics, and farmers, toiled from the beginning -of the year to the end, without any Sundays -or holidays, except on New Year’s day, -and perhaps a few days later. They had nothing -to say in the government, and belonged to -the Lord on whose estate they were living. The -whole of Japan was divided into about three -hundred of such estates; some of them very -large and others again very small. Over each -of these estates was a daimiyo,<a href="#A4">[4]</a> or lord, who -was assisted by as many samurai,<a href="#A5">[5]</a> or knights, -as the estate could support. These knights<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span> -were the civil officers of the estate while there -was peace; but as soon as war broke out they -were soldiers, always ready to go into battle, -and to die for their lord.</p> - -<p>The greatest of all the daimiyo was the Shogun<a href="#A3">[3]</a>, -or Commander-in-chief, who resided in -his large castle at Yedo.<a href="#A6">[6]</a> It was he who made -the laws for all the Japanese, and he had so -many samurai that not even the greatest daimiyo -dared disobey him. But, although he had -as much power as any emperor, still he was not -the real Emperor of Japan. Many, many years -before there was any Shogun, the country had -been governed by the ancestors of a man who -was living quietly in Kyoto.<a href="#A7">[7]</a> His house was -shaped like a temple, and stood in the most -beautiful grounds that can be imagined. When -the people spoke of him, they whispered: Tenshi -Sama,<a href="#A8">[8]</a> for he was to them the Child of -Heaven, the descendant, as they thought, of -the gods who created Japan.</p> - - - -<p>But Tenshi Sama, they believed, was too -mighty and too great to care about such a small<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span> -thing as governing the people. All he had to -do was to pray to the gods to take care of Japan, -and they would surely hear his prayers. Since -the first Shogun ruled over Japan, there had -been many wars and much bloodshed, because -many daimiyo wanted larger estates than they -possessed. All these wars ceased in the year -1600, when the Daimiyo of Tokugawa,<a href="#A9">[9]</a> named -Iyeyasu,<a href="#A10">[10]</a> defeated his rivals at Sekigahara,<a href="#A11">[11]</a> -and caused the Tenshi Sama to make him Shogun.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_004f.jpg" alt="PEACE REIGNED OVER THE COUNTRY" /></div> -<p class="caption">“PEACE REIGNED OVER THE COUNTRY.”</p> - -<p>Iyeyasu was such a brave general, and besides -an able as well as a generous man, that -the country began to enjoy peace. The great -daimiyo tried once more to shake off his rule, -but they could not do it. In 1615 the last battle -was fought, and the daimiyo were defeated -so badly that they gave in. Iyeyasu punished -some of them very severely. He took a very -large part of the estate of Lord Mori,<a href="#A12">[12]</a> the -Daimiyo of Choshiu,<a href="#A13">[13]</a> and divided it among -two of his sons. Mori henceforth was the enemy -of Tokugawa, and so were all the great<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span> -daimiyo who had suffered defeat. But Iyeyasu -ordered them to build yashiki,<a href="#A14">[14]</a> or mansions, in -Yedo, and to live there half of the year. Iyemitsu,<a href="#A15">[15]</a> -the grandson of Iyeyasu and the third -Tokugawa Shogun, commanded them to leave -their wives and children at Yedo, where he held -them in his power. He made laws for the people, -the samurai, and the daimiyo, and, since -he had an army of 80,000 samurai on his own -estates, he was strong enough to make the -daimiyo obey him.</p> - -<p>Thus all war ceased in Japan and peace -reigned over the country. The merchant plied -his trade, the mechanic worked at his craft, and -the peasant toiled in his field, as their fathers -had done before them, and they brought up -their sons to do as they had been taught. There -was, therefore, no progress; and there was very -little liberty.</p> - -<p>The only people who really did have something -to say, were the samurai or knights. -They did not work, but were paid by the daimiyo -whom they served. They were very proud<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> -of being <i>gentlemen</i>, and never failed to speak -and act as they believed was right. Thus Japan -continued until the year 1853. Then a number -of “fire-ships,” their smoke stacks belching -forth a dense smoke, steamed up Yedo Bay. -The cliffs echoed the throbbing of the engines. -In vain did the Shogun’s guard boats warn -them to go back. They did not heed these -commands any more than when the tide turned, -and the current tried to stop their progress.<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> -On, on they went toward the capital of the Shogun, -until the shoaling water warned them to -cast anchor. Their commander was notified -that he must leave, but he replied that he carried -a letter for the Shogun, and would not go -before he had delivered it. The government at -Yedo did not know what to do. The Japanese -are very shrewd, and understood quite well that -the samurai, armed with bow and arrow and in -old fashioned lacquered armor, were no match<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span> -for guns and cannon. The government was -<i>afraid to refuse</i> to receive the letter, and a year -later it signed a treaty, because <i>it was afraid</i> to -enter upon war with these strangers. The officers -of the government knew the strength of -the foreigners, but the samurai of the other -daimiyo did not; and when they heard that the -Shogun had entered into a treaty, <i>because he -was afraid</i>, they became angry and excited. -From that time it was certain that the Tokugawa -princes would be Shogun no longer. The -anger of the samurai increased when a new -treaty was made, in 1858, between the government -of Japan and that of the United States -through Mr. Townsend Harris. For the following -ten years there was trouble in Japan, -and the samurai began to think that Tenshi -Sama should drive the foreigners into the ocean. -That was easier said than done, but the samurai -did succeed in taking the government away -from the Tokugawa, and Tenshi Sama became -emperor indeed, and he is so still.</p> - -<p>Mutsuhito,<a href="#A16">[16]</a> the Emperor of Japan, was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> -only a boy of fifteen when he was taken out -of his beautiful palace in 1867. He is now -(1900) forty-eight years old, and has seen -Japan grow from a poor little country into a -great and strong empire. Our story begins in -the year 1858, and will show how a Japanese -samurai boy was brought up.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">II<br /> -THE OLD YASHIKI</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Great</span> preparations for receiving guests -were being made in the Kano Yashiki -at Nagato. To-morrow would be the -fifth day of the eleventh month of the fourth -year of the oldest son and heir, and the boy -would be invested with the <i>hakama</i><a href="#A17">[17]</a> of the -samurai.</p> - -<p>There would be a great gathering of the -Choshiu clan, for the Kano family had been -great in the council, and was trusted by daimiyo -and samurai alike. The history of the -Mori family was as much the history of that of -Kano, at least ever since Kano Shimpei had -tried to keep his lord from fighting Iyeyasu. -The Mori of that time had refused to heed his -knight’s advice, and sent him away in disgrace. -But Kano would not desert his master. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> -had followed him to Osaka, and when the battle -was lost, had saved his lord by continuing to -fight until Mori was rescued by a small band -of devoted samurai. Kano himself died covered -with wounds. The Daimiyo of Choshiu -had never forgotten the advice nor the heroic -death of Kano Shimpei. They had honored -his descendants, and every Kano had tried to -show his great loyalty to his lord.</p> - -<p>The Kano Yashiki stood within the outer -moat of Choshiu’s castle. A massive gateway -faced the street. On each side was a high, plastered -wall covered with tiles. This wall surrounded -the yashiki and its grounds, and gave -it the shape of a perfect square. The doors of -the gate were of heavy wood, plated with iron -and studded with huge iron bolts. They swung -inward on hinges, but were opened only for the -daimiyo, if he should honor his samurai with a -visit, or for a knight of equal rank of the owner. -For all other callers there was a little gate by -the side, where the guard could examine all that -entered or left.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span>A short but broad road, composed of pulverized -shells mixed with soft white sand, led from -the gate to the samurai residence. It was a -fine two story building, with verandahs running -round the house. It was built upon posts about -two feet high and resting upon stones so that, -if an earthquake should happen, the building -could move with the wave of the earth. The -verandahs were made of kayaki<a href="#A18">[18]</a> wood, and -polished until it shone like a mirror. The building -was really a large and strong shed, with -thick posts upholding the roof with its heavy -tiles. There were no walls. Paper sho ji,<a href="#A19">[19]</a> -or sliding doors, set loosely in grooves, took -their place. They could be easily taken out, -to allow fresh air. These grooves were so arranged -that the whole floor could easily be -changed into several apartments or rooms. The -upper story had a balcony at the back, overlooking -the spacious and beautifully kept gardens, -with ponds, little hills, and copses of trees. -At the end of the balcony as well as on the -verandahs were closets, holding the ame,<a href="#A20">[20]</a> or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> -rain doors. These were slid into deep grooves -along the outer edges of the verandahs and balcony -at night or when a storm arose.</p> - -<p>The owner of the house was sitting in one of -the rooms at the back of the house. He was a -man of about thirty, of middle size, but strongly -built. His hibachi<a href="#A21">[21]</a> stood before him, but he -was evidently in deep thought. He did not expect -any visitors, for he had taken off his -hakama, and was sitting in his simple cotton -kimono,<a href="#A22">[22]</a> or gown.</p> - -<p>Suddenly he clapped his hands three times. -The sound of: hai, hai!<a href="#A23">[23]</a> came from a distance, -and presently one of the sho ji was slid -aside, and Mrs. Kano appeared dutifully on -hands and knees. She could not be seen very -well, as she bowed her head upon her hands, -as a salute to her master and husband, but when -he remained silent, she raised her head and -asked softly:<a href="#A24">[24]</a></p> - -<p>“Did you call?”</p> - -<p>She could be seen now. Mrs. Kano was perhaps -eighteen, certainly not more than nineteen<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> -years old. Her jet black hair was done up in -a matronly coil and glistening with patchouli -or oil from the cactus plant. Her forehead was -fair, but eye-brows she had none, for a Japanese -wife, before her marriage, was compelled to -pull them out. Her teeth were of a shining -jet, another custom of married ladies. But, -disfigured as she was, her soft and gentle voice -showed that Mrs. Kano had been taught the -Onna Daigaku,<a href="#A25">[25]</a> or the Greater Learning for -Women, and that she was willing to try to -please her husband.</p> - -<p>When he heard his wife’s voice, Kano looked -at her, bowed slightly, and said:</p> - -<p>“Have all preparations been made for to-morrow’s -reception?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” she replied, “all your orders have -been obeyed.”</p> - -<p>“Very well,” he said, and she withdrew.</p> - -<p>Kano was thinking of his son. He remembered -the death of his father, when he was -only eighteen years old. How he had looked -up to him! How gently, and yet how firmly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> -had his father trained him in the manly exercises -of the samurai, hardening his body to -despise luxury and ready to bear cold or heat -at any time. How he had taught him the family -history, with its fine record of loyalty and -self sacrifice, and how he had commanded him -to follow in the same path. Kano felt that he -had done so. He remembered the illness which -had struck the strong man so suddenly and with -fatal ending, and which caused the son such a -deep pain. His father’s last words: “The wise -man of China says that the greatest disrespect -to a father is not to have any son,” had caused -him to marry as soon as the time of mourning -was over. And now he was a father himself, -and the time had come that he must begin to -train the child.</p> - -<p>Had he done his duty, according to the laws -and custom of the samurai? Why, certainly. -On the seventy-fifth day after its birth, the child -had left off its baby-linen. On the hundred -and twentieth day it had been weaned. Every -ceremony had been observed as it should be by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span> -a gentleman of Kano’s family. Kano’s own -brother had fed the child, and My Lord’s cousin -had acted as sponsor. He had taken the child -on his left knee and as weaning father had -taken of the sacred rice which had been offered -to the gods. He had dipped his chop-sticks -three times in it, and then placed them in the -mouth of the child as if giving it some of the -rice juice. He had followed the honored custom -to feed the child three times from the five -cakes made of rice meal. When the three cups -of sake<a href="#A26">[26]</a> were brought on the tray, the sponsor -drank them and offered one to the child, now -restored to his guardian. The boy pretended -to drink two cups, and the sponsor had produced -his present. Every ceremony had been -observed, and the feast which followed had -shown that Kano intended to follow in the footsteps -of his fathers, in honoring the customs of -Old Japan.</p> - -<p>Again on the fifteenth day of the eleventh -month, when the boy’s hair was allowed to -grow, not a single ceremony was neglected;<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> -and to-morrow Kano would prove once more -that he loved the customs of his father and was -willing to abide by them.</p> - -<p>Again a sho ji slid open, but this time it attracted -Kano’s attention. A servant girl kneeling -on the door sill was waiting until her master -should speak.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” he asked.</p> - -<p>With a deep drawn breath, as if overwhelmed -at the honor of being spoken to, she replied:</p> - -<p>“Mr. Hattori<a href="#A27">[27]</a> wishes to speak to your -honor.”</p> - -<p>Kano rose hastily and, opening a cupboard, -seized his hakama and slipped it on over his -kimono. Thus prepared to receive his old-time -friend, he ordered the girl to admit him. A -moment later, and the visitor entered with a -shuffling gait, and, falling upon his knees, three -times touched his head to the ground. Kano -replied in the same manner, each in turn repeating -the same ceremonious phrases, which custom -demanded of men of their rank.</p> - -<p>At last Hattori was seated upon the cushion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> -which the servant had placed for him, and tea -was brought in. When the servant had withdrawn, -the two men smoked in silence, until -Hattori knocked the ashes out of his pipe, and -asked:</p> - -<p>“Have you seen him?”</p> - -<p>Kano raised his brows slightly, and answered:</p> - -<p>“I do not understand you. Do you mean -the sponsor? Certainly, I have seen him.”</p> - -<p>“Ah! you are thinking of to-morrow! No, -I do not mean the sponsor or any one connected -with your family. Bah! I mean the new -guest we must entertain, and who will offer you -his congratulations.”</p> - -<p>“A new guest!” exclaimed Kano. “Surely, -I must be growing dull, for I fail to catch your -meaning.”</p> - -<p>“Well, then,” said Hattori, cautiously looking -into the garden, “another metsuk<a href="#A28">[28]</a> arrived -this afternoon from Yedo, and was bold -enough to come to the castle and demand to be -admitted. I was ordered to receive him and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> -find out what he wanted. When I came into -the room where he was waiting, he introduced -himself by handing me a letter from the Go rojiu,<a href="#A29">[29]</a> -to the clan. There were enough councillors -present to open it, so I excused myself -and called our friends. It was very brief and -to the point. The Go rojiu desires to mention -our clan as a model for Japan, and has therefore -sent this fellow to report.”</p> - -<p>“What is his name?”</p> - -<p>“Sawa.”<a href="#A30">[30]</a></p> - -<p>“Sawa, Sawa,” repeated Kano slowly. “I -think I know the name. How old is he, do you -think?”</p> - -<p>“He must be forty at least, and he seems cut -out for his work. His oily talk is disgusting; -and while he flatters you, his eyes are restlessly -peeping in every nook and corner.”</p> - -<p>“What have you done with him?”</p> - -<p>“The usual thing. We accepted the letter -and told him that we would deliberate carefully -about it, and let him have an answer in a couple -of days. He bowed himself out and was carried<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> -in his norimono<a href="#A31">[31]</a> to the hotel. But I hear -he has sent his servants to find out if he can not -rent a vacant yashiki. So, you see, he intends -to remain some time, and send in a full report.”</p> - -<p>Kano was silent. He was evidently displeased; -suddenly his attention as well as that -of his friend was drawn to a soft footstep on -the gravel walk of the garden, and presently a -young man appeared at the steps leading from -the verandah to the path. He faced the room -and bowed low. Both returned the salutation, -but Kano muttered between his teeth: “Ito!<a href="#A32">[32]</a> -What on earth brings him here?”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">III<br /> -THE MESSENGER</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> intruder, if he may be so called, -mounted the steps and, entering the -room, saluted in the usual manner. -He was invited to approach, and, clapping his -hands, Kano ordered the servant to bring in -another cushion, and fresh tea. When these -had been brought, and the visitor was seated, -Kano said:</p> - -<p>“When did you leave Yedo?”</p> - -<p>“Just a week ago.”</p> - -<p>“Is there anything new?”</p> - -<p>“Why, I think so. It is said openly by Tokugawa -men that the foreign devils, with whom -the Go rojiu have made a treaty, will be permitted -to settle down at Yokohama.”</p> - -<p>“Settle down! What do you mean?” exclaimed -Hattori.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span>“Where is Yokohama?” asked Kano.</p> - -<p>Ito replied first to the question of his host.</p> - -<p>“Yokohama is a little distance from the Tokaido,<a href="#A33">[33]</a> -near Kanagawa, the last post station -at this side of Yedo.” Then, turning toward -Hattori, he continued:—“Yes; the new treaty -permits them to buy land and to build houses.”</p> - -<p>“But,” said Hattori, aghast, “that means -that Japan is invaded. These foreign devils -have come with their fire ships and guns, and -by threats have accomplished their purpose. -What has become of the Tokugawa? Have -they lost their manhood, to submit to such a -disgrace!”</p> - -<p>“Softly!” said Kano. “There may be reasons -why the Go rojiu has permitted them to -come so close to Yedo. It must be so. It must -be a trap to destroy the intruders in such a -manner that others like them will think twice -before they come again.”</p> - -<p>“I wish I could think so,” said Ito. “No! -I believe that the Tokugawa are afraid of an -invasion. Their samurai, with the exception<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> -of those of Mito and Aidzu,<a href="#A34">[34]</a> are not worth -their salt. Have you ever seen, during your -residence in Yedo, a Tokugawa Knight practising -at arms. They are quick enough to draw -their swords upon a beggar or a merchant, but -when they meet one of the samurai of the -southern clans, they fly to cover. No! Since Ii -Naosuke<a href="#A35">[35]</a> is regent, he has looked closely into -the forces which the Tokugawa can muster, if -a war should break out, and he thinks that it -must be avoided at any cost. Of course, he expects -that the samurai of the great clans will -be furious, and he has sent a large number of -spies to report what is said. One of these -gentry was sent here. I heard of it in time to -follow him, and I came on to warn you.”</p> - -<p>Both Kano and Hattori expressed their -thanks, and Kano said:</p> - -<p>“But if the Tokugawa are not able to prevent -a handful of foreigners from landing, how -can they expect that the great southern clans -will obey them?”</p> - -<p>“Oh!” replied Ito, smiling grimly; “we<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> -have been obedient for so many years, trembling -when the Go rojiu frowned, that the regent believes -it will continue forever. He had a meeting -of all the daimiyo connected with his clan, -and tried to convince them that we must now -receive these foreigners, and try to learn all -that they know. Then, when we can handle -their fire ships and their cannon, we may expect -to drive them into the sea.”</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_024f.jpg" alt="A JAPANESE FAMILY" /></div> -<p class="caption">A JAPANESE FAMILY.</p> - -<p>Hattori put his hand upon his dagger, but -Kano, with a friendly motion of his hand, -calmed him. “There may be something in -that,” he said thoughtfully. “Mind you!” he -continued, “I do not underrate Japanese courage, -but we do not know the strength of these -barbarians. We have been living like frogs in -a well. It is easy enough to engage in war, but -it is best to know the number of the enemy, -before you engage in what may prove too heavy -odds. Such a thing would be foolish. But we -may come to a settlement with the Tokugawa. -If indeed, their samurai have lost their courage, -then my lord of Choshiu may recover the land<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> -from which he was robbed, and I may avenge -my ancestor’s death. When will the councillors -of the clan meet?”</p> - - - -<p>“The day after to-morrow,” replied Hattori.</p> - -<p>Kano clapped his hands, and ordered the -servant to send up dinner for his guests and -himself. Hattori and Ito made some excuses, -but were easily induced to remain.</p> - -<p>Small tables were brought in and placed before -each man. First sake or wine made from -rice, was served hot, and a small stone bottle -placed near each person; then there was <i>suimono</i>, -a sort of vegetable soup, after which -rice was ladled out into cups or bowls. A number -of side dishes, such as pickled <i>daikon</i>, a -sort of giant radish, <i>tsubo</i> or stewed sea-weed, -and soy, a sauce, were enjoyed by the samurai.</p> - -<p>The conversation had been interrupted when -the servants entered, and was not resumed. -The men spoke of the ceremony to take place -the next day; and Ito was invited. Before -leaving, however, Kano told Hattori that he -would ask the councillors of the clan to remain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> -after the reception was over, so that they might -discuss their plans for the future.</p> - -<p>Ito and Hattori bowed good-bye, as they -were going in different directions. Each carried -a lantern, for it was dark, and there was -no street lighting in Japan at that time. At -the corner of the street, Ito stopped as if in -doubt. Then, after a few moments, he seemed -to make up his mind, for he turned to the left, -and went hastily toward the castle entrance. -The heavy gate was closed, but the little side -gate stood ajar. Ito entered, and giving his -name to the officer of the guard, went along -the barracks where many of the samurai of -lower rank dwelt. At last he stopped before -a small door, and knocked softly. He heard -a shuffling of feet, and a woman’s voice demanded -who was there.</p> - -<p>“Is Mr. Inouye<a href="#A36">[36]</a> in?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Tell him that Ito Saburo wishes to see -him.”</p> - -<p>The woman seemed satisfied, for the door<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> -slid open, and Ito entered. Without waiting -he mounted the steps, and opening a sho ji, -stepped into a room, dimly lit by a rushlight -placed in a paper lantern. Ito fell on his knees, -and saluted in the usual manner, which salute -was returned by the owner of the room, a man -of Ito’s age, but of more slender build.</p> - -<p>The two men had not met for two years; for -Ito had been ordered to remain at the Choshiu -yashiki in Yedo, and Inouye’s duties had kept -him at Nagato. But they had corresponded by -every courier carrying letters to and from the -capital, for they had been friends ever since -they were little boys. Yet when they met after -such a long absence, there was no glad -“Helloh!” with a hearty clasp of the hand, as -we would meet an old friend. Pleased as they -were to see each other again, they had been -taught that good breeding demands that gentlemen -should always show courtesy and respect -to others of their own rank. Certain -sentences must be uttered before any ordinary -conversation can begin. Therefore Ito said:</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span>“I was very rude the last time we met, but -I hope you have forgiven me.”</p> - -<p>“No,” replied Inouye, “it was I who was -rude, and I pray you to overlook it.”</p> - -<p>It is needless to say that neither of them had -really been rude, but custom demanded that -this should be said, and the same custom prevails -in Japan to-day. We think that it is foolish, -and the Japanese think us very rude, because -we do not obey that custom.</p> - -<p>After these customs had been observed, the -two friends sat down, and Ito said:</p> - -<p>“Has any progress been made in your -studies of the barbarian nations?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing worth boasting. I have been -twice to Nagasaki to try if I could pick up -some of the books of the Hollanders, but the -Tokugawa officers will not permit any stranger -to approach the island of Deshima, unless they -are bribed with more money than I possess. -Still, I have learned enough to know that -Japan is not in a condition to fight the barbarians, -and I am afraid, I think, that the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span> -regent was right in submitting to their demands.”</p> - -<p>“I do not think so,” replied Ito. “Right! -What right has the Tokuwaga to sell an inch -of Japan’s soil. It does not belong to them. -It is the property of Tenshi Sama, if it belongs -to anybody. It makes me angry to think that -we can no longer boast that</p> - - -<p class="center">The foot of the invader has never trod our soil.”</p> - -<p>“There will be no invasion,” said Inouye. -“These men only want to trade. If they had -intended to use force, they would have done -so when they came the second time, with a -large fleet. No! I do not believe that our -country is in danger, at least not for some -years. But they may come as spies to find out -what opportunity there is to obtain possession -of Japan. The Yedo government should try -to discover what the intentions of the barbarians -really are.”</p> - -<p>“The Yedo government is only anxious to -make money. You do not know, Inouye, how<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> -good it feels to breathe the pure air of Nagato. -It is stifling at Yedo. Spies, spies are everywhere. -The Tokugawa samurai seem to have -forgotten that they are gentlemen, and how a -samurai should behave. They are quick -enough to draw their swords upon men who -cannot defend themselves, but they are nimble -with their feet when hard blows may be expected. -If Japan must go to war, we, the -samurai of the south will do the fighting. The -day of the Tokuwaga is past.”</p> - -<p>There was a brief silence, when Inouye said:</p> - -<p>“I have not yet asked you what brings you -here. I had not heard that you had been relieved -from duty at Yedo.”</p> - -<p>“I was not relieved. But we were informed -that the Go rojiu intended to send new spies to -the southern diamiyo, and I was ordered to -inform the councillors of the clan. It seems -that Sawa, the chief spy, arrived just before -me. I suppose I shall be told to return to Yedo, -but I hope not. At any rate I shall see you -before I leave.”</p> - - - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span>After the usual salutations Ito rose and lit -his candle. After leaving the door, he went -through the grounds to the opposite barracks, -where his mother lived. Knocking at the little -wicket, he was admitted with many bows and -glad exclamations. These he returned with -some pleasant words, and entered the sitting-room. -Presently his mother entered, and both -knelt down and saluted in the respectful and -courteous manner of their people. There was -no kissing or even handshaking; both were, of -course, very happy, but Japanese law forbade -showing joy, even in the expression of the face. -Ito would have obeyed at once any order his -mother might have given him; but she considered -him as the head of the family, and showed -that she looked upon him as the master of the -house.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_030f.jpg" alt="HIS MOTHER, SUFFERING FROM RHEUMATISM" /></div> -<p class="caption">“HIS MOTHER, SUFFERING FROM RHEUMATISM, TO RECEIVE -MASSAGE TREATMENT FROM ONE OF THE SERVANTS.”</p> - -<p>They chatted for half an hour about their -acquaintances and then retired. Ito’s mother, -suffering from rheumatism, to receive a massage -treatment from one of the servants.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">IV<br /> -THE FIFTH DAY OF THE ELEVENTH MONTH</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> day broke calm and smiling. Japan, -especially those parts around the Inland -Sea, has a lovely climate. It is -seldom that the sky is not of a deep blue color, -and the days are few when children cannot play -or walk in the streets. They are rarely kept in -the house. Young babies are securely fastened -upon the backs of children six or seven years -old, and sent into the streets. There are no -noisy games. Girls play sometimes battledore -and shuttlecock, but the boys are too dignified. -American boys would be surprised if they saw -two Japanese school friends meet in the street. -They do not approach with a hop, skip and -jump, or clap each other on the shoulder. Oh -no! They stop as soon as they meet, take off<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> -their caps, for all Japanese schoolboys wear -now a sort of soldier cap, and then bow almost -to the ground. Then they draw a deep breath, -and each continues on his way.</p> - -<p>The great difference between Japanese and -American boys of the same age, is that all our -boys are fond of fun, and we are glad to see -them have a good time, while a Japanese boy -would not be able to understand what we call -fun. Our boys would soon grow sick if there -were not some time in the day when they could -make all the noise they wished. If a Japanese -boy should make even the slightest unnecessary -noise at home, his parents would think that the -world had turned topsy-turvy. From his -earliest youth, the boy is trained not to show -his feelings. In all the years of my life in -Japan, I have never seen a boy of over six years -old with tears in his eyes.</p> - -<p>It is eleven o’clock, and the guests begin to -arrive. They come mostly on foot, for they -all live in the neighborhood; but there are a -few who hold such a high rank that they can<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span> -only leave their yashiki in a sedan chair, or on -horseback. A servant brings a large bundle, -carefully wrapped. It is taken to the back -room which has been made much larger by the -removal of several sho ji. Here Mr. Kano sits -in hakama and <i>haori</i>,<a href="#A37">[37]</a> receiving each guest as -he enters according to his rank in the clan. To -some his bows are deeper and more prolonged, -with others they are more simple, although at -the entrance of every guest, his forehead -touches his hands, spread out upon the floor -before him. The visitors take their places -about the room in the order of their rank, each -saluting the host as he enters and thereafter -the guests. Waitresses in a kneeling posture -serve tea. At last a man of dignified bearing, -clothed in rich silk, enters, and after saluting, -sits down upon a cushion prepared for him -near the master of the house. Kano is about -to clap his hands, as a signal for his son to be -brought in, when a man-servant opens a sho ji, -and kneeling with his head almost touching<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> -the mats, crawls toward his master. He -whispers:</p> - -<p>“Mr. Sawa of Yedo desires to present his -respects.”</p> - -<p>Kano slightly raises his eyebrows, but by -a slight bending forward indicates that the -new-comer shall be admitted. After a few -moments the latest guest enters and prostrates -himself before his host, who returns the compliment. -Kano with a slight motion of the -arm indicates the place which he intends him to -occupy, and Sawa, crouching and bowing to the -guests proceeds in that direction. It is between -the seats of the councillors and those of the -chief samurai, and, as it happens, next to that -of Ito.</p> - -<p>Not a single glance showed that the visitor -was unwelcome. No expression of approval -had escaped their lips upon the entrance of a -popular member of the clan, and not a sign -showed that Sawa’s appearance at this time -was resented. They sat unmoved, like the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span> -North American Indian chiefs. Kano clapped -his hands, and the servant brought in a board, -resembling one of our checkerboards; it was -placed upon the mat near the father, facing the -point of the compass which had been declared -lucky by a fortune teller. The gentleman at -Kano’s side then clapped his hands, and another -servant brought in the package which -had been delivered before. It was unwrapped, -and contained a Kimono of fine silk, with beautifully -embroidered storks and tortoises, fir -trees and bamboos. This was as it should be. -Storks and tortoises promised long life to the -boy; for the Japanese believed that the stork -lives a thousand years, and the tortoise ten -thousand. The fir tree never changes its color, -therefore the child will possess an unchanging -virtuous heart, and the bamboo, as it shoots up -straight, will give him an upright mind.</p> - -<p>The servant holds up the dress for the inspection -of the guests, who, after looking at -it, express their approval by bowing low, and -a deep drawn sigh. Presently Mrs. Kano, who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> -has been watching the ceremony from a near -apartment through a convenient slit in the sho -ji, enters leading the boy. Both kneel at the -entrance and after touching the ground three -times with the forehead, the child is brought -to his father, who places him upon the checkerboard -facing the east, because that is the lucky -point. The mother dresses him in the Kimono -presented by the sponsor, and puts on the hakama; -then the child receives an imitation -sword and dirk, which are placed in his sash. -Then sake is brought in and the sponsor and -child exchange cups. This ends the ceremony -which admits the three-year-old boy among -the samurai of the clan.</p> - -<p>Mother and son, after repeating their salutations, -leave the room and refreshments are -served. Gradually the sense of ceremony disappears, -and conversation becomes more general. -Kano, apparently deeply engaged in -talking with the sponsor, keeps a watchful eye -over his guests, and frequently casts a glance -toward the spot occupied by Sawa. The sponsor,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> -an elderly gentleman of dignified bearing, -at last notices his host’s looks, and says:</p> - -<p>“Who is that gentleman? He is a stranger -to me, and I cannot distinguish his coat of -arms.”</p> - -<p>“He bears the Tokugawa crest, your lordship,” -replies Kano, “and is the new O Metsuke, -whom the Council at Yedo have kindly -sent to report upon our model clan.”</p> - -<p>The old gentleman did not notice the sarcasm. -“When did he arrive, and why was his -arrival not made known to me?” he inquired -in a slightly offended tone. Kano bowed, and -replied:</p> - -<p>“Mr. Sawa arrived yesterday afternoon, -and presented his letter at the castle, where -Councillor Hattori was ordered to receive him. -As we had not been notified by the Go rojiu of -their intention to send us a metsuk, Mr. Hattori -thought that the letter should be submitted -to the council of the clan. I have noticed that -he has spoken to the councillors, who will wait -here until the other guests have withdrawn.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> -If it please your lordship, we shall be glad to -have the benefit of your advice.”</p> - -<p>“No, I cannot spare the time, and the matter -is of no great importance,” declared his -lordship, continuing his repast. Presently they -were joined by Hattori, for whom a cushion -was brought, and who, after the prescribed -bows of respect, took no further notice of -Mori’s cousin.</p> - -<p>“I think, friend Kano,” he said, “that you -may as well keep an eye upon your honored -guest, Mr. Sawa. The fellow seems to think -that he is at Yedo, instead of in a gentleman’s -yashiki and that he can do as he pleases. He -has filled his sake cup quite often, and has been -offensive, to judge by the looks of Ito.”</p> - -<p>“I have perceived it,” replied Kano, “but -Ito will, I am sure, keep his temper, and settle -with the intruder upon a more favorable occasion. -I am more afraid of the young fellows -who seem to have heard some insulting remarks. -Pray, entertain his lordship, while I -dismiss the guests.” Without waiting for a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> -reply, Kano rose and, bowing before each -guest, advanced toward Sawa. There he knelt -down and performed the usual salutations -somewhat stiffly. Sawa returned them as well -as he could.</p> - -<p>When they had regained their upright positions, -Kano addressed his self-invited guest, -and said in a tone loud enough for some young -samurai close by to hear:</p> - -<p>“I am deeply grateful to the Go rojiu for -remembering me on this occasion. I do not -know how I deserved this honor.”</p> - -<p>Sawa had some difficulty to hide a grin. -Did this country bumpkin really fancy that the -great Council of the Tokugawa cared anything -about him or his family. Amused at the -thought, he bowed, and said:</p> - -<p>“The Go rojiu no doubt, if it had only -known of the event, would have been glad to -honor his host upon this occasion. It was -known,” he added more soberly and looking -sharply at Kano, “that the Choshiu clan was -directed almost entirely by the wisdom of his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span> -entertainer, and the question had been discussed -to secure his services for the Council. Unfortunately -the law of Iyeyasu forbade it. Only -members of the Tokugawa clan were permitted -to serve the Shogun. But this did not prevent -the Council from profiting by the wisdom of -Kano the Councillor, and it was to secure this -benefit that he, Sawa, had been directed to reside -in the clan.”</p> - -<p>Kano bowed, and replied. “It is a very -great honor, indeed, and, no doubt, well deserved -by such an able man as my guest. Pray, -make yourself at home in the clan. You will -find every Choshiu gentleman glad to receive a -samurai from the capital, where he has advantages -to learn manners which we in the country -do not possess. But every samurai is glad to -excel in chivalry, and we of Choshiu no less -than those of other clans.”</p> - -<p>Again they bowed, and Sawa resumed:</p> - -<p>“I understand that this joyful event will be -followed by a meeting of the Honorable Council?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span>“The regular meeting is to-morrow,” replied -Kano. “I have received no notice of any -extra meeting, nor have I sent out any. It -seems to me that you are misinformed.”</p> - -<p>“Forgive me, my host. Who is that young -man, who happened to be my neighbor during -the most interesting ceremony? I fancy that -I have seen him at Yedo.”</p> - -<p>“That is probably so. Indeed, it may have -been very recently, for he arrived yesterday. -Choshiu’s yashiki seems to have suffered -severely from the last earthquake, and expensive -repairs are necessary. Our officer in charge -thought it necessary to send a special messenger, -but why he did not commission an older -man, is beyond my comprehension.”</p> - -<p>Sawa began to perceive that this country -bumpkin was quite able to parry his thrusts; -he did not want to give offense, and besides -began to feel sleepy. He therefore informed -his host of his intention to return to his inn. -Kano raised no objection, and after the usual -leave taking, escorted his guest to the door, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> -saw him leave the gate. Calling a young -samurai, he bade him see that Sawa did not -return to the yashiki, whereupon he re-entered -the room. The other guests, seeing that the -councillors lingered, withdrew all except Ito, -who was asked to wait as he might be wanted.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">V<br /> -THE COUNCIL OF THE CLAN</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Before</span> he seated himself, Kano called -his chief samurai, and told him to have -the sho ji put in so as to make the -apartment of the usual size. He also ordered -him to have several men patrol the garden, and -to see that no one could approach the house, -while he himself was to move noiselessly -through the adjoining rooms, and answer for -it that there should be no listener. Knowing -that his orders would be obeyed, he sat down, -ordered tea and hibachi to be brought, and -without further ceremony opened the meeting.</p> - -<p>“Honorable Councillors,” he said, “two -messengers have come from Yedo. You have, -no doubt, noticed them, for both were here during -the ceremony in my humble house. The -first one is the new metsuke, Sawa, whom it has<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> -pleased the Go rojiu to appoint to our clan. -When Mr. Hattori informed me of his arrival, -I could not understand the cause of his appointment. -Our clan has had no trouble with -the Tokugawa for many years; and, although -there can be no friendship between the house of -Iyeyasu and that of Mori, there has been no -open hostility.</p> - -<p>“The arrival of the second messenger explains -the situation. The Go rojiu has entered -into a new treaty with the barbarians, and permitted -them to dwell at Yokohama, near Kanagawa -on the Tokaido. This fine piece of news -is discussed openly at Yedo, and there is no -doubt of its truth. The Regent, naturally I -think, feels somewhat anxious as to how the -great clans will receive it, and has probably sent -metsuke to other model clans besides Choshiu. -The news is so important that our friend Hattori -agreed with me to ask you to discuss it -here privately, so that we may decide upon the -policy of our clan. Honorable Mr. OKubo, -what is your opinion?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span>The person thus addressed was the oldest of -the councillors, a man grown gray in the service -of his clan. He was silent for some moments, -gravely sipping his tea. Then he said:</p> - -<p>“These questions are not for me to answer. -I am only acquainted with Old Japan, as it has -existed for hundreds of years, and I am afraid -the arrival of these barbarians is a menace to -our country. I don’t know them, and do not -wish to know them; but I do know that, before -the Tokugawa were thought of, the barbarians -came, and were received kindly by the children -of the gods. What was their gratitude? They -began to teach a cult which destroyed the relations -between parent and child, master and -servant, lord and retainer. They were finally -expelled, but it cost years of strife, and myriads -of lives before their teaching was rooted -out of the country. Since then order has been -restored, and we have had peace. Now the -barbarians will be admitted again, and fresh -troubles will commence. Younger and -stronger heads than mine will be needed to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> -save our clan and the house of Mori, although, -if it comes to war, I shall claim the honor of -dying fighting for our lord.”</p> - -<p>All bowed but protested that OKubo was -strong and able enough to lead the councils of -the clan; but he replied that his time of usefulness -was past, and Kano, out of respect for his -wish, addressed the councillor next in years. -That gentleman did not see any danger to the -clan. Yokohama was a long distance from -Nagato, and if there was to be trouble with the -barbarians, the Tokugawa would be the first -sufferers, for it was within the territory belonging -to the Shogun. As to the metsuke, why, -they must do as they had done before with -such fellows, surround him with spies of their -own.</p> - -<p>Thus every councillor spoke in turn, the -opinion of each being received with grave courtesy. -A little more interest was shown when -Hattori began to speak. It was known that he -was in Kano’s confidence, and it was a standing -joke that Kano’s advice was always adopted.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span>“Honorable Councillors,” said Hattori, -bowing deeply, “it ill becomes a man of my -age to dispute the opinions of the leaders who -for many years have guided the policy of our -clan with brilliant success. If I venture to -differ with them, it may be from lack of wisdom -and experience, but I shall be glad if I -am corrected. It is only by the kind teaching -of such men as the honorable councillors, that -men of my age can be prepared to follow in -their footsteps.</p> - -<p>“I am afraid that the coming of the barbarians -promises evil days, not only for the Tokugawa, -but for all the clans. You, gentlemen, -remember, how the arrival of the fireships and -the signing of the first treaty was followed by -incessant earthquakes,<a name="FNanchor_B_2" id="FNanchor_B_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_2" class="fnanchor">[B]</a> how the ocean rose in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> -its fury, and overwhelmed the barbarian ship, -supposed to be safely at anchor at Shimoda.<a name="FNanchor_C_3" id="FNanchor_C_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_C_3" class="fnanchor">[C]</a> -Surely, gentlemen, the gods of Japan themselves -fought for our country. But the -Go rojiu was blind. Was not the Shogun -Iyeyoshi himself killed for not defying the -barbarians by expelling them? ‘We are not -strong enough,’ says the Regent. There was a -time when the countless hosts of Kublai Khan, -the conqueror of the world, were hurled upon -our shores. What became of them? Tenshi -Sama prayed to his ancestors and they, the gods -of our country, destroyed the invader. We have -nothing to fear, except our own faint-heartedness. -Are we, the samurai of Japan, unworthy -of our ancestors? Have our muscles grown -weak that we can no longer wield the sword? -Out upon us, then, for cowards! If the Tokugawa -be a coward, out upon the Tokugawa. -Choshiu, Kaga, Satsuma, and Tosa, ought to -be able to dispose of the foreigners and at the -same time of the Tokugawa brood. Let us<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> -send confidential messengers to those clans, -and, after we have arranged with them, send -Mr. Sawa back to Yedo, securely packed in a -box labelled: This side up; handle with -care!”</p> - - - -<p>A smile of approbation passed through the -assembly; only Kano’s face showed no sign. It -was now his turn to speak, and, after toying -with his fan, as if collecting his thoughts, he -began:</p> - -<p>“Honorable Councillors, I agree with the -last speaker that the arrival of the foreigners -bodes evil for our country. I do not believe -that they will try to make war upon us, unless -indeed, we provoke it ourselves. At the present -time, at any rate, we are not in a condition -to provoke a quarrel. For the past two hundred -years the world has moved, and we have -stood still; that is why we are helpless. We -have found out something. These barbarians -possess ships which go wherever they want -them, without regard to tide and wind. We -must have such ships and learn how to handle<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span> -them. We, sons of Japan, are not naturally -brainless; we can learn what the barbarians -have learned, and by hard work, we may be -able to surpass them. There may be some -trouble with the Tokugawa, but I do not think -so, unless they send us another metsuke besides -Mr. Sawa. I have taken the measure of that -gentleman, and do not think that it would take -much gold to make him deaf and blind. But -we need not take him into our confidence. We -should send a trusty messenger to Nagasaki, -and at whatever cost buy some of the books of -the Hollanders. Surely, some merchants will -be found there who understand that language -and teach us. Besides, we must repair our -forts, and buy new cannon. Our samurai must -practice with their arms during every moment -of leisure. Then, gentlemen, when the time -comes, we shall be prepared, be it to avenge -Sekigahara and the Castle of Osaka, or to -drive the barbarian into the sea. My honored -ancestor gave the same advice to our illustrious -lord’s forefather. Oh! that it had been accepted.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> -Mori looks now upon Kii and Owari,<a href="#A38">[38]</a> -and grinds his teeth at the thought that their -people, once his property, are now arraigned -among his foes. Kano’s arm and muscle are -as ready for the fray, as those of the youngest -warrior, and he will not be the last to unsheath -his sword, nor the first to return it to its scabbard. -Self-restraint is often much more difficult -than exposure to danger.</p> - -<p>“The advice of Mr. Hattori supposes that the -councillors of Kaga, Satsuma, and Tosa are of -our opinion. But we have a feud with Satsuma, -who might seize such an opportunity to -bring all the power of the Tokugawa down -upon us. It is said, and I believe it from what -I have seen at Yedo, that the samurai of the -Shogun have lost their courage. But what of -Mito, Aidzu, Kii, Owari, and the host of other -daimiyo ready to march at the Go rojiu’s bidding. -Gentlemen, an excuse for the Tokugawa -to fall upon us <i>at this time</i>, would mean ruin -for our clan. We cannot even entertain the -thought. But we must watch for our opportunity,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> -and when it comes we must be prepared -to strike. At present, let it be understood that -Mr. Sawa must be perfectly safe in whatever -part of Choshiu’s domain, but let him be followed, -and let his every step be dogged. Every -word he utters, even in his sleep, and every -syllable he writes must be known to us. Mr. -Hattori, will you please, see to it that this is -done.”</p> - -<p>The council agreed with Kano, as it had -always done; and it was decided that a sum -of money should be placed at Kano’s disposal -to procure the necessary books and a teacher -at Nagasaki. These resolutions were drawn -up, and sent to the adviser of the daimiyo to -be sealed, after which they became a law.</p> - -<p>And the daimiyo? Oh! he was a <i>Great Name</i> -only. He never interfered with the affairs of -the clan, and did not know anything about -them. It was the same with the Shogun at -Yedo. His seal was used, and laws were made -of which he had never heard; and so it was -with Tenshi Sama at Kyoto. All these men,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> -Daimiyo, Shogun, and Tenshi Sama were considered -as gods, and nobody but their highest -servants were ever allowed to look upon them. -If any of them was compelled to travel, they -were placed in a norimono, with close blinds, -and men ran ahead crying: Shita ni iru!<a href="#A39">[39]</a> -Down on your knees. Very few people knew -the names of the councillors who did rule in -Japan, but the names of those who did not -rule, were generally known.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">VI<br /> -YOUNG KANO GROWS UP</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">While</span> the Choshiu clan as well as the -other clans of Japan, were anxiously -watching the opening of -Japan and the events which follow, Young -Kano or Kano Ekichi<a href="#A40">[40]</a> was taken gradually -out of his mother’s hands and given to a faithful -attendant of his father to be educated as a -true samurai should be. Japanese boys are not -baptized for there are few Japanese Christians, -and in those days there were none; they have, -therefore, no baptismal name. They have, -however, given names, which are placed behind -the family name instead of before it as -we do. They would say, for instance, instead -of Henry Jones, Jones Henry; they do the same -with the words Mister, Master, Mistress or -Miss, for all of which they have only one expression:<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> -San. If we should speak to master -Ekichi Kano, we should say Kano Ekichi San. -These given names can be changed without any -difficulty. Sometimes the parents change them, -at other times the owner of the name changes -it himself, and again the Emperor or Tenshi -Sama gives an officer a new name. But in that -case, it is sure that the owner will keep it so -long as he lives.</p> - -<p>I can’t say that Ekichi had a very pleasant -time of it, although, of course, his father and -mother loved him. Only they did not show it, -as our parents do. As a little baby he was -made to rest upon his knees, so that they might -grow flexible, for the Japanese do not sit upon -chairs, but squat upon their mats. When he -rose in the morning from his futon<a href="#A41">[41]</a> or comforter -which served him as a bed, there was -no running to his father or mother, shouting -good morning, and giving them a hug or a -hearty kiss. When he did meet them, the first -thing was to fall on his knees, spread his hands -flat before him, and bow until his head rested<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> -upon the back of his hands. His father and -mother gravely returned the salutation in the -same manner. When he took his meals, he was -not permitted to say a word. He ate what was -put before him, and it was every day the same. -Asa meshi, hiru meshi, and ban meshi, or in -English, morning rice, noon rice, and evening -rice, there was no difference between breakfast, -dinner, and supper. Until he was six years -old, Ekichi spent most of his time with his -attendant in the garden. They strolled around, -and he asked questions which the man answered -as well as he could. He was taught -how to speak to a superior, to an equal, and to -an inferior; how long he must remain prostrate -before a daimiyo, before a councillor, -and before a simple samurai. He was also -taken to the grave of his grandfather, and told -to kneel down and say his prayers. That was -something he could not understand, and which -his attendant could not explain; when he asked -him, and he did often, the man would say: -“It is so, but you should not ask why, because<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> -the gods only know.” So, when Ekichi was -tired and sat down on the sward, he would -often think: What is the use of praying at -the grave of a dead man. But he was careful -not to express his thoughts to anybody.</p> - -<p>He was trained not to show pain, distress, or -grief. Whatever happened to him, his face -must not betray it. Being constantly in the -open air, he grew up healthy and strong, and -when he was six years old, he was taken to a -school for samurai boys.</p> - -<p>Ekichi had been with his attendant beyond -the gates of his yashiki, but after the first day, -he was told to go and return by himself. He -met his schoolfellows with the courtesy which -he had been taught so carefully, and was treated -by them in the same way. There was no playground. -Indeed, I do not believe that any of -those boys knew what the word “play” means. -Many times, thirty years ago, I have seen -samurai boys from eight to sixteen years old, -during recess or after schooltime retire to their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> -rooms to smoke their tiny pipes and carry on -a quiet conversation; but I never saw them -play. The government of Japan has found out -that baseball, football, and cricket, are healthy -games, and is encouraging these boys to indulge -in them. But at that time, a samurai lad -would have felt hurt at the thought that he -could do such a thing as play.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_058f.jpg" alt="IT IS REALLY A DAY DEVOTED TO HACHIMAN" /></div> -<p class="caption">“IT IS REALLY A DAY DEVOTED TO HACHIMAN, THE GOD OF WAR.”</p> - -<p>All Japanese boys are very quiet; they are -brought up that way; but for the children of -the people certain holidays are set apart. The -fifth of May, or the fifth day of the fifth month -is the boys’ festival. It is really a day devoted -to Hachiman, the god of war, but it is also -called the Feast of Flags. A tall bamboo is -erected near every house where a boy was born; -for every son a fish, properly shaped and a -very good imitation made of air-tight sacks -is fastened, with its mouth wide open by -means of bamboo hoops. The air enters and, -besides inflating the body, causes it to squirm, -flap, and dart, about the bamboo. They have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> -other days, but the samurai boys do not observe -them. There is still a wide distance between -them and the children of the people.</p> - -<p>At the time when Ekichi Kano went to -school, the children squatted upon the mats, -and learned the Japanese syllabary,—for there -is no alphabet in Japan,—each vowel is connected -with a consonant, and thus forms a -syllable. The vowels are the same as with us:</p> - -<p class="center"> -a, i, u, e, o,<br /> -pron. ah, ee, oo, ay, oh,<br /> -and combined with the consonants<br /> -ka, ki, ku, ke, ko,<br /> -na, ni, nu, ne, no, etc.</p> - -<p>Ekichi, like almost all Japanese boys of his -class, learned very quickly, nor did the very -difficult Chinese characters frighten him. Long -before a Chinese boy could have mastered one-half -of them, Ekichi could read and understand -a book without much difficulty.</p> - -<p>He was now growing used to the restraint -which was imposed upon him. He began to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> -understand that the word <i>pleasure</i> can have -no meaning for a Japanese boy, and then he -was made to learn that a boy is better without -comforts than with them, except when he -is sick. He was taught that there can be and -must be but one motive for every action, and -that motive must be: duty. Ekichi was but a -child, and small for his age; but no boy twice -as old in America or Europe, could have shown -an equal degree of self-control, and contempt -of pain and death with this child.</p> - -<p>Japan’s laws were cruel, at this time, and -most offenses were punished with death. The -criminal was made to kneel down, a flash of -the sharp sword, a blow, and the head lay severed -from the body. Young as he was, Ekichi -was often taken to these executions, to accustom -him to the sight of blood. His face was -closely watched to see if he showed any emotion, -and when he came home from these disagreeable -sights, he found his rice of the color -of blood, for it had been colored on purpose<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> -with the juice of salted plums. He was expected -to eat heartily of this dish, and, like -other samurai boys, did so without the nauseous -feelings which our boys would experience -under the circumstances. Sometimes, at midnight, -he was roused from a sound slumber, -and ordered to go to the execution ground, and -bring a head. There was no refusal possible. -Whatever he might think privately of such an -errand, there was but one answer possible, a -responsive hai! “yes,” and immediate obedience. -Thus Ekichi, as all other Japanese boys -of his class, was indifferent to heat or cold, and -forgot that there was such a thing as “fear.” -He was not quite twelve, when he was given -two real swords, sharp, keen blades, made for -use and not for show. He was taught that -“the sword is the soul of the samurai,” or, in -the words of the law as it then prevailed in -Japan<a href="#A42">[42]</a>: “The girded sword is the living -soul of the samurai. In the case of a samurai -forgetting his sword, act as is appointed: it -may not be forgiven.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span>The child never considered his swords as -toys; to him they were objects of reverence; -that little dirk, eight inches long, might at some -time be used to end his own life. He learned -how he should behave and act, if ever such a -moment should come. There is an instance in -Japanese history, when a samurai boy only -seven years old, committed suicide that he -might save his father. Such stories were told -him constantly, and roused his enthusiasm. -At no time, after he was twelve years old, -would Ekichi have hesitated to take his own -life, if he had thought it his duty.</p> - -<p>At this age he divided his time between -shooting with bow and arrow, riding, fencing -and wrestling, and the study of Chinese. He -learned to swim and to handle a boat, and as -he grew stronger, all dainties and comforts -were taken away. If, in winter, his hands became -numb, he was told to rub them in snow -or water to make them warm; but he was not -allowed the use of a fire. The duty of implicit -obedience had been planted in him. No<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span> -Japanese boy would think of asking why? -when ordered to do something. Last of all he -became master of that exceeding courtesy, peculiar -to Japanese gentlemen, and which we -foreigners cannot appreciate.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">VII<br /> -KANO’S JOURNEY TO YEDO</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> 1st of July, 1859, had come and -gone, and the barbarians had been admitted -into the Country of the Gods. -They were only a handful; so few that Choshiu’s -samurai could have pushed them into the -bay by sheer force of numbers. While the -Japanese people continued to toil, and cared -nothing if there were any barbarians in the -country or not, the samurai were getting more -and more angry. Still, there was much curiosity -mixed with this anger. The barbarians -were so few in number; how could the Tokugawa, -able to call an army of 80,000 men -under arms, be afraid of them.</p> - -<p>That puzzled Choshiu’s councillors. They -had not succeeded in their attempts to obtain -books and a teacher at Nagasaki, and it had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> -been decided that another effort should be -made at Yokohama. This time the enterprise -was thought so important, that it was determined -to send one of the councillors, and the -choice fell upon Kano. He accepted the commission.</p> - -<p>When the councillors separated, Kano requested -his friend Hattori to call that evening, -as he wished to consult him. Hattori agreed -to do so, and punctually to the time appeared -at the Kano yashiki.</p> - -<p>When the two friends were seated, Kano -said, “I have been thinking how I shall go. -At first I thought of asking a Go rojiu passport -through our <i>honest</i> friend Sawa, who will do -anything we ask of him, as soon as he sees our -gold. But I am afraid it will not do. The -Go rojiu must, by this time, have grown suspicious -at the excellent reports furnished by -their metsuke, and I should certainly be -shadowed as soon as they heard that one -of Choshiu’s councillors was visiting the -Kwant.<a href="#A43">[43]</a> With spies constantly at my heels,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> -I could not do anything; therefore, nobody except -you, must know of my absence. I must, -of course, trust my household, but I know that -I can do that, I have decided to fall suddenly -ill and call for a physician who will tell me -that it is a slow fever. So I shall not want him -again, since he cannot cure me anyhow. You -must call two or three times a week, and spread -the report that I am neither better nor worse. -If our fellow-councillors ask for me, tell them -that I intend to start at an early day.”</p> - -<p>“But how will you pass the barriers on the -Tokaido and the Nakasendo<a href="#A44">[44]</a>?”</p> - -<p>“I shall probably go by sea from Hyogo. I -know that this journey is one of danger, but I -must not risk the clan. I have, therefore, written -to My Lord that I am no longer one of his -samurai, but a <i>rnin</i>.<a href="#A45">[45]</a> You must keep this -paper and deliver it to the Council only in case -I am arrested.”</p> - -<p>Hattori bowed in assent, took the paper and -hid it within the folds of his kimono. He then -asked: “Are you going alone?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span>“No. I must take a trusty young fellow -with me, if something should happen to me. -First I thought of Ito, but he is in Tokyo, and -may be watched. I have sent for his friend -Inouye, who, I am sure, has his wits about -him.”</p> - -<p>“I hardly think that a man like Inouye, who -is more given to studying than to tramping -about, will like such an adventure,” said Hattori, -smiling. “But if he consents, you could -have no better man.”</p> - -<p>“That is what I thought. He has, moreover, -this advantage, that he can not be known -to any Tokugawa officer, since he has never -been at Yedo.”</p> - -<p>“When will you leave?”</p> - -<p>“The sooner the better, to-night, if I can induce -my intended companion to leave his books -so soon. Ah! here he is!”</p> - -<p>A servant had announced the visitor by opening -a sho ji, and permitting him to enter. The -customary salutations passed, and Inouye was -requested to join the two friends. Kano scanned<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> -him closely, and, evidently pleased with the result, -said:</p> - -<p>“Mr. Inouye, you can serve the clan; are you -willing to do so, even though it involves considerable -danger?”</p> - -<p>“With all my heart,” replied Inouye simply.</p> - -<p>“Thank you, in name of the clan. How -long will it take you to get ready for a long -journey?”</p> - -<p>“I can go now.”</p> - -<p>Both Kano and Hattori smiled with pleasure -at the young man’s brief replies, and the former -explained his scheme in all its bearings. When -he had finished Inouye said:</p> - -<p>“I thank you, Mr. Councillor, very much for -having thought me worthy of this honor, and I -shall try not to disappoint you. If you permit -me, I shall now write a similar letter to My -Lord Mori, and perhaps Mr. Hattori will do me -the favor to keep it with that of your honor.”</p> - -<p>Hattori bowed, and Kano, begging to be excused, -withdrew while Inouye was writing his -letter. Kano went directly to the room where<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span> -his wife was. He entered, and, without forgetting -to pay her due respects, he said:</p> - -<p>“I am leaving on a long journey, but I want -people to think that I am ill. I shall, therefore, -lie down, and do you send for a physician. Before -he comes, send for Mr. Fujii,<a href="#A46">[46]</a> I shall tell -him what to do in my absence.”</p> - -<p>Kano’s instructions were followed. The -physician went home very proud at having discovered -at once the councillor’s sickness. He -was sorry that he had been dismissed, but felt -that Kano was right. All his medicines could -not cure such a fever. And when he thought -of the fee in his pocket, his heart almost leaped -for joy. It was more than he had received in -six months.</p> - -<p>The following morning, long before sunrise -and while everybody in the Yashiki was fast -asleep, Mr. Fujii cautiously opened the little -gate, and two samurai, with their faces half -hidden in a cloth wrapped around their heads, -stepped briskly out. They wore straw sandals, -so that their footsteps were inaudible. Fujii<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span> -bowed deeply, and received a parting bow in return, -but not a word was spoken. After passing -across the moat, they came to the great -highway and turned eastward. When the sun -rose they had covered ten miles, and decided to -stop for breakfast at the first yadoya<a href="#A47">[47]</a> they -should see.</p> - -<p>After six days’ traveling without meeting -any adventure, although they had met several -ruffian-looking rnin, they approached Hyogo. -They had carefully discussed their plans and -decided to take passage in some trading junk, -bound for Yedo or Kanagawa. If they could -not do so, they would hire a boat. Kano had -been many times along this road, in charge of -Mori’s procession, and knew Hyogo well. But -as he knew that passports were demanded from -every traveler stopping at an inn, they decided -to pass the night at a village yadoya, and proceed -to Hyogo on the following morning.</p> - -<p>They found what they wanted two miles west -of Hyogo. After securing their rooms, they -had their bath, and ordered dinner. Presently<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> -they heard the shrill voice of the landlady scolding -somebody roundly.</p> - -<p>“You little lout” (hyakusho<a href="#A48">[48]</a>), she -shouted, “I sent you for fresh fish, and you -come back to tell me that there was none. No -fresh fish in Hyogo! Just think of it! And -here are two honorable gentlemen, who have -ordered their supper! You shall go right back, -you blockhead, and bring me fish, fresh fish, do -you hear?”</p> - -<p>Kano was amused, but Inouye whispered to -him, “Suppose we ask that little hyakusho to -find out if there is any ship sailing for Yedo. -Those little fellows who look so stupid, are -often keen enough, if they know that there is -some cash for them. Shall I see him?”</p> - -<p>Kano nodded assent, and Inouye descended -to the ground floor. The boy, a strong built -lad of fifteen or sixteen, was receiving the last -instructions, and Inouye strolled slowly on the -road toward Hyogo. He had not gone a hundred -yards, when he heard steps behind him, -and turning round saw the boy coming at a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> -great pace. As the boy was about to pass him, -Inouye said:</p> - -<p>“Wait a moment.”</p> - -<p>The boy stopped and bowed. Inouye continued:</p> - -<p>“You are going to Hyogo, are you not?”</p> - -<p>The boy bowed again and muttered:—“I -am, your honor.”</p> - -<p>“Very well. My brother and myself are -stopping at yonder hotel. We have had a long -march and are tired, but we must go to Yedo as -soon as we can. Can you find out if any ships -are leaving, and if they take any passengers? -You are a sharp boy, and can find out if you try. -If you do your errand well, slip up-stairs so that -the landlady does not see it, and I shall pay you -well.”</p> - -<p>The boy looked up when he heard himself -called a sharp boy, and Inouye felt that he had -struck the right chord. He returned to the -yadoya, where he found Kano fast asleep. He, -too, stretched himself out upon the soft mats, -and closed his eyes.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span>They awoke at the shuffling of feet, and the -noise of dishes being brought in. Both enjoyed -their supper. It was dark and the rain -doors had been closed; but they opened them -to enjoy the soft sea breeze. Neither of them -spoke, when a whisper came from under the -balcony: “Sir, sir, I have brought him.”</p> - -<p>Inouye recognized the boy’s voice. Quietly -measuring the height, he took one of the comforters -serving as bed, and fastening one end -to the railing swung himself over, holding the -other end in his hand. A man was standing -near the boy, and Inouye asked who he was. -The boy told him that he was a sendo. He -had found a ship that would leave for Tokyo at -dawn, and told her master that two gentlemen -at his inn wished to take passage. This sailor -had been ordered to show them the way, and to -carry their baggage.</p> - -<p>Kano and Inouye were highly pleased. They -left enough money to pay their bill handsomely, -and, after Kano had joined his friend, rewarded -the boy. Preceded by the sendo, they made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> -their way to Hyogo and reached the junk in -safety. They secured sleeping accommodations, -and when they awoke the following morning, -and went on deck, they saw that they had left -Hyogo far behind.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">VIII<br /> -YOKOHAMA IN 1859</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> junk had a fair voyage. The passengers -who had not been on the ocean -before, had suffered from seasickness, -but, since the junk generally followed the coast, -and often passed through smooth water, they -had quickly recovered. The voyage up Yedo -Bay had been very pleasant. But they met the -tide when they were off Kanagawa, and as there -was but little wind, the master had anchored.</p> - -<p>If they had known it, they would have looked -behind them with some interest, for there was -the spot where Commodore Perry had anchored, -and with his fire ships, had battered down the -door of Japan’s isolation. That was five years -ago. These five years had brought serious -trouble upon their country, and there promised -to be graver disturbances; for, as there was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> -restlessness in their clan, so there was restlessness -everywhere.</p> - -<p>As Kano stood thinking thus, he heard -Inouye ask the master of the junk how long it -would be before they reached Yedo. The answer -was that they must wait six hours before -the tide turned, and that then it would take -many hours unless the breeze freshened. -“But,” he continued, “if your honor is in a -hurry, I can call a sampan (row boat) and you -may be set ashore at Kanagawa. Then you -can follow the Tokaido, and reach Yedo to-night.”</p> - -<p>Kano turned toward the master, and said -briefly: “Do so!” A little while after a sampan -passed within hailing distance, and soon the -two rnin were speeding toward the shore.</p> - -<p>Kano and his friend made their way to a -quiet yadoya at Noge hill, where they could be -sure not to be disturbed by the trains of daimiyo -passing to and from the capital, and would -be free from impertinent questions. After they -had secured accommodations and refreshed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span> -themselves with a bath, they took their dinner. -Neither spoke of the subject uppermost in his -mind, their future plan of action. They were -now in the Tokugawa country, and every man -might be a spy. Besides, there was no privacy -in a house where the walls consisted of sho ji, -and even a whisper could be plainly heard in the -next room. Therefore, when they had finished -their dinner, Kano proposed a stroll. They -set forth, and walked in the direction of Yedo. -They were sure to be unobserved, since the -Tokaido was crowded with travelers of all -classes, and samurai were not likely to be questioned -after they had passed the barrier.</p> - -<p>When they had reached a part of the road -where they could talk without danger of being -overheard, Kano said:</p> - -<p>“We have arrived at the first stage of our -journey. Have you thought of any plan to -attain our end?”</p> - -<p>“I have been thinking, of course,” replied -Inouye, “but I have no doubt that you have conceived -an excellent scheme.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span>“No, I have not. Every plan I thought of, -when I came to work it out, offered some very -serious obstacle. I feel as if I am running my -head against a stone wall. We may go into -Yokohama, and if we are asked who we are, we -may answer that we are rnin. But if they ask -what we are doing, and we reply that we are -curious to see the barbarians, they will say: -Very well, you have seen them now, so you had -better go about your business. From that time -we shall be beset with spies, or we must leave. -This is a difficulty which I had not foreseen.”</p> - -<p>“Your idea is to study the barbarians, is it -not?” said Inouye thoughtfully.</p> - -<p>“Yes. Our clan must not act blindly. We -must know what is the purpose of those men -in coming here; but that is not all. We -must also know their strength and their weakness.”</p> - -<p>“There is but one way in which that may be -done,” muttered Inouye, as if speaking to himself.</p> - -<p>“Then that way must be chosen,” said Kano.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span> -“What is it? You do not hesitate on account -of the danger, I hope?”</p> - -<p>“No; but I do hesitate on account of the humiliation. -Look here, Mr. Kano, I will give you -my views frankly. If I were alone, that is, if -I had been commissioned by you, I would have -left my swords behind, and offered my services -to these barbarians in any capacity. I would -have entered into such employment as promised -the best opportunity to watch them when they -were among themselves and off their guard.”</p> - -<p>“But how would you understand their -speech. You do not suppose that they converse -in our language, do you?”</p> - -<p>“No,” replied Inouye, smiling, “but our -Japanese interpreters at Nagasaki tell me that -it does not take long to learn that tongue, and I -do not suppose that there is much difference in -the languages spoken by these barbarians.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Kano, “I admire your scheme -and like it. But such a step requires consideration. -Let us return to our yadoya and think<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> -it over. To-morrow morning we can decide -upon our future action.”</p> - -<p>When they arrived in their room, the two -friends sat down before the hibachi, smoking -and sipping their tea. After some time Kano -stretched himself on the mats, and was soon -sound asleep. Inouye noiselessly opened a sho -ji and slipped through, closing it in the same -manner. He then went down to the lower -floor, and entered the front part of the house -which serves as office, kitchen, and as refreshment -hall for transient wayfarers of the poorer -class.</p> - -<p>Here he found the landlord, squatting behind -his tiny desk. As Inouye approached, the landlord -bowed low, since, although the guest was -now dressed in kimono only, and had left his -swords up-stairs, he remembered having seen -him enter as a samurai. Inouye sat down -within easy reach of the landlord, and asked: -“How far is it from here to Yokohama?”</p> - -<p>“That depends, your honor, upon the way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> -you may choose. Across the new causeway it -is about two miles, but it is further by sampan.”</p> - -<p>“Are there any guards?”</p> - -<p>“There were, your honor, but the barbarians -made so much fuss about them, that they were -withdrawn.”</p> - -<p>“Then anybody may go in there without any -impertinent questions being asked?”</p> - -<p>“Oh yes, your honor. The barbarians do not -seem to care as to who comes.”</p> - -<p>“Have you been there?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I have been there twice. When the -first barbarians landed I thought that I would -go and see how they looked. I was disgusted! -Not one of them possessed any manners. They -shouted at the top of their voices, pushed and -crowded each other, and acted as if they were -possessed of demons. It was horrible.”</p> - -<p>“Then why did you go again?”</p> - -<p>“My little son was very sick, and some traveler -told me that these barbarians possessed -powerful charms. Every physician said that -the boy must die, and I thought that I would<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> -try to obtain a charm that would save the child’s -life. So I went to the gate at the causeway and -asked where I could purchase those charms. He -told me that he did not know, but when he knew -what I wanted them for, he advised me to go to -an American physician who lives in Kanagawa -near the causeway. I did so, and found him at -home. He was a tall, powerful man, but very -kind. There was a Japanese in his house who -could understand me, and when the physician -knew what was wanted, he and the Japanese -gentleman went with me. When we came home, -he asked some questions, examined the child -tenderly, and gave it some medicine. He and -his friend remained three hours, and only when -the child was sleeping peacefully, did he leave. -The next day he came again, and the next, and -the next, and now the child is as well as ever. -And he would not accept any money. All barbarians -are not bad men, that is sure, but most -of them are very rude.”</p> - -<p>“Do you know how they live in their -homes?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span>“No. I have heard some young good-for-nothings -of this place who had served them as -kodz’kai<a href="#A49">[49]</a> (attendant, servant) speak about them, -but you can not believe what they say. Decent -men will not enter their service. Only a few -days ago the good physician asked me to get -him an honest man, but, although I have tried -hard and the wages are high, nobody cares to -take the risk.”</p> - -<p>“Is there any chance to secure work from -them in Yokohama?”</p> - -<p>“Oh! there is plenty of work, and the pay is -good. But our people do not like it much. -They have to work too hard. They are not allowed -to rest a minute, and when one of them -should smoke a pipe for a moment, and he is -seen, he receives his pay up to that time, and is -sent about his business. If they treat our people -in that manner, it will not be long before -they will have to do the work themselves.”</p> - -<p>Inouye agreed with the landlord, and, while -that worthy was giving change to a servant -girl, he slipped up-stairs. He found Kano still<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> -asleep, and sat down before his hibachi thinking -deeply. There was absolute silence in the -room, save when he knocked the ashes out of -his pipe.</p> - -<p>It was quite dark when Kano awoke. -“What, is it so late!” he said as he looked out -on the balcony, and saw the lights of the ships -in Yokohama harbor. “I thought I would -sleep for an hour or so, and here I have taken a -whole afternoon!”</p> - -<p>“I am glad of it,” replied Inouye. “After -supper we must stroll to the beach, for I have -much to tell you. I do not think that there will -be so very much difficulty in carrying out our -plans. But it is best not to speak of them -here.”</p> - -<p>Kano nodded, and clapped his hands as a -signal to serve up supper. They spoke about -the food, and joked with the servants. After -having satisfied their appetites, they strolled to -the beach.</p> - -<p>It was a calm, bright night; the only noises -disturbing the almost oppressive silence, came<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span> -from the ships in harbor, or from the shrill -whistle of the blind shampooer, as he offered -his services in the way peculiar to that trade. -Kano led the way until they came to a little -hillock where they could notice the approach of -strangers. He sat down, and courteously motioned -Inouye to take a seat by his side. Inouye -did so, and at Kano’s request related his conversation -with their landlord.</p> - -<p>He then suggested that Kano should apply -for the position of house servant of the barbarian -physician, while he, Inouye, would try -to secure work at Yokohama. But Kano would -not hear of this. “No!” he said. “This -physician seems to be a good man; you must go -there, and I shall mingle with those rude people -at Yokohama. But on ichi-roku nichi<a href="#A50">[50]</a> we -must meet here at eight o’clock, and communicate -each other’s experiences. But what shall -we do with our swords? They would betray -us at once?”</p> - -<p>“That, certainly, is a difficulty, but not a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> -serious one. Let us think it over, we are sure -to find some way out of it.”</p> - -<p>The two samurai then returned to their inn -and retired.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">IX<br /> -NEW EXPERIENCE</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap2"><span class="smcap">After</span> eating their breakfast at an early -hour on the following morning, -Inouye went down stairs in search of -the landlord. He found him sitting at his desk, -as if he had not left it since their last conversation. -He called for the bill, and gave such a -generous tip that the landlord was highly -pleased, and showed it by his repeated and -humble bows. Inouye made a suitable reply, -and then said:</p> - -<p>“Landlord, I have spoken with my elder -brother about what you told me yesterday. -The Go rojiu is anxious that some of our young -men should learn the barbarian language, and -we came here to look for the best ways and -means, for it was decided in our family that I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> -should try. It seems to me that the easiest way -would be to live with them, and after what you -have told me about the physician, I think I -would like to serve him, and my brother agrees -with me. Now, it does not matter who we are, -but I am no good-for-nothing, and shall do my -duty. For the present my name is Tomori, and -I ask you if you will direct me to this physician?”</p> - -<p>“I shall do better than that,” replied the landlord. -He clapped his hands, and when a servant -appeared, he told him to bring OKichi<a href="#A51">[51]</a> -San. Soon after the Honorable Master Kichi -appeared. “Honorable Master Kichi,” said -his father to the eight year old urchin, “take -this gentleman to the house of the American -physician.” Kichi bowed, and leading the way, -brought Inouye to a private house, off the -Tokaido and near the causeway leading to -Yokohama. There was a small but well kept -garden in front. It was a house which had -evidently been built for a well-to-do samurai, -but Inouye noticed that the sho ji, instead of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> -being of paper, were of a transparent substance, -probably glass.</p> - -<p>Kichi pulled the rope of a gong, the sound of -which brought a pleasant looking Japanese gentleman -to the door.</p> - -<p>Inouye bowed, and his salute was returned in -the same ceremonious manner. He then asked -if he could see the barbarian physician. “I am -sorry,” said the other, “but he is out. He will -be back very soon, I think; be pleased to enter.” -He showed Inouye the way to a back room, -with tatami<a href="#A52">[52]</a> on the floor, and, after repeating -the salutations, said:</p> - -<p>“I hope that it is not on account of illness -that you wish to see the physician?”</p> - -<p>“No,” replied Inouye. “I shall tell you -frankly what brings me here, for I hope to secure -your valuable assistance. I have always -had a love for books and knowledge, and am -very anxious to study foreign languages. I -consulted my elder brother, and we came to -Kanagawa together. At the inn we heard how -kindly this physician had treated our host, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span> -also that he is in need of a servant. My -brother and I thought that if my services were -acceptable, I should offer them such as they -are.”</p> - -<p>“You are not a Tokugawa man, I fancy.”</p> - -<p>“Why should I not be?”</p> - -<p>“Because your speech savors from the -south,” was the answer. “I did not ask you -that question from motives of curiosity, but because -most of the men who enter into the service -of foreigners, are such as are bound to find their -way to jail. Every foreigner prefers any servant -to one from this neighborhood. What name -do you wish to go by? I hear the physician’s -footstep, and will speak to him at once.”</p> - -<p>He left the room, but returned quickly, preceded -by a bearded man in the full vigor of life. -Inouye prostrated himself before the stranger, -who said in Japanese which sounded quaint -although quite intelligible:</p> - -<p>“Mr. Tanaka tells me that you wish to enter -my service, and I am willing to try you. You -are expected to be here from seven in the morning<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span> -until nine in the evening, and will receive a -salary of five riyo.<a href="#A53">[53]</a> You shall have a room, -which Mr. Tanaka will show you, and you can -share the meals with the other servants. If -you need anything, ask Mr. Tanaka; or if you -want to speak to me, come to my room. I shall -expect you to-morrow morning; you can now -go and bring here what you may have as baggage.”</p> - -<p>Inouye prostrated himself again. Tanaka -then showed him his room, which was in one -of the outhouses, but far more pleasant than -his own quarters in Choshiu. Everything was -clean. He was then taken to the room where -the servants took their meals, and to the bathroom -reserved for them. At last Tanaka told -him that he could take possession at any time -during that day, so as to feel more at home -when his duties should commence.</p> - -<p>When he had left the physician’s house, -Inouye hastened back to the inn. He was dazed -and did not know what to think. He would -tell his new experience to Kano and consult<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> -with him. He entered the yadoya, and, answering -the smiling landlord’s humble welcome -with a slight bow, he hurried up-stairs. Kano -was evidently expecting him, but showed not -the least sign of curiosity. Both saluted as became -samurai, and upon Kano’s invitation, -Inouye sat down and lit his pipe, waiting for -Kano to speak first.</p> - -<p>“Have you succeeded?”</p> - -<p>“I have.”</p> - -<p>“When will you enter?”</p> - -<p>“I have agreed to begin to-morrow morning, -but I can occupy my room to-day, and bring in -my baggage.”</p> - -<p>“Then you had better make some purchases. -Here are a hundred riyo. Nay, do not hesitate,” -for Inouye was surprised at such a large sum -being offered to him, “for your work is of great -value to the clan, and you may need it; something -may occur, or you may be suspected, and -Choshiu can not afford to lose so worthy a -samurai as my young friend Inouye has proved -to be.” Inouye bowed low, to hide his confusion.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> -It was so rare that a samurai of Kano’s -rank bestowed praise that Inouye was deeply -moved. Kano pretended not to notice the emotion, -and continued: “While you are making -your purchases after dinner, I shall go to Yokohama -and see what success I may achieve. But -what shall we do with our swords?”</p> - -<p>“I could take them with me to the physician’s -house.”</p> - -<p>“Very well. You will wait here for me until -I return?”</p> - -<p>Inouye bowed assent. Dinner was ordered -and brought up; after it was eaten, the two left -the house, barefooted and in simple cotton kimono. -They went together as far as the Tokaido, -where Inouye pointed out the physician’s -residence. Kano noticed it closely. They then -parted, Inouye turning to the left to visit the -stores, while Kano descended to the causeway, -and followed it toward Yokohama.</p> - -<p>It was six o’clock before he returned. Inouye -had noticed that Kano had avoided asking for -particulars. He, as younger in years, and less<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> -high in rank, would have committed a severe -breach of good breeding amounting to a crime, -if he had asked a question except in explanation. -The same ceremonious salutations took place, -and supper was ordered. After it was over, -Kano said:</p> - -<p>“We are now about to part. I am to begin -to work to-morrow as a ninzoku.<a href="#A54">[54]</a> I have -been engaged by a fellow, a Japanese, who will -have a taste of the lash before I am entirely -through with him.” The false smile and suppressed -emotion with which this was hissed out -between his lips, proved how pitilessly in earnest -he was. “But we shall reserve our observations -for a month from now. We meet -every fifth day, as we agreed yesterday. Here -are my swords,” saluting reverently as he -handed them to his companion, who received -them with marks of even greater reverence.</p> - -<p>Inouye concealed the swords, with his own, -among his clothes. He then took the bundle -to the door. Here he turned round, and prostrating -himself, bent his head three times upon<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> -his outstretched hands. Then, rising, he bowed -once more, drawing in his breath. Kano replied -in the same manner. Not another word -was said, and Inouye carried his bundle to the -scene of a new life.</p> - -<p>Kano remained alone, deeply buried in -thought. Not the slightest token of emotion -was visible, yet the man was terribly wroth. -His long-practised self control enabled him to -conceal the passion he felt by that stolid look of -contemplation which completely veils the -thoughts. He sat motionless, regardless of the -time, mechanically answering the servant who -arranged the comforters for his couch. The -streets were silent, the yadoya had closed up for -the night, and still Kano was sitting there motionless -as a statue. Midnight was past, when -he felt for his tobacco pouch. Stirring up the -few sparks in the hibachi with the chopstick-like -brass tongs, he took a few whiffs at his pipe, -and then, confident that he had schooled himself -for the coming ordeal, he lay down upon his -couch.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">X<br /> -FRIENDSHIP OR HATRED?</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Six</span> weeks had passed. It was in the evening -after supper, when three samurai -were sitting in the room overlooking the -garden of Choshiu’s yashiki in Yedo. Guards -were stationed within easy distance, so as to -encircle the principal building, one room of -which was occupied by Kano, in virtue of his -influence within the clan. It was known that -the Go rojiu had scattered more spies about the -yashiki of the great southern clans. Kano, who, -had arrived only that morning, had immediately -ordered the captain of the guard, to produce a -list of every person living within the yashiki or -its grounds. Together they had scanned every -name, and those who were not personally known -to the Councillor or the Captain, were served -with a notice to depart, and had been escorted to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span> -the gate. Kano had also given orders that a -report should be prepared at once, explaining -who was responsible for their presence. Until -this had been sifted to the bottom, a number of -young samurai of known loyalty had been selected -to guard the palace, in turn, and they had -received orders to cut down any one found -prowling in the grounds. A search was made -under the palace, and it was only when satisfied -that floor nor ceiling had been tampered with, -that Kano felt he could speak without fear of -being reported.</p> - -<p>After he was satisfied of his privacy, he had -sent word to the guard at the gate that, when -Mr. Inouye should arrive, he was to proceed -immediately to the palace. The answer was -that Inouye was in the yashiki, and in the apartments -of Mr. Ito. Kano had then sent a request -to the two friends to visit him in his room. -They had returned with the messenger, and had -taken supper together. The servants had -brought tea and tobacco, and had been dismissed.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span>“Gentlemen,” said Kano, “we shall now proceed -to business. Mr. Ito, your friend has -probably informed you of what has brought -him to Yedo?”</p> - -<p>“Beyond mentioning incidentally that his -visit was connected with business of the clan, -he has not done so, your honor.”</p> - -<p>“That is entirely like <i>my friend</i> Inouye. It -was like a true samurai, although, in this case, -so much caution was superfluous. I am, however, -pleased, because I shall have the satisfaction -of enlarging upon the merits of our friend.”</p> - -<p>Inouye bowed to the ground, and protested -that he had only acted as every samurai of -Choshiu would have done. Kano then proceeded -to unfold the events leading to their mission, -and their adventures, until the time when -they entered upon their novel experiences, while -Ito, although deeply interested and astonished, -preserved the same placid countenance. Kano -continued:—</p> - -<p>“We met, as agreed upon, every fifth day. -It was, I confess, a relief to me to see a face I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span> -could trust, but I would not permit our friend -to tell me his experience. It was because I -desired facts, and not mere impressions. The -investigation regarded the welfare of the clan, -hence, of course, no sacrifice could be too great. -Above all, the council desired impartial accounts; -justice, full justice, must be done to the -barbarians and to the Tokugawa, and that the -judgment might be unbiassed, time nor expense -should be taken into account. I am, even -now, sorry that an accident drew the attention -of the Tokugawa spies upon me, and compelled -me to leave suddenly. It was not difficult to -baffle those dogs, and I am quite sure that they -lost all traces of me. They are probably burying -my body now. It was owing to my supposed -death that I could warn our friend here, -who will now, I am sure, entertain us with his -experience.”</p> - -<p>Inouye bowed and said: “If I had been permitted -to give your honor my impressions, -when I was first engaged by that <i>good</i> man, the -American physician, they would not vary materially<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> -from what I can now state as my knowledge. -From first to last, he and his family -treated me with the greatest kindness. I was -known to him as Tomori, the kodz’kai; yet -when he <i>requested</i> me to do something, it was -always with a ‘please!’ and he invariably -thanked me. He observed that I was anxious -to acquire his language, perhaps Mr. Tanaka, -his interpreter, had told him so. The first day, -when the work was done, he sent for me, and, -taking a book from his shelves, began to teach -me. Thanks to his patience, I can now fairly -read and speak his language.</p> - -<p>“The work was light; to be sure, it was not -the work of a samurai, but I was not made to -feel that I was a menial. At first I was shocked -when I saw that his wife was really the master -in the house, and that he paid her marked deference -whenever they met. They ate together -and walked out together. But I found out very -quickly that, while she directed the affairs of the -household, and looked after the children, she did -not interfere with his work, except to help him.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> -She looked after all of us, to see that we were -made comfortable, and often, when my morning’s -work was finished, she would say: ‘Tomori -San, bring your books; perhaps I may be -able to help you.’ Truly, she is a good woman, -as her husband is a good man.</p> - -<p>“Everybody in the house was required to -come in the dining-room, in the morning before -breakfast, and in the evening after supper. -When Tanaka came for me the first morning, -and I asked him what this meant, he only -smiled, and told me to ask again, in about two -weeks. I thought it was part of my duty, and, -of course, I went. I watched Tanaka, and did -as he did. We sat down, and the physician -read to us in his own language; what it was, I -could not understand. Then they all fell on -their knees, while he spoke aloud; at last, he -and his family sang, and then we were dismissed. -I saw that Tanaka was unwilling to -explain, and did not press him. In about two -weeks I began to understand some of the words, -and then it dawned upon me with horror, that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> -this physician belonged to the jashui mono,<a href="#A55">[55]</a> -the corrupt sect. Then I remembered the edict -of Iyeyasu<a href="#A56">[56]</a>:—‘The Christians have come to -Japan to disseminate an evil law, to overthrow -right doctrine, so that they may change the government -of the country and obtain possession -of the land. If they are not prohibited, the -safety of the state will surely be imperiled; and -if those charged with the government of the -nation do not extirpate the evil, they will expose -themselves to Heaven’s rebuke.’ I was -horror-struck, and felt that, indeed, I was running -in danger for the sake of the clan. But -that same thought calmed me. What was the -danger compared to the clan. And as I grew -calmer, I remembered that I did not see any -crosses, and that the priests of Iyeyasu’s time -were not permitted to marry. Still, as my -duty permitted me to go into any room, at any -time of the day or evening, I watched the physician, -his wife and children so closely that they -could do nothing without it being known to me. -I had my pains for my trouble. I discovered<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span> -nothing, because there was nothing concealed. -I kept watching, I never relaxed until the time -I left, because it was my duty to the clan. I -have since discovered that the physician and his -wife are Christians, but surely there has been -either a terrible mistake made, or there are two -sorts of Christians. At any rate, they do not -belong to any corrupt sect.</p> - -<p>“I will now sum up my experience. I have -learned their language to a considerable extent. -I have learned that there are many foreign -nations, differing in language, habits, customs, -as much as we differ from those of China -and Korea. I have also received from the -physician a book which gives the size of each -country, the population, the army, navy, and a -great many other interesting facts; but I would -doubt its accuracy, only the physician tells me -that it is very nearly correct. What made me -doubt is that, in referring to Dai Nippon, -which they called Japan, it is stated that we -have two emperors, one spiritual and one temporal, -whom they name Tai Kun.<a href="#A57">[57]</a> When I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span> -showed this to the physician, he smiled, and -said that it was our fault that foreigners knew -so little of our country, because we had never -permitted them to come and enjoy its beauty.”</p> - -<p>Inouye then produced one of the large geographies -used in our schools. He showed them -the map of the world, and the size of Japan -compared with that of other nations. The map -of the United States was closely examined, as -well as that of the ocean which separates it -from Japan. All this was new to Kano and -Ito, and both were absorbed in the subject. -Inouye explained as much as his limited knowledge -of English would permit; although his -progress in that language, considering the time -he had been able to devote to its study, was -simply marvelous. At last Kano requested -Inouye to put the book up until some other opportunity. -The geography was then carefully -wrapped up in cotton, and again in embroidered -silk, showing the great value attached to it. -Both Kano and Ito asked minutely about the -daily life of the physician, whom they did no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span> -longer mention as “barbarian,” but Oisha-san,<a href="#A58">[58]</a> -Honorable Mr. Physician, a token of the -favorable impression made upon them by -Inouye’s simple account. All these questions -were answered promptly, and it was past midnight -when Kano broke up the meeting with the -words:—</p> - -<p>“Gentlemen, this has been a very pleasant -evening to me, none the less because I am surprised. -My experience is very different from -that of Mr. Inouye. I intended to give it to -you this evening, but he has beguiled us with -his interesting account. The clan will appreciate -what he has done: the knowledge he has -acquired will be of great usefulness, and his -loyalty to the clan deserves recognition.”</p> - -<p>Kano called a guard to conduct the two -friends to their quarters, and all retired to rest.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XI<br /> -CHOSHIU’S YASHIKI</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> next morning had been a busy one -for Kano. All the officers of the clan, -entitled to the privilege, had called to -pay their respects. It was eleven o’clock when -the Commandant requested an audience. He -was admitted, and reported that the evening before -one of the younger samurai, returning -home from a visit to a Tosa friend, had been -grossly insulted by two men; that he had drawn -his sword and had killed one and seriously -wounded the other. The affair had taken place -not far from the yashiki, and the captain of the -guard had despatched some men to the scene. -The wounded man was carried in and had since -died. He bore the Tokugawa crest, and a letter -addressed to the Go rojiu was found upon him. -The Commandant delivered the letter, and asked -what was to be done.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span>Kano had listened with little interest, only -ejaculating sometimes a polite nara hudo!<a href="#A59">[59]</a> to -show that he was listening. When he read the -inscription,—the name of the sender is always -upon the address of a letter,—there was no -longer lack of interest. It was from Sawa! -Was it a trap or was it fate? His questions -showed the importance of the case.</p> - -<p>Had the samurai been placed under arrest?</p> - -<p>Certainly.</p> - -<p>Who is he? ’Hm! a man above reproach.</p> - -<p>What are his habits? Regular? Very -well, but let him be closely investigated. Enjoin -the strictest silence upon the guard. Let the -body be placed in a coffin, ready for funeral. -Was the man’s comrade dead? That was ascertained? -Very well. The matter would be -duly considered, and instructions would follow -in due time.</p> - -<p>Kano was toying with the letter. What -should he do? This was a business that must -be decided by the Council of the Clan. But -who constituted the council? Kano smiled, for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> -he was alone. Hattori and himself. Hattori -had his own opinions—until he was made acquainted -with those of Kano. That was all -true, but this was a matter of life and death, and -Kano hesitated. Suddenly a thought struck -him. “Yes,” he thought, “that young man -has brains, and thinks for himself; he is the man -I need.” He clapped his hands, and when the -attendant appeared, desired him to invite Mr. -Inouye to call at once, and that his friend Mr. -Ito should favor him with a visit after dinner.</p> - -<p>He had not long to wait before Inouye appeared. -Kano at once invited him to enter, and -at once told him of the fight and the difficulty -it involved. Inouye’s face was expressionless, -but when Kano asked him what he would do -in this case, he inquired:</p> - -<p>“Has your honor examined the samurai?”</p> - -<p>Kano replied by requesting him to act as secretary, -and together they repaired to the Commandant’s -quarters. Writing materials were -brought, and the prisoner entered.</p> - -<p>He was a manly youth, twenty or twenty-two<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span> -years old. He prostrated himself before the -councillor, and, upon being told to give an account -of the affair, he told simply that he had -applied for and received a pass from the Commandant -to visit a friend in the Tosa yashiki. -That he had returned home by way of the inner -castle wall, and, after crossing the bridge, two -samurai had purposely run against him, and -called him a lout. He had demanded an apology, -whereupon one of them had ordered him upon -his knees. At that insult he had drawn his -sword, and had duly punished the insolent braggards. -He had then returned home, and reported -the affair to the Commandant.</p> - -<p>Kano had the prisoner removed, but when -the Commandant reported that he was of exemplary -antecedents and conduct, he was -brought in again, and, after exhorting him to -keep silence, he was commended for his courage -and discharged. The Councillor gave orders to -have the body cremated, and returned with -Inouye to the Palace.</p> - -<p>They had dinner together, and after the room<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> -had been cleared, and the servants withdrawn, -Kano deliberately opened the letter, and read it. -He then handed it over to Inouye, who also -read it carefully, returning it to Kano, who -said:</p> - -<p>“It seems that we must return to Nagato. -Sawa’s conscience begins to prick him unless -the council has stopped his supply of money, or -he has been reproved by the Go rojiu. He says -in his letter that it is said that I am ill, but that -he does not quite believe it. Well, as soon as I -get back, I shall invite him to call, and scold him -roundly for neglecting me so long. That, and -a few hundred riyo, will appease his tender conscience. -I wish I could sweep the whole Tokugawa -breed from the soil of Dai Nippon! Ah! -here is your friend Ito!”</p> - -<p>As soon as the expected guest was seated -Kano said:</p> - -<p>“It is now my turn, gentlemen, to go over -my experiences with the foreign devils. Mr. -Inouye will remember how I went to Yokohama -in search of work. When I arrived, I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span> -entered a tea house, and after taking a cup or -two, inquired where I might get work. I was -directed to the hatoba,<a href="#A60">[60]</a> where I found a number -of ninzoku, moving cases and bales. I -asked of one of them who was their employer. -He rudely pointed to a man of about my own -height, who was scribbling in a book. I went -to this person, and offered my services. The -rude dog said curtly:—‘Wait!’ I tell you, -gentlemen, it was well that I had left my swords -behind, for I came very near forgetting myself; -as it was, my palms itched. The people close -by seemed accustomed to this sort of treatment, -for no one paid attention, except one who looked -at me curiously for a moment. After about -five minutes, the fellow came up to me, looked -me over as you would look over a horse you -wished to buy, and then said curtly: ‘Come to-morrow -at seven. If you are late, you need not -come at all,’ I said nothing, but promised to -teach that fellow manners, before we parted -finally. Nevertheless, I was on hand in time -the next morning and enjoyed some very wholesome<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> -muscular exercise. It was then that I -had occasion to notice the first foreign devil. -He was a tall and well-built man with reddish -hair and beard, and walked as if the earth belonged -to him. A small coolie was in his way, -and he lifted his foot, and kicked, actually -kicked, that poor fellow out of his way. I -jumped up as if I had been struck myself, when -the same man who had looked so oddly at me -the day before, seized me by the girdle, and -without looking up, whispered:—‘You are forgetting -your purpose!’ He was right, and -brought me to my senses. Well, gentlemen, -that day I saw Japanese wantonly struck and -knocked down, without any provocation whatever, -by several of those foreign devils. At -noon most of the coolies ate their lunch where -they worked, but the man who had spoken to -me came up and said: ‘There is a small -yadoya close by, shall I show you the way?’ -I thanked him, and followed. I secured a room -and was back in time to train my muscles into -whipcord.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span>“When evening came, I went back to the -yadoya, and after taking my bath, had supper. -I must say that I enjoyed both more than I ever -had before. I was about to lie down, when I -remembered that I had not thanked my unknown -friend, who decidedly was not what he -seemed. I was going down to ask the landlord -if he knew him, when I saw him standing -in the door. He motioned to follow him; so, -securing a lantern from the landlord, I did so. -He led the way past many houses built of -stone, to a creek. There was a rude bridge, -leading to a path ascending to the hills. At -the crest he stopped and waited. We were at -a point where nobody could approach us unobserved, -and he bowed as only gentlemen do. -Of course, I returned the salute in the same -manner. He then said:—</p> - -<p>“‘Disguise between you and me is useless. -Down below there, I am Eto,<a href="#A61">[61]</a> a ninzoku; here -I am Teraji,<a href="#A62">[62]</a> a Satsuma samurai, at your -service.’</p> - -<p>“I have not yet decided what I am down<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span> -below,” I replied, “but at this moment I am -Kano of Choshiu, very glad to acknowledge -the service rendered to me by the Honorable -Teraji of Satsuma.”</p> - -<p>“‘Oh! that is nothing. The situation <i>is</i> -sometimes a little awkward. I understood your -feeling, and was on the lookout. These foreign -devils <i>are</i> brutal, but it is their nature, I -suppose, and they can not help it. But I grieve -to notice that this sort of conduct renders our -people, who come in contact with them, brutish. -They lose all respect for authority and the -Tokugawa, or whoever succeeds them in -power, is going to have trouble with this class -of people.’</p> - -<p>“You do not mean to say that the ninzoku -are deficient in respect to our authorities?”</p> - -<p>“‘If they are not yet, they are rapidly growing -so. You will notice it yourself. At the -same time, you will observe that there is a very -great difference among the foreigners. While -none of them possess the breeding of a gentleman, -there are some naturally wicked, while<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span> -others have a kindlier disposition. I do not -believe that there are many who like to inflict -pain. It is easy to perceive that none of them -have learned self-restraint, but that they are -all under the influence of the passion of the moment. -The brute who kicked that poor ninzoku -for instance. He was in a hurry, and it was -less trouble for him to reach his destination -by making room for himself in this manner, -than to wait until the coolie could make room -for him.’</p> - -<p>“What astonished me is that the ninzoku -took the attack without resenting it.”</p> - -<p>“‘Well, there are two reasons. Some did -resent it at first, but these foreigners are trained -to use their fists, and, man for man, our people -have no chance. But wait until the coolies -grow acquainted. At present they are from -the poorest and most thriftless classes of all -parts of Japan. Soon, however, they will all be -residents of Yokohama, and then they will form -into a union. When that time comes I will -venture to say that there will be few foreigners<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span> -who will dare use either fists or feet. But it is -getting late. To-morrow we do not work. -Every seventh day, the foreigners have a holiday, -and we shall be able to take a long walk.’</p> - -<p>“We returned to the inn, and parted at the -door with a boorish bow. That was the extent -of my experience on the first day. It was -enough to supply me with food for thought.”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XII<br /> -SONNO-JOI</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Kano</span> rose slowly and left the room. -When he returned after a brief absence, -he was in kamishimo,<a href="#A63">[63]</a> a white -or hemp-colored dress used only upon the most -solemn occasions. He sat down between the -two friends, who, astonished as they felt, maintained -the same impressive countenance. After -thinking for a few minutes, which to Ito and -Inouye seemed an age, he resumed:—</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_118f.jpg" alt="HE WAS IN KAMISHIMO" /></div> -<p class="caption">“HE WAS IN KAMISHIMO.”</p> - -<p>“Gentlemen, Mr. Teraji and myself have -given the barbarians a fair trial, and we have -come to the conclusion that they are not wanted -in this fair land of ours. We do not believe -that they have any other object in view except -trade, but whether they have or not, it is immaterial: -they must be expelled. It is the -duty of the Shogun to do this, and, were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span> -Iyeyasu or Iyemitsu living, I have no doubt the -Tokugawa clan would be quite able to accomplish -the work in such a manner that the barbarians -would think twice before they returned -to these shores. Unfortunately, the long peace -we have had, has exercised a bad influence -upon the Shogun and the clan. Gentlemen, I -must trust you entirely. There can be no doubt -of the loyalty of Kano to the house of Mori, -and yet I dare not repeat, even to my old friend -Hattori, what I am about to say to you now. -You notice my dress? I put it on because, -unless you agree with me, I shall commit seppuku.<a href="#A64">[64]</a> -But pray, give me your close attention.</p> - - - -<p>“It is said, at Nagato, that Kano governs -the Choshiu clan, and, in the main it is true, -although the other councillors are always consulted. -But our Lord Mori is not. He does -not know any more about the affairs of the clan, -than the ordinary samurai. He is a brave, -kind gentleman, who would lead his clan into -battle, or commit seppuku, as well as the bravest<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span> -among us. But he has been trained to have -others think for him, and provide for all his -wants. That is all very well, so long as peace -reigns, and in a small territory like Choshiu. -But the same rule prevails in every clan, and -not only there, but in the Yedo government. -The last Shogun were children, and died young. -Iyesda,<a href="#A65">[65]</a> the present Shogun, is only a boy. -The government is, therefore, conducted by the -Go rojiu, and the regent. Ii Naosuke occupies -the same position which I hold in our clan.</p> - -<p>“I do not know him, but from what I hear, -he has brains and courage. He is entitled to -those qualities, for his ancestor was one of -Iyeyasu’s most trusted captains. Yet he has -granted all that the barbarians demanded. It -has puzzled me, and is puzzling me still, why -he did so. Teraji told me that these barbarians -had defeated the flower of China’s army, and -were ready to throw their hosts upon these -shores. But the 80,000 samurai of the Tokugawa -clans should be strong enough to prevent -any army from landing.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span>“I remember, however, what Mr. Ito told -me about the Tokugawa samurai, and my own -observation has confirmed his opinion. They -are worthless, and a disgrace to us. Why, -look at that fellow whose body was cremated -yesterday but which should have been thrown -to the dogs. He was intrusted with a dispatch, -yet engaged in a brawl before executing his -commission. Such a man is unworthy of being -a samurai. Ii Naosuke must have known -this, and submitted out of loyalty to the descendant -of Iyeyasu. He, too, labors under -great difficulties. The Tokugawa family is divided. -Mito,<a href="#A66">[66]</a> notwithstanding his ancestor’s -will, hopes to see one of his sons succeed as -Shogun. If, then, the barbarians must be expelled, -it is not the Tokugawa who are able to -do it, and therefore that family must be deprived -of their power.</p> - -<p>“That is the first step. It will take, however, -the united efforts of several clans to accomplish -it, and the question is: Can a sufficient -number of clans be brought to do the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> -work without jealousy. I think not, unless we -can secure the person of Tenshi Sama and -thereby use his seal.”</p> - -<p>Both Ito and Inouye, trained in self-control -as they were, could not help giving a start. -Kano did not seem to notice it, and continued:</p> - -<p>“The seal of Tenshi Sama will be obeyed by -every clan. The Regent knows that, and has -applied to Kyoto to have the treaties confirmed. -Happily, there are some among the Kug,<a href="#A67">[67]</a> -who do not want Tenshi Sama to be mixed up -in this matter. They have replied that ‘if there -must be treaties with the barbarians, the Go -rojiu must see to it that they are admitted into -the vicinity of Kyoto.’ Therefore, the Regent -is sorely disappointed. No doubt, he will make -further efforts. But some of us must enter -into communication with some Kug, and prevent -his success; and, if there is any possibility -of securing possession of the Gosho,<a href="#A68">[68]</a> it must -be done.</p> - -<p>“We can not confide our plans to other -clans. They would think at once that Choshiu<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> -wishes to succeed Tokugawa. Perhaps it does. -All we do know is that Iyeyasu, who humbled -the proudest clan, humbly begged Tenshi Sama -to appoint him as Shogun. If he had not possessed -the imperial authority, not even he could -have prevented constant revolts. But he did -possess it, and that is why my ancestor advised -his lord not to join the insurgents. It may be, -however, that the time has come to wipe out -the clan’s disgrace, and my ancestor’s death. -If so, let Tokugawa look to it! That proud -clan shall feel what it is when the hand of the -despoiler wields a conqueror’s magic wand. -Now, gentlemen, I have given you my opinion, -and if I have spoken treason, I shall expiate my -sin at once and in your presence, that no taint -may rest upon my son. If, on the contrary, -you agree with me, I need all the help that your -devotion to the clan can offer. But perhaps -you would like to ask any questions?”</p> - -<p>Inouye waited for Ito to speak, but when he -perceived his friend to be buried in thought, he -said:—</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span>“Perhaps your honor may be willing to explain -what caused your hurried departure from -Yokohama, and why I was ordered to resign -at a minute’s notice.”</p> - -<p>“Teraji was to blame for it,” replied Kano, -“although I share in the blame. A boy committed -an error in piling up cases to be loaded -in a ship, and was brutally maltreated by the -master. Sorely hurt, he was unable to go on -with his work, when the Japanese who engaged -me, after ridiculing the lad, gave him such a -push that the lad fell and broke his leg. It happened -just before the time when we were dismissed -for the day, and I found Teraji waiting -for me. He told me that he wished to speak -to me right after supper, and I knew at once -that my sword would be required. So I hastened -to Kanagawa, and had no difficulty in -securing speech with you. After you had given -me my swords, I told you to be at our yashiki -here the next day, and returned to the yadoya, -where I found Teraji, standing motionless in -the shadow of a house. He too, had buckled<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> -on his swords, and I scarcely recognized the -former ninzoku. We saluted as became gentlemen, -and he told me that he was waiting for -a messenger. It was almost midnight when a -boy appeared, and after looking first at me and -then at him, beckoned us to follow. In one of -the new streets we saw the master of the ship -staggering home. Teraji followed him as a -cat steals up to a mouse, crouching, ready for -the spring. And as he did leap, out flashed his -sword. Satsuma has lost neither nerve nor -muscle. There was one barbarian less, gentlemen, -and as Teraji wiped his sword upon the -clothes of the dog, he said: ‘Now let us begone.’ -‘No, not yet,’ said I. This time I took -the lead to the house of the Japanese brute. I -disliked to soil my dagger in the scoundrel’s -dirty blood, but I desired to avoid an outcry. -When we came to his house, I called him and -told him he was wanted at the hatoba. He did -not hesitate. We took him through the street -where the master still lay, and when he bent -over to see who it was, I took care that he did<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> -not get up again. When we examined him to -see if he was dead, Teraji exclaimed at the -likeness with me. To make it appear more -so, he helped me to exchange kimono, then I -gave a few cuts in his face, and we left him. -We made our way unobserved into Kanagawa, -and from there to Yedo. Teraji went to Satsuma’s -yashiki and I arrived here, wholly unobserved, -I am sure. I had some little difficulty -in convincing our worthy commandant of my -identity.”</p> - -<p>“Then your honor thinks that there is no -suspicion among the metsuke of your being -here?”</p> - -<p>“I think not.”</p> - -<p>“What orders does it please your honor to -give us?”</p> - -<p>“Then you agree with me that I am right. -That is well. Now, gentlemen, this may cost -your lives. The clan must not be compromised. -Mr. Inouye has written his resignation, you -Mr. Ito must do the same. Inouye must go to -Kyoto, and enter into communication with the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span> -Gosho. I shall join him there, after I have -shown myself to the clan, and given the necessary -instructions to my friend Hattori. You, -Ito, must visit the clans, as a rnin. Do not -spare money. Entertain freely. Tell every -samurai who is willing to listen of how the -barbarians are desecrating the land of the gods. -Be prudent, but raise the battle-cry of Sonno-Jo<a href="#A69">[69]</a>; -Revere the Emperor, Expel the Barbarian! -That cry must be heard from Hokaido -to Kiu-siu. Yours will not be a difficult task. -Our young samurai, except those Tokugawa -she-monkeys,<a href="#A70">[70]</a> are anxious enough to test their -blades. You will find many of them willing to -provoke a war. Direct them to Kyoto. It -will need a very strong cry to awaken the court -to action, after its centuries of sleep. But do -not supply them with money. We do not want -any hirelings within our ranks, we need patriots.”</p> - -<p>Ito bowed, and said thoughtfully: “Your -honor is right in saying that mine is an easy -task. There will be no difficulty in raising the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> -cry of Sonno-Jo, nor in getting brawny arms -to clasp the hilt of the sword. But who shall -stifle the cry or sheath the blades, after they -have served the purpose? I have heard of little -boys, in the mountains of the north, starting -a snowball down the hill; and when it did come -down, a whole village lay buried.”</p> - -<p>“That is so,” replied Kano. “But our country -has never in vain called for men to guide it -in time of danger, nor will it now. One or two -clans are powerless to preserve it from the barbarians, -but all the clans united, are invincible. -Here is an order upon the treasurer. Take an -ample supply of money, for you will need it. -When will you be ready to start?”</p> - -<p>“As soon as your honor commands,” replied -Ito bowing.</p> - -<p>“Do so, then, as soon as possible. Mr. -Inouye will keep me company as far as Hyogo. -I have a passage engaged by a ship leaving to-morrow. -In all our actions let us never forget -our motto: Sonno-Jo, Revere the Emperor, -Expel the Foreigner!”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XIII<br /> -PLOTTING</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Two</span> men, dressed in kimono, haori, and -hakama were sitting in one of the numerous -temples which add to the natural -beauty of the old imperial capital of Japan. -The noon meal was over, but neither had an -eye for the glorious landscape spread out before -them. To the right and left a wave of mountains -seemed to roll up in ever increasing -height, until those in the background pierced -the deep-blue sky. The hills about the city were -clad in a mantle of green of every shade, from -the dark needles of the fir to the light shoots -of the bamboo. Crag and cliff bore the crimson -torii, the unique indication of the proximity -of temple or shrine. Yonder, at their feet, lay -the holy of holiest, the Gosho, the residence of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> -Tenshi Sama, the representative of the Yamato -Damashii,<a href="#A71">[71]</a> the fierce Spirit of Old Japan. A -fierce spirit! Men trained to consider duty the -sole motive, reckless of pain, and inured to the -sight of blood, are not sparing of that precious -fluid when they are bent upon the execution of -a purpose. Yet the recluse yonder, the very -incarnation of that spirit, dwelling in the temple-like -building surrounded by enchanted gardens, -seemed unconscious of his power to stir -millions of brave men into action, by a mere -use of his seal.</p> - -<p>“Then his lordship thinks that it can be -done?” asked Inouye, for he was one of the -occupants of the room.</p> - -<p>The man thus addressed, bowed low, and -said:—“My master has sent your honor a -haori with his crest. I passed through the -gate, and left my name ticket; then pretending -that I had forgotten something, went in again, -and when I came out I deposited the ticket of -Mr. Kida, a distant relative, who was admitted -in the service of my master. It is time that we<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span> -should go. If your honor will put on this -haori, and, upon entering the gate, demand -Kida’s ticket, there will be no difficulty.”</p> - -<p>Inouye dressed, and the two descended toward -the city. The road passed by one of the -Gosho gates, and the guide entered, exclaiming -his name, whereupon he received a wooden -ticket with his name in large characters, and -passed through. Inouye followed his example, -and received a similar ticket bearing the name -of Kida. The two then walked up a broad -gravel path toward one of the enclosures.</p> - -<p>Notwithstanding all his self control, Inouye -experienced great difficulty in not betraying his -intense curiosity. He, as every Japanese of -his class, thought with intense reverence of -Tenshi Sama. His heart would have leaped -for joy if he had received orders to die that -moment for the man he had never seen. We -can not understand that feeling. Loyalty is a -meaningless sound compared to it. Yet it was -that feeling which metamorphosed a federacy -of some three hundred autonomous oligarchies,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span> -poverty stricken and at war with one another, -into a powerful empire which bids Russia defiance. -This marvel, too, was accomplished in -less than three decades!</p> - -<p>Inouye’s curiosity was, therefore, blended -with awe. The guide stopped before a house -of modest dimensions, but of light and elegant -construction, and, bowing, preceded his companion. -Stopping on the verandah, he uttered -his name in a low but distinct voice. An answer -was returned, and he beckoned Inouye to -enter. The latter did so, and, prostrating himself, -ejaculated rapidly such phrases of self-depreciation -as the high rank of a Kug demanded.</p> - -<p>Karassu Maru,<a href="#A72">[72]</a> the master of the house, -was a young man of about Inouye’s age, -dressed in haori, hakama, and kimono all of -fine silk. He scanned Ito’s features keenly, -and appeared satisfied with the result. He was -evidently of a quick, impulsive temper, but used -the courtly language, and strictly observed his -own dignity.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span>“I am informed that you have a proposition -to place before me on behalf of Mori.<a href="#A73">[73]</a>”</p> - -<p>“I am but the messenger, My Lord, and -my authority extends only to requesting an audience -of your lordship for the first councillor -and friend of my Lord Mori.”</p> - -<p>“But, you know, there is some danger in -coming to and going from the Gosho. Our -friends of the Aidzu Clan, whom the Go rojiu -has kindly deputed to guard us here, seem to -scent danger, for they have drawn the lines -tighter and tighter. It would be better if I -knew something of what Mori wishes, so that -both time and risk could be saved.”</p> - -<p>“I will tell you, my lord, what I know.”</p> - -<p>Inouye then gave a comprehensive but concise -review of Kido’s intentions, reserving, of -course, the conclusions of his leader, and the -share he intended to assign to the Gosho. -Karassu Maru listened attentively, and when -Inouye concluded, he said:</p> - -<p>“When do you expect the councillor of your -clan?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span>“He will come, your Lordship, as soon as I -let him know that he may have an audience.”</p> - -<p>“I am willing to hear him, but he will need -great powers of persuasion. Of my personal -friends, one is an idiot, and the other a fool. -No; I can’t do a thing, although I would like -to try. The affair ought to be begun by one of -the Miya,<a href="#A74">[74]</a> but that is altogether out of the -question. Ni-jo?<a href="#A75">[75]</a> bah! he would not stir. -Sanjo? Yes, he might. Aye, I think that he -would. Hold on! There is Tomomi. He is -the man!”</p> - -<p>This was evidently not destined for the ears -of Inouye, who was listening but without any -expression in his features. Karassu Maru -looked up, and said:—</p> - -<p>“See that Mori’s councillor is here on the -tenth day from now. The same retainer who -brought you here will call for him, and I shall -arrange a meeting. Now about getting out. -He clapped his hands, and when the attendant -appeared, he said: ‘Get the football ready, and -invite Honami and Gojo with their retainers to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span> -join me in a game. You, sir, come along. -When we come to the wall near the gate the -guard will be watching us. See to it that you -do not kick it over the wall, for I am a good -hand at scolding, and you would not care to be -called clumsy, would you? If, however, you -should send it flying over the wall, run after it, -and throw it back. We shall entertain the -guard.’”</p> - -<p>It was dark when Inouye returned to the -temple, but he wrote at once to Kano. The letter -was foolish, and made the writer appear to -live only for amusement. It described the magnificence -of the temples and urged Kano to be -present at a festival to take place on the tenth -day. There was nothing in it of the slightest -interest to any spy.</p> - -<p>Kano was at home when the letter was delivered -to him. He saw, after a close examination, -that it had been opened, but smiled after -he had read its contents. He knew the spy. -Why had Sawa so earnestly requested him to -admit among his retainers a young friend who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span> -had some slight trouble in his own clan? Kano -had demurred to keep up appearances, but -finally he had agreed, and he knew that there -was no longer any privacy in his house. It -was immaterial to him. He did not know of -one member of his clan in whom he could trust. -Not that there was any doubt whatever of their -loyalty, but one thoughtless word or action -would upset all his plans. He was glad that he -had two such friends as Ito and Inouye. Sonno-Jo! -Why he had heard that cry in his own -clan, here at the confines of Hondo. There had -been no communication from him, and this was -the first that he received from Inouye. Truly, -there was a chance for Choshiu when the clan -numbered among its members such men. O! -if Ekichi might only grow up to such a standard.</p> - -<p>He clapped his hands and ordered the child -to be called. The boy came, knelt at the -threshold, and saluted his father with the reverence -due to him, and the gravity of a man. -Kano bowed in return, and said:—</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span>“Come here.”</p> - -<p>The boy came, bowed, and squatted down.</p> - -<p>“Are you doing well at school?”</p> - -<p>Ekichi bowed.</p> - -<p>“Read that to me,” he continued, taking up -a book. The boy began to read in the sing-song -tone necessary to render ideographic writing -intelligible to the reader. His father then -inquired after his progress in athletic exercises, -and finally said: “Come, we shall go into the -garden!”</p> - -<p>They walked together to an artificial hillock, -found in every Japanese garden of any pretensions, -and ascended to the top. Here, safe from -spies, Kano turned to his son:</p> - -<p>“Listen, Ekichi,” he said. “You know the -new attendant who came here some months -ago?” The child bowed. “Very well; I want -you to be the shadow of that man. He must not -be anywhere, or you must see him; he may -not say a word, or you must hear what it is. -I am going away for a few weeks, and when I -am back, you must read on this hillock every<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span> -afternoon, until I come up, and then you must -tell me what this man has done, whom he has -seen and what he has said. Can you do that -do you think?”</p> - -<p>The little fellow felt overjoyed at this token -of his father’s confidence, but not a look betrayed -that feeling. He accepted the charge -with a simple bow, and went with his father -back to the house.</p> - -<p>Kano dressed, and ordered his chair. When -he entered it, he said briefly: “To the castle!” -Alighting at the inner entrance, he distinctly -ejaculated his name; a servant appeared and -bade him enter.</p> - -<p>The room was almost the same as his sitting-room -in his own house. There was no furniture, -but a kakemono,<a href="#A76">[76]</a> of priceless value in -Japanese eyes, hung from the wall so that the -light fell upon it. A few bronze pieces, masterworks -of art, stood where they appeared to -demand admiration. In the middle of the room -sat the owner of the estate, an estimable gentleman -of middle age, dressed in magnificent silk.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> -Kano saluted dutifully and was bidden to approach. -He sat down at the prescribed distance, -and waited for his master to address -him.</p> - -<p>“I am glad you called,” said Mori. “I -want the garden changed, and my cousin told -me that the council had appropriated too much -money for the fortifications at Shimonoseki. -What fad is this? Those works were constructed -under my grandfather, and could not -be made better. It is more important by far -that the garden be altered. Come here! Do -you not see that if I sit here and look out, that -hillock yonder interrupts the view? It must -be changed.”</p> - -<p>Kano bowed low and said: “It shall be done, -my lord. I am going to Kyoto on business for -the clan. Is there anything I can do for -you?”</p> - -<p>“Why, certainly. If you can pick up any -fine antiquities, do so. And you must order -new haori for the retainers. They will need -them on our next journey to Yedo.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span>Kano promised to attend to these matters, -and took his leave. Closing the sho ji behind -him, he went to a distant part of the palace, -and called an attendant. “Request Mr. Hattori -to come here,” he said. Hattori came, and -his friend told him that he was called to Kyoto -on private business, and would be absent for -two or three weeks. He requested him to see -that the garden was altered according to the -wishes of the Lord of the Manor. Hattori -promised to comply. Kano then proceeded to -Sawa’s yashiki, and told him that he had come -to bid him good-bye, as he was going to Kyoto -under orders from my lord to buy some new -ornaments. He asked for a letter to the commandant -of the castle at Kyoto, a request which -was willingly granted. When Kano left, a -small bag of gold remained on the cushion -which he had occupied.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XIV<br /> -WITHIN THE PALACE</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">In</span> one of the kuge residences, not far from -the palace occupied by the Tenshi sama, -four men had just exchanged the protracted -salutations prescribed by their rank. -All knew that this very meeting would be considered -as treason if it were known to the authorities -at Yedo, and they felt, intuitively, that -it would exercise a great influence upon their -lives. Yet every face bore but one expression, -that of placid contentment.</p> - -<p>Sanjo, as the highest in rank, spoke first:—“His -Lordship, Karassu Maru has informed -us that the chief Councillor of Mori desires to -make a communication. It is long since the -chief of a clan desired the intercession of a -kuge.”</p> - -<p>Kano bowed:—“It is the fault of the Tokugawa,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> -My Lord. The clans are shut out from -Kyoto. We are not permitted to occupy our -yashiki here, unless we secure the gracious consent -of the men who rule at Yedo. I know -none of the old families, Mori, Shimadzu,<a href="#A77">[77]</a> -who would not willingly enroll himself among -the lowest servants of the Son of Heaven. -If you are robbed of the homage which is your -due, surely we suffer more severely by being -shut out from the sacred presence.”</p> - -<p>Sanjo bowed, and looked at Iwakura Tomomi, -who said:—“You speak well, Sir Knight, -and we do not hold the clans responsible for -their compulsory neglect of His Majesty. But -we shall be glad to hear what it is that Mori of -Nagato desires of us.”</p> - -<p>“Your Lordships, the Tokugawa has admitted -barbarians within the realm of the divine -ancestors. They are now upsetting all -our time-honored customs at Kanagawa, and -demand admittance at Hyogo. Your humble -servant has dwelt for six weeks among them. -I desired to study them, because I was anxious<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span> -to know if their unhallowed presence foreboded -evil to our country. I am convinced that it -does. The five relations<a href="#A78">[78]</a> upon which our social -system rests are disregarded and set at -nought by them. They respect nothing we respect. -They are rude and insolent, and act as -if the country of the gods was theirs by right -of conquest. They defy our laws. Who ever -heard of a merchant talking back to a samurai? -Not only do they do this, but they dare order -them about.”</p> - -<p>“Have you seen that yourself?” asked -Sanjo.</p> - -<p>“I have, my Lord.”</p> - -<p>“And what did the Tokugawa Knights -do?”</p> - -<p>“They did as they were bidden; they obeyed -the orders of the insolent dogs.”</p> - -<p>“Was no complaint brought?”</p> - -<p>“Who would bring a complaint, and before -whom? The samurai is not accustomed to -seek protection. He protects, and in such a -quarrel, his good sword is both judge and executioner.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span> -But, alas! the Tokugawa samurai -is no longer a knight. He has forgotten the -existence of the word duty, and has substituted -the word pleasure. The country is no longer -safe under the guidance of the Tokugawa. It -must be taken away from them.”</p> - -<p>“And given to Mori?” asked Karassu -Maru.</p> - -<p>“That may be decided later, my lord,” said -Kano calmly. “At present it is not a question -of who shall rule with Tenshi Sama’s consent, -but if the country shall be safe from the invasion -of the barbarians. They may not come in -large numbers for some years; but if they upset -all our sacred customs, they can ruin Japan -without any armed invasion. They are but -few in number now, your lordships, and we -can expel them. But if we wait for a few -years, they will have obtained such a foothold -that we may not be able to succeed.”</p> - -<p>“But what can we do?” asked Iwakura.</p> - -<p>“Your lordship, there is but one way. Tenshi<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span> -Sama may order the Tokugawa to expel -the barbarians, the order will not be obeyed, -because the clan can not do it, and will not entrust -the work to other clans. But Tenshi -Sama can give an order to all the clans to do it, -and I know of some who will obey His Majesty’s -orders, regardless of consequences.”</p> - -<p>“But,” said Sanjo, “you know that Tokugawa -is Shogun; all orders must be issued to -him; such is the law and the custom.”</p> - -<p>“But if Tokugawa can not, or will not -obey?”</p> - -<p>Here was a supposition which was very unpalatable, -and the three kuge were silent. Orders -had been issued from the Palace before, -and had been disregarded, but the kuge had -been respectfully assured that they had been -obeyed. Iwakura knew of one instance, and -the angry blood appeared almost through the -thick coating of self-control and restraint. At -last Karassu Mara said:</p> - -<p>“What would you have us do?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span>“Send peremptory orders to the Go rojiu, -and let the clans know that such orders have -been sent.”</p> - -<p>“Do you know, Sir Knight,” he asked, -“how we are situated here? Aidzu, one of -the Tokugawa clans that will fight, confound -it! has a guard at every gate. Not a soul goes -in or out, but they know who he is, and I shall -be very much astonished and glad for your -sake, if you return home without some disagreeable -encounter. Why! They discovered -after your messenger had left that a stranger -had been in the palace grounds, and there was -a fine hue and cry. The captain of the guard -came to me and dared ask questions; I don’t -think he will do it again, for I made him understand -the difference between a kuge and a dog. -We could contrive, perhaps, to send a secret -order. But an open order to the clans! Why, -that messenger must be nimble-footed who -could get as far as one hundred yards from the -gate!”</p> - -<p>“No!” said Sanjo, “that suggestion is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> -worthless. Mark you, Sir Knight, I do not deny -that the Tokugawa hand has rested heavily -upon the Gosho, but under whatever circumstances, -the Court has maintained its dignity. -Nor would any infringement be permitted. Besides, -while it is true that his Lordship Iwakura -and myself are members of the Inner Council, -we are but two, and the majority is composed -of old men, wedded to the secluded, contemplative -life we lead. If you have no other suggestion -to offer, I am afraid that we can not -help you.”</p> - -<p>“But, my Lord,” said Kano, “surely, that -life of seclusion and contemplation ends as soon -as the barbarians land at Hyogo. They are, -even now, clamoring to be admitted into Yedo. -It is only a question of time, perhaps of very -brief time, before they will demand admittance -in Kyoto, and from what I have seen of them, -they will not show any respect for the Sacred -Enclosure.”</p> - -<p>Karassu Maru grasped the hilt of his sword, -while Iwakura and Sanjo were startled.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span>“Ah! That must be prevented at any cost!” -said the former, and Sanjo bowed assent.</p> - -<p>After a few moments Iwakura made a movement -indicating the termination of the audience, -saying: “Sir Knight, we shall report our -conference to the Council. We do not pretend -to know what the result will be, but I suppose -that, if we wish to communicate with you, his -lordship Karassu Maru will know how to reach -you.” Deep bows and sucking of the breath -followed, and Kano left escorted by Karassu -Maru, who led the way to a secluded part of -the grounds.</p> - -<p>“Now then, Sir Knight, what do you think -of the prospect? Encouraging, is it not? And -the two gentlemen whom we have left just now, -are the most progressive. Now, let me give -you a hint. The Miya and kuge, I say it with -all respect, have taken root into the ground. -That root must be torn up by main force, before -they will move. Pull the ground from -under them and you will succeed. If you can -not find means to do that, return to your clan<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span> -and prepare to defend yourself. By the way! -Are you acquainted with a gigantic Satsuma -knight, who loves the Tokugawa as much as -you do?”</p> - -<p>“I am not, my Lord,” said Kano, surprised.</p> - -<p>“Well, he, too, is in hiding in some temple. -Hunt him up, and work together. Two can do -more than one. Now, how are you going to -leave here?”</p> - -<p>“I saw a nosimono going to one of the palaces -a moment ago, is it going beyond the -gate?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that is his lordship Honami, who is -so exceedingly bright that he can go wherever -and whenever he pleases, but why?”</p> - -<p>“Can not your lordship arrange that I shall -be one of the bearers?”</p> - -<p>“Why, certainly. Come this way and wait -in that copse.” Karassu Maru returned after -half an hour’s absence, evidently in great glee. -He said that Honami had consented to carry a -package to the temple where Inouye had rooms. -Karassu Maru then handed to Kano a chair-bearer’s<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> -coat, and kerchief to tie around his -head. It took only a minute to change the -clothes, and to make a bundle of haori, hakama, -kimono, and swords. A little later Honami’s -well-known nosimono passed through the gate -borne by four stalwart men. When it returned -there were only three. One had been lost, and -poor Honami’s privileges were curtailed, while -the other chairbearers were subjected to a severe -but useless examination.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XV<br /> -UNDERGROUND RUMBLING</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> Choshiu Clan was by no means -alone in taking the alarm at the admittance -of foreigners. The Japanese, -as a nation, possess a dual character, which was -typified in their government. Just as the -Gosho at Kyoto presented the highest degree -of refinement attained by the nation, as well as -the amiability, natural kindness, and light-heartedness -of the people, so did the Camp at -Yedo picture the sterner side of their character -inculcated and developed to the utmost in -the samurai. But the samurai shared with -the people the curiosity which is a national -characteristic, and many had visited Yokohama -for the sole purpose of examining and taking -the measure of these strangers. The early history -of that open port, is one of bloodshed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> -Numerous are the names of foreigners in the -graveyard upon the bluff, with the inscription: -Murdered. Yet in not one single instance was -the perpetrator brought to justice. Not one of -these murders was for the purpose of robbery; -in every instance the sharp sword had been -used to avenge some real or fancied insult.</p> - -<p>Except the missionaries who arrived as soon -as Japan was opened, there were few, very few -foreigners who made any effort to propitiate -this people. Most of them had lived for some -time in China, where they had met a submissive -people. They treated the Japanese in the same -manner, with very unexpected results. The -resentment turned from the foreigners upon -the government which had admitted them, and -the Tokugawa dynasty was doomed.</p> - -<p>But of the Genr, the statesmen of revolutionary -time, no one had any thought of uniting -Japan into an Empire under the direct rule -of Tenshi Sama. They knew of no history -save that of their own country, and that demonstrated -the Son of Heaven as too sacred a person<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> -to be troubled with mundane affairs. All -desired a strong country under a strong Shogun. -There is not the least doubt that Satsuma, -Choshiu, and Tosa, to whom Japan -chiefly owes its present greatness, worked with -that end in view. Nor does it detract from -their credit that probably each worked with the -ultimate hope to see his own clan take Tokugawa’s -place. There was not an atom of selfishness -in this. The chief impulses constituting -our motives in life, the acquisition of -wealth and honor or fame, were unintelligible -to the Japanese at that time.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Kano returned to the temple, where he had -left his chair and bearers, for he was stopping -at the Choshiu yashiki, and entered the room -where Inouye was waiting for him. Having -satisfied himself that there were no listeners, he -briefly summed up the result of his interview -with the kuge. “There will be no opening of -Hyogo,” he said. “The Court will move<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span> -heaven and earth, before it concedes that demand. -But Karassu Maru is right. The -ground must be pulled from under them, before -they will abate one jot of their dignity, such -as they understand it. By the way. Go back -to Nagato as soon as you can. The attention -of the spies will be drawn toward this temple, -because one of the bearers of Honami’s chair -disappeared here. I shall follow you in a few -days.”</p> - -<p>The two devoted samurai reached their own -province in safety, and the affairs of the clan -continued peaceably, except that a considerable -number of young samurai resigned as members -of the clan, and disappeared. It was not -generally known that their names were not -stricken off the rolls, but that the letters of -resignation were held in a safe place, in case of -emergency. Nobody heard from Ito; at least -not directly. Indirectly the cry of Sonno Jo! -growing more and more common, showed that -he was still gathering recruits in the ranks -against the Tokugawa.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span>Kano smiled grimly when he received from -Yedo a copy of a letter sent by the Court to the -Daimiyo of Mito. “The Bakufu” (Camp or -Yedo Government) it ran “has shown great -disrespect of public opinion in concluding treaties -without waiting for the opinion of the -Court, and in disgracing princes so closely allied -by blood to the Shogun. Tenshi Sama’s -rest is disturbed by the spectacle of such misgovernment -when the fierce barbarian is at our -very door. Do you, therefore assist the Bakufu -with your advice, expel the barbarians, content -the mind of the samurai, and restore tranquillity -to his Majesty’s bosom.”</p> - -<p>The wedge had entered, but time was required -before it could be driven deeper. Kano -had gradually prepared his friend Hattori to -share his hopes and fears, and effective improvements -had been made in the fortifications -on the coast of Nagato. Cannon, not of very -modern make, but decidedly better than the -rusty fire pieces of old, had been purchased at -Nagasaki and smuggled in at Shimonoseki; a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span> -supply of powder was also procured, and several -companies of young samurai practiced -daily with the guns. Ekichi had attached himself -to Inouye and was rapidly growing into an -expert swordsman.</p> - -<p>One evening, in the beginning of April, Kano -was sitting in his room, talking to his son. -The rain doors were up, for it had been -blowing hard all day, and it looked like -rain. Kano began to think that it was time -to retire, when Ekichi told him that there -was a knock at the rain doors. Kano took -up a lantern, and went on the verandah, when -he heard a muffled voice calling him. He -opened a door and asked who was there, when -he recognized the voice of Ito. He gladly invited -him to enter, and reclosing the door, led -the way to his room. After the customary -salutations, seeing that Ito was cold and wet, -he ordered dry garments to be brought, and -then inquired when he had arrived. Ito replied -that he had come straight to Kano’s yashiki, -and then asked him if he had heard the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> -news. He received a negative answer and -said:—“Before I tell you what it is, I must -warn you that you have a spy in the house.”</p> - -<p>“O! I know that, but he is harmless.”</p> - -<p>“Yes; he is harmless now; but he must -have found out something because the Go rojiu -dogs were hot on my trail.”</p> - -<p>“Ekichi,” said Kano, “watch around the -rooms; and if you see any one trying to listen, -silence him.”</p> - -<p>The boy bowed and slipped out.</p> - -<p>Ito sipped a cup of tea, and, seeing that Kano -expected him to speak, said:</p> - -<p>“Ii Naosuke is dead.”</p> - -<p>“Is that so? When did he die?”</p> - -<p>“He was assassinated in Yedo on the 23rd -of last month.”</p> - -<p>Kano knocked the ashes out of his pipe, put -it up, and looked for further particulars. Ito -continued:—</p> - -<p>“It was blowing a severe storm in Yedo that -day. There was rain and sleet, and sometimes -it snowed very heavily. The streets within<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> -the moats of the castle are almost always deserted, -but this time they were wholly so on account -of the weather. It appears that there -was some meeting at the castle. At all events -the Daimiyo of Kii and Owari with their respective -retinues were marching across the -bridge into the inner walls, when the retinue -of the Lord Regent also approached. The last -of the Kii samurai had just left the bridge when -the head of Ii’s retinue reached it. Several -men in rain coats had been loitering; they -flung off their coats and as samurai in full -armor, attacked the regent’s escort. These -men were taken unawares, and before they -could drop their rain coats a number of them -had been killed and Ii was dragged out of his -nosimono, and decapitated. Several of the assailants -lost their lives, but the leader escaped -with the head. It is said that they were Mito -rnin.”</p> - -<p>Kano was silent for some time. At last he -said: “This is a death blow for the Tokugawa, -for Ii Naosuke was the only man, so far as I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> -know, who could have propped up that falling -house. For that reason I am glad. But I am -sorry too, for Ii was a patriot. I disagreed -with him, but he may have been right when he -said, in defense of the treaty which he had -made: ‘Let us have intercourse with foreign -countries, learn their drill and tactics, and let -us make the nation united as one family.’ I -do not think that he could have succeeded, -but—”</p> - -<p>There was a stifled cry and a blow. A moment -later a sho ji opened, and Ekichi came in -holding in one hand the bleeding head of the -spy, and in the other his drawn sword. The -boy said simply: “I have silenced him.”</p> - -<p>Kano and Ito both looked at the boy. He -stood there, waiting patiently until his father -should address him. Ito, however, took some -paper from his sleeve, and placed it upon the -woodwork of the grooves, motioning Ekichi to -put the head on it. The boy did so, and Kano -told him to come near and tell him what had -happened.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span>“I have watched him several times, as you -told me to, when he was trying to listen, and -once when he was looking over some of your -papers. Every time he made some excuse, but -I did not answer him. A few moments ago, I -passed into that room, and saw his form crouching -before the sho ji. You had ordered me to -silence him, and I did so.”</p> - -<p>Kano said a few words in praise, and bade -him go to sleep. Ekichi bowed and withdrew.</p> - -<p>Kano went out of the room and in a few moments -returned with Fujii. The old man looked -grimly at the head as he took it up. The body -was removed, and the bloodspots cleaned. It -was merely an incident in the life of old Japan.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XVI<br /> -THE COURT AROUSED</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> death of Ii Naosuke decided Kano -to return to Kyoto with his friends, -Ito and Inouye, as he said grimly “to -help pull the ground from under the feet of the -Court.” His acquaintance with Karassu Maru -was of material assistance to him. This kug -was of a very impulsive temperament, with none -of that self control, characteristic of the samurai. -Generous to a fault, he was implacable -as a foe. While he frightened some of the -more timid kug by the boldness of his speech, -he attracted others. The Court mustered the -courage to summon the Shogun to Kyoto, to -answer the charge of misgovernment brought -against him by several clans. No Shogun had -deigned doing homage to Tenshi Sama since -1634. The humble reply from the Go rojiu was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span> -followed by another command, in which it appeared -plainly that Tenshi Sama’s advisers -would not entertain a thought of his assuming -the government. It said:—</p> - -<p>“Since the barbarian vessels commenced to -visit this country, the barbarians have conducted -themselves in an insolent manner, without -any interference on the part of the Yedo -officials. The consequence has been that the -peace of the empire has been disturbed and the -people have been plunged into misery. Tenshi -Sama was profoundly distressed at these things, -and the Go rojiu on that occasion replied that -discord had arisen among the people, and it was -therefore impossible to raise an army for the -expulsion of the barbarians, but that if His -Majesty would graciously give his sister in -marriage to the Shogun that then the court and -camp would be reconciled, the samurai would -exert themselves, and the barbarians would be -swept away. Thereupon His Majesty good-naturedly -granted the request and permitted the -Princess Kazu to go down to Yedo. Contrary<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span> -to all expectations, however, traitorous officials -became more and more intimate with the barbarians -and treated the imperial family as if -they were nobody; in order to steal a day of -tranquillity they forgot the long years of trouble -to follow, and were close upon the point of asking -the barbarians to take them under their -jurisdiction. The nation has become more and -more turbulent. Of late, therefore, the rnin -of the western provinces have assembled in a -body to urge the Tenshi Sama to ride to Hakone, -and, after punishing the traitorous officials, -to drive out the barbarians. The two -clans of Satsuma and Choshiu have pacified -these men and are willing to lend their assistance -to the court and camp in order to drive -out the barbarians. The Shogun must proceed -to Kyoto to take counsel with the nobles of the -court, and must put forth all his strength, must -despatch orders to the clans of the home provinces -and the seven circuits, and, speedily performing -the exploit of expelling the barbarians, -restore tranquillity to the empire. On the one<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span> -hand, he must appease the sacred wrath of -Tenshi Sama’s divine ancestors, and, on the -other, inaugurate the return of faithful servants -to their allegiance, and of peace and prosperity -to the people, thus giving to the empire the immovable -security of Taisan.”<a href="#A79">[79]</a> (Ta shan—Great -Mountain, the Sacred mountain of -China.)</p> - -<p>The effect of Kano’s visit to the Gosho is -plainly visible in this document. Iyemochi, the -Shogun, paid homage to the Tenshi Sama in -April 1863, and the same year released the Daimiyo -from their compulsory residence at Yedo. -At the same time Kano at last secured the long -coveted imperial order to commence the expulsion -of the barbarians, and he returned to Nagato -in high glee.</p> - - - -<p>In the south-western part of the main island -of Japan, known as Hondo, a narrow strait -separates it from the island of Kiusiu. This -strait is named after the city of Shimonoseki,<a href="#A80">[80]</a> -situated on the northern shore, in Nagato. This -shore is composed of bold bluffs, formed of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> -solid rock, covered, however, with abundant -verdure owing to ample moisture and the heat -of the sun. These bluffs control the strait -which forms the western entrance to the Inland -Sea, and is used by all vessels plying between -Japan and China as offering a safe and quick -route. It was here that the Choshiu clan had -reconstructed its fortifications, and supplied -them with new cannon. The clan had also -purchased at great expense two sailing vessels -and a steamer and was thus, as the Council -thought, well equipped to expel the handful of -barbarians.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_165f.jpg" alt="THE FRIENDS WERE STANDING IN A GARDEN" /></div> -<p class="caption">“THE FRIENDS WERE STANDING IN A GARDEN OF A TEAHOUSE.”</p> - -<p>In the beginning of July, 1863, the friends -were standing in the garden of a teahouse, -whose upper story overlooked the entrance to -the strait, when an attendant appeared and informed -them that a barbarian vessel was approaching. -The party went up-stairs and -watched the ship, as, unable to stem the current, -she came to anchor. “She is going to stay -there all night” said Kano grimly. “Well, we -don’t want any more foreigners nor their vessels,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span> -and we will give that one yonder a hint -not to come back again.” He went out around -the batteries and ordered the officers to open -fire as soon as it should be light enough.</p> - -<p>There was grim expectation among Choshiu’s -samurai at the prospect of an early battle. -They had imbibed the dislike of Kano, and the -cry of Sonno Jo had excited them. Still, they -retired to rest as usual, but were up with the -first dawn. The American bark, the <i>Pembroke</i>, -was not expecting any hostilities. When the -tide turned in the morning, the captain gave orders -to hoist the anchor, when he was startled -by firing and a moment later a ball went -through one of his sails. He had the American -flag hoisted, but it produced no effect, except -that more batteries opened upon her. The two -sailing vessels and the steamer appeared to be -preparing to increase her danger, but the sailors -worked with a will, and soon had her under -weigh. The marksmanship of the Choshiu -gunners, however, was very poor, and the <i>Pembroke</i> -escaped.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span>It is scarcely credible that Choshiu intended -to destroy an unarmed vessel; it is more likely -that they meant the firing as a warning to keep -away. Kano was satisfied at the effect which -he thought had been produced. On the morning -of the 16th, about ten days after firing upon -the <i>Pembroke</i>, he was called by one of his retainers, -and informed that a steamer was coming -toward the Strait from the Inland Sea. -After dressing himself hastily, he went to one -of the bluffs where he could observe and at the -same time issue orders. He soon perceived -that it was a war vessel, and sent Ekichi down -to the ships at anchor under the bluff to instruct -them to clear for action. He then ordered Ito -and Inouye to take charge of two of the batteries, -and to open fire as soon as possible. The -barbarian ship, however, did not remain in the -channel, but made at once for the bluff, where, -since the guns could not be sufficiently depressed, -she was safe from the batteries. She -immediately engaged Choshiu’s vessels, and, -although the samurai were anxious to fight<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span> -and to come to close quarters, they could -scarcely inflict any damage upon their opponents, -because they had not been drilled to this -sort of warfare. Kano was furious when he -saw his expensive ships destroyed, and he was -more angry still when Capt. McDougal of the -saucy U. S. Sloop-of-war <i>Wyoming</i> by a few -parting shots destroyed one of the batteries, and -then steamed away, apparently none the worse -for her late encounter. It did not improve his -temper, when the breeze carried the laughter of -some of the barbarian sailors to his ears.</p> - -<p>After the <i>Wyoming</i> had steamed away, -Kano sent for his two friends, and together -they discussed the event of that morning.</p> - -<p>“It is easy to understand,” he said, “why -our ships suffered defeat. Our samurai can -scarcely be expected to learn to handle strange -craft in so short a time. What puzzles me is -that we could not sink her with our batteries.”</p> - -<p>“Why,” said Ito, “that was plain enough. -She steamed straight under us and for the vessels. -If we had been able to loosen the rock,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span> -we might have sunk her by letting it fall, but if -we had depressed our guns, the shot would -have fallen out of them.”</p> - -<p>“Then they are cowards!” Kano cried, -“they knew that we could not hit them there, -and so crept under shelter. I don’t call that -honorable warfare.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t see that,” said Inouye smiling. “It -is fair in war to take every advantage over an -enemy; besides, it was decidedly no coward -who would come with one small vessel and attack -three, while facing the guns of our batteries. -No! We lack the skill. Suppose we -put armor on our peasants and arm them with -our swords, would they be able to fight as well -as we, who are trained from our youth? The -biggest and most powerful peasant, in armor, -would not be a match for Ekichi. It is the -same thing in this case. We have the weapons, -but we do not know how to use them.”</p> - -<p>“We fired well enough when she was in the -channel,” objected Ito.</p> - -<p>“Yes, but you confessed yourself that you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> -could not depress your guns, while that fellow -raised his cannon high enough to bring the -whole battery about my ears. I don’t call it -unfair, but it was a very one-sided affair.”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XVII<br /> -A CONFERENCE</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">A few</span> days after the experience gained -in the conflict, Kano decided to go to -Kyoto. He announced his decision -to the Council, where no opposition was made. -Indeed, several members, Hattori among the -number, declared that they too would go. They -felt that the Clan had thrown down the gauntlet, -and that there must be victory or annihilation. -There had been a steady emigration of -the young samurai, and even Ekichi had besought -his father to let him go. It was decided -that all should be recalled and ordered to report -at Choshiu’s yashiki at Kyoto.</p> - -<p>When Kano, accompanied by his friends, -and escorted by a corps of six hundred well-armed -samurai arrived at the Capital, he could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span> -scarcely credit his senses. The quiet and almost -solemn city had changed apparently into -a garrison town. Everywhere samurai were -met. The crests of Satsuma, Choshiu, Tosa, -Hizen, and Kaga, jostled with those of the Tokugawa, -with the result that brawls and street -fights were common, and peaceable citizens -scarcely dared leave their houses. The shout -of Sonno Jo was heard everywhere and at all -hours. A revolution was imminent.</p> - -<p>It was not long after Kano was installed in -his apartments of the yashiki when an attendant -announced a visitor, who declined giving -his name. Receiving directions to admit him, -a samurai in rnin dress, that is without crest -and his face concealed by a cloth entered. After -saluting, the visitor discarded his disguise, and -Kano recognized the features of Karassu Maru.</p> - -<p>“Well, Mr. Councillor,” said the Kuge after -they were seated, “you have indeed heeded my -advice of pulling the ground from under the -court; you have produced chaos, my friend. -What has struck Aidzu, I can not conceive.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span> -Our chairs go in and out of the palace gates -and, instead of being stopped and turned back, -we are politely saluted by the guard. There -must be more of this, and I believe Tenshi Sama -will order the Phœnix Car, and promenade in -the city. But how do you propose to restore -order out of this chaos?”</p> - -<p>Kano did not confide enough in his visitor to -disclose his plans. He replied: “Before building -a new house, my lord, it is best to clear -away the debris, especially after a conflagration. -But, as your lordship knows, I have been -at Nagato for some time, and am very anxious -to know what has happened. I shall feel much -relieved if you will inform me.”</p> - -<p>“I do not know how it came to pass, but -after Iyemochi’s visit it was easier for the palace -attendants to secure passports, and finally -they were no longer demanded. Sanjo, Iwakura, -and myself, went in and out as we pleased, -and I met a great many rnin, all good fellows. -Sometimes we had a little bout, and swords -were drawn. Taken altogether, there is a very<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span> -pleasant change in our condition, and I only -hope it will last.”</p> - -<p>Kano saw that Karassu Maru would not help -him much in his scheme. When his visitor -departed, he called Inouye:</p> - -<p>“Have you still the haori which Karassu -Maru lent you?”</p> - -<p>“I have, my lord.”</p> - -<p>“Very well; I have mine. Let us see if -they will carry us past the gates of the Gosho.”</p> - -<p>The two gentlemen went out. Although -they met numerous parties of boisterous samurai, -they were not molested, since the crest -they wore was known as that of a kuge. When -they came to the gate, Kano walked boldly in, -followed by Inouye.</p> - -<p>“Your tablets, please, gentlemen,” said one -of the guards, bowing.</p> - -<p>“How now, fellow,” cried Kano haughtily, -“who has dared instruct you to address gentlemen -of our quality? Take his name,” he said -to Inouye, but the man disappeared, and they -passed in.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span>Kano remembered the way, and, arriving at -the house where they had met before, he inquired -for Sanjo. He found, however, that -this was the residence of Iwakura, and requested -to be announced. After waiting a few -moments, he found himself in the presence of -the man who was one of the chief instruments -in the re-organization of the empire.</p> - -<p>“I am glad to see you, Mr. Councillor,” said -the kuge, “and you come at an opportune time. -Some of us who are interested in the present -movement, were going to meet later on. But -I will request them to come as soon as possible.” -He clapped his hands, and gave some directions -to the kneeling attendant. Presently a handsome -screen was brought in and placed behind -Kano; then he heard the opening of the sho ji -behind the screen, and surmised that the meeting -would be attended by a person of so exalted -a rank as to be invisible to him.</p> - -<p>Iwakura entertained his visitors in that -charming manner, peculiar to the highbred -Japanese. It appeared only a few minutes to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span> -Kano, when norimono began to arrive, and he -and his friend were presented to the possessors -of names, familiar to every Japanese, high or -low. Ichijo, Nijo, Higashi Kuze,<a href="#A81">[81]</a> all historic -names, appeared. At last a norimono arrived, -and Iwakura himself hastened to receive -this visitor, who, with his attendants was ushered -into the room behind. The other kuge -kept up their conversation, but Kano noticed -from the terms of self-debasement, and the frequent -drawing of the breath, that the last caller -must be, indeed, near to the throne. At last -Iwakura reappeared, and took his seat.</p> - -<p>“My lords,” he said, “we have the unexpected -but very gratifying pleasure of having -as visitor the man who really started the movement -which led to such surprising results. Mr. -Kano is the trusted Councillor of our friend -Mori of Nagato, and this gentleman, Mr. -Inouye, he tells me, is his right hand. He has -also informed me, while waiting for your lordships -to arrive, that he has a thousand brave -and devoted samurai at hand, ready to do His<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span> -Majesty’s bidding, and declares himself ready -to answer any question it may please your -lordships to ask.”</p> - -<p>Five minutes passed in performing the prostrations -incident to this introduction, and Nijo, -as the oldest of the kuge present, spoke:—</p> - -<p>“I do not understand quite, Mr. Councillor, -why the peace of the Gosho should be interrupted. -His Lordship Iwakura tells us that -you are the cause, and I doubt not that you have -good reasons. At the same time, I protest that -all these proceedings are highly improper, and -that there is no precedent for them. I am told -that the barbarians are at our door. Well, so -they were six hundred years ago;<a href="#A82">[82]</a> but His -Majesty, as in duty bound, visited the shrine -at Is,<a href="#A83">[83]</a> and implored the aid of the divine ancestors. -The result is well-known. But the -Gosho was not disturbed. To guard his country -properly, His Majesty needs repose and -contemplation. We like it not, Mr. Councillor, -that his sacred presence should be disturbed.”</p> - -<p>Kano and Inouye bowed low, and were silent.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> -After some moments of decorous silence, the -kuge next in years spoke:—</p> - -<p>“I agree with my lord Nijo. Why does not -the Shogun expel the barbarians, as is his duty? -The Court has ordered him to do so, and he has -replied that he will do it as soon as the necessary -preparations are made. So that matter is -settled, it seems to me. I do not see what -Mori, Shimadzu, and other captains have to do -with it. His Majesty issues his commands to -the Shogun who executes them reverently. -These proceedings are highly improper, as my -Lord Nijo said. If Mori desires any favor -from the Fount of All Honor, let him apply to -Iyemochi, and when his request, properly endorsed, -reaches us through the proper channel, -it will be considered and answered in due time.”</p> - -<p>It was now Sanjo’s turn. “I have listened, -my lords, with profound satisfaction to the lessons -drawn from the ripe experience of my -seniors. But I submit that our visitors be -heard, since, having the misfortune to be mere -soldiers, they may not be able to appreciate to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> -the full extent the wisdom concentrated within -the Council of Kuge.”</p> - -<p>At this appeal to their forbearance, the kuge -bowed, and Kano, seizing his fan, began in a -low but distinct voice:—</p> - -<p>“I feel deeply, my lords, my own unworthiness, -and appreciate the honor of being admitted -to this august assembly.” Here he prostrated -himself, and remained fully three minutes, -his head resting upon his outstretched -hands. He then recovered his position, and -continued:—</p> - -<p>“Only a few years ago the country of the -gods was at peace, thanks to Tenshi Sama and -his intercession with the divine ancestors, and -the repose of the Son of Heaven was undisturbed. -Suddenly black ships appeared near -the capital of the Tokugawa, and, being ordered -to withdraw, refused to obey this reasonable -behest. What did Tokugawa do? -Smite the disobedient barbarians and hurl them -back to their own desolate country? No! -<i>Tokugawa was afraid.</i> The strangers departed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> -but returned with reinforcements the next year. -There had been ample time to call upon the -clans to prepare for their visit, but <i>Tokugawa -was afraid</i>. The Go rojiu pretended to be unprepared, -and conceded all that the barbarians -saw fit to ask. It was not much, but it was -only the beginning of their demands. Four -years later they asked more. They wanted -land and the Tokugawa sold what was not -his to sell. It was only a few tsubo,<a href="#A84">[84]</a> in a -poor fishing village, but it was soil of the country -of the gods, part of the inheritance of the -Son of Heaven. What did the divine ancestors -say about this alienation of their sacred -soil? My lords, you lay the blame of the disturbance -of the sacred bosom upon me. I and -my clan are ready to expiate our sin, if by doing -so we can restore peace to the Light of our Day, -to Tenshi Sama. But that peace can be restored -only by placating His Majesty’s ancestors, -when they receive back their own.”</p> - -<p>Unconsciously, for Kano was not acting but -meant every word he said, he stopped and allowed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span> -time for his words to sink into their -breasts. No one lost his decorum, still, a movement -of the fan, or a readjustment of the haori, -betrayed the uneasiness of the kuge.</p> - -<p>Kano resumed suddenly, with a slightly elevated -voice:</p> - -<p>“Aye, the divine ancestors must be placated, -peace must be restored within the sacred walls -of the Gosho, but the barbarians must be expelled -before it can be accomplished. Hark -ye! my lords. Myriads of samurai have come -to this capital, and there is but one shout: -Sonno-Jo! Revere the Emperor! Expel the -foreigners! The breeze from the ocean gently -fans our cheeks, so long as the gods look placidly -down, while we, their humble servants, -pay them our dues in respectful homage. But -sometimes we fail in our duty. The breeze -turns into a wind, the wind into a tai-fu,<a href="#A85">[85]</a> and -it sweeps all before it, the hovel of the laborer -and the roof of the temple. What mortal can -bid it refrain? The Yamato Damashii is the -lovable zephyr of our country, but the presence<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span> -of these insolent barbarians has converted it -into a mighty wind. Hark ye, my lords, do -you hear it swell? Sonno Jo! It is turning -into a tai-fu now!”</p> - -<p>Assuming the plaintive and appealing voice -to which the language lends itself so well, Kano -continued as if in self-commune:—</p> - -<p>“We heed it not. The storm centres in our -beloved land where the sun rises, but there is -no rift in the clouded sky. The sun smiles -upon the myriads of ships, cleaving the blue -waters, and hurrying to the shores of our land. -It is one long procession. Their spies have -told the barbarians in their inhospitable regions -of the one country where the gods love to dwell. -From tens of rude, insolent men, they have increased -to hundreds; they are now thousands -and will soon be myriads. Tokugawa is no -longer a vassal of Tenshi Sama, he is a servant -to men scarce better than brutes. Hyogo and -Osaka, are in their possession. The two roads -to the sacred capital are crowded with them. -Ye gods! will ye not at least preserve the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span> -Gosho and your child? They press against the -wall, it gives way. Where is the peace and -contemplation of the sacred enclosure now!”</p> - -<p>His sighing voice melted into the silence, -when in a strident tone that made them start, he -concluded:—</p> - -<p>“No! Sonno Jo roars out of a myriad -throats. Myriads of brawny hands clasp the -swords of Japan. Tenshi Sama has spoken -through his brave miya and kuge. Clan after -clan marches on, sun of victory for Yamato -Damashii has come forth from behind the -clouds and inspired Dai Nippon’s sons. The -Tokugawa has paid the penalty of treason; the -barbarians have fled before the edge of the -Soul of Samurai. Peace is restored and flowers -innumerable and of brilliant colors delight -the eye. After the tempest calm. Not that -treacherous, oppressive air, forerunner of disaster. -But the bright atmosphere which succeeds -the storm as surely as prosperous peace -will follow the tempest raging now, and which -is the punishment for our neglect of duty.”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XVIII<br /> -FLIGHT</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Solemn</span> was the scene, after Kano had -concluded his address. He himself was -prostrate once more, and remained in -that position for more than five minutes, while -not even the rustling of a silk hakama disturbed -the silence. They sat like men of wax, immovable -and serene. There was a rustling of -silk behind the screen, it was removed, and a -gentleman on whose haori appeared the imperial -crest entered. All prostrated themselves, -and he answered with a dignified bow. One of -his attendants brought a cushion, and when he -had squatted down, he said:</p> - -<p>“Rise, Mr. Councillor.”</p> - -<p>Kano and Inouye obeyed.</p> - -<p>“We have heard your statement and we approve -of Mori’s loyalty as expressed by you.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span> -Your report will receive our early attention and -will be submitted to the proper authority. Fear -not, son of Nagato, Tenshi Sama and our ancestors -are keeping guard. Now go! You -will receive our orders. Tomomi,<a href="#A86">[86]</a> see to it -that these gentlemen are refreshed.” He bowed -slightly and left the room. The other kuge -followed as if they were glad to get away, and -only Sanjo and Iwakura remained.</p> - -<p>The latter ordered refreshments, and when -they were brought, said: “Mr. Kano, I, and I -suppose my lord Sanjo, are highly pleased. We -have been in the minority, and have been in -grave danger of our lives. But you have converted -the miya nearest to the throne, and -whatever happens, he is beyond danger, and a -most powerful ally. Still, our council is large; -and if Tokugawa replaces the present commandant -by one who will make his authority -felt, we shall be just where we were before.”</p> - -<p>“My lords, may I speak freely? I do not -ask safety for myself. My life is worthless, -but my cause and my clan are dear to me.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> -Promise me that if I exceed the limits of propriety, -or if what I say appears to you as high -treason, you will permit me to let me expiate -my transgression alone, and that it shall never -go beyond these walls. My young friend will -share my doom, so that the secret will remain -locked up between you.”</p> - -<p>Both Iwakura and Sanjo bowed assent.</p> - -<p>Kano after thanking them, said:—“Imperial -orders are issued over His Majesty’s sign manual, -and the tenor of those orders depends naturally -upon the sympathy of the kuge in charge. -Could not a change be effected by which it was -placed within the hands of one favorable to the -cause of Japan?”</p> - -<p>Iwakura looked at Sanjo and shook his head. -“Impossible,” he said. “The sign manual is -held for life by one appointed by Tenshi Sama -upon the request of a majority of the council. -No,” he repeated, “that can not be done.”</p> - -<p>“In that case,” suggested Inouye, speaking -before Kano could commit himself, “can not his -Majesty be induced to ride to Hakone and drive<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span> -the foreigners into the ocean. This would call -forth such a host as Dai Nippon has never seen. -There would be no danger, no risk even, for I -am sure that the barbarians would not await the -approach of such an army. They would take -ship and depart, with the conviction that Dai -Nippon was opposed to their presence.”</p> - -<p>“That might be done,” said Sanjo, approvingly. -“Send me an official letter signed with -the seal of your clan and containing that request, -and I shall submit it to the Council. But -do it at once, and while the impression made by -Mr. Kano is vivid. Let there be no delay.”</p> - -<p>“If your lordships will order one of your -servants to go with us, the letter shall be written -at once,” replied Kano, preparing to depart. -As they were leaving, a gentleman approached -followed by a page. “Are these the gentlemen -from Nagato?” he inquired. Being assured -of their identity, he took a long package from -the page and severing a cord, presented one to -Kano and one to Inouye. “His Imperial Highness -Prince Arisugawa bids you accept these as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> -a token of his good will,” he said. Both prostrated -themselves and lifted the present to their -forehead. When they arrived home, they found -each a costly sword.</p> - -<p>The letter was written and submitted to the -Council. Kano’s address must have made a -deep impression, for he was informed in a private -communication from Sanjo that his suggestion -had been adopted, and orders had been -issued to make the necessary preparations. At -this time the fate of the foreigners in Japan -hung by a thread.</p> - -<p>Of all the clans of the Tokugawa family,—Iyeyasu -had endowed his sons with ample estates,—all -but Aidzu seemed as if stricken with -palsy at the storm raging about them. But -Aidzu, in its mountain home, had preserved its -manhood, and despatched to Kyoto a man of -penetration and dauntless courage. Shortly -after taking command, the guards at the palace -gates were quadrupled, and all ingress and -egress prohibited, except under a most severe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> -system of passports, obtained from the commandant -himself.</p> - -<p>On the 30th of September, 1863, Kano was -sitting in his room overlooking the accounts of -the clan, when Ito and Inouye entered hurriedly. -There was no diminution of the salutations, -and both waited until the Councillor -spoke. Kano, however, saw at once that something -important had occurred, and he simply requested -them to speak.</p> - -<p>“Your lordship,” said Ito, “there is something -in the air. The commandant of the castle -has issued orders to the people to close their -houses and keep within, on penalty of being cut -down. Armed patrols are in every street, and -strong bodies of Aidzu men have taken up positions -near the palace.” At this moment an officer -of the guard at the gate entered, and beckoned -to Kano, who rose angrily and demanded -if he had forgotten his manners. His explanation, -however, seemed to satisfy the Councillor, -for he said: All right, and hurried out. Presently<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span> -he returned accompanied by seven gentlemen, -among whom Ito and Inouye recognized -Sanjo and Iwakura.</p> - -<p>Rigidly observant of the salutations the company -was at last seated, when Karassu Maru -remarked:</p> - -<p>“Mr. Councillor, I hope Mori’s larder is well -supplied, for I am afraid you are going to have -us as your guests for some time.”</p> - -<p>Kano bowed and calling a servant ordered -dinner to be prepared, when Sanjo spoke.</p> - -<p>“My lord Karassu Maru chooses an odd -time for pleasantry, but I am afraid, Mr. Councillor, -that there is more truth in what he says -than can be agreeable to you or us. The Council -has honored myself and the gentlemen with -me, with a decree of banishment.”</p> - -<p>Perturbed as he was, Kano bowed, and said -simply:—I hope that it may please your lordships -to accept the hospitality of Mori such as -it is, but which is freely offered. Permit me to -look after the safety of your lordships.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span>He went to the quarters of the commandant. -“Have all the men under arms, and prepare to -defend the gates. See that no man bearing the -Tokugawa crest enters upon your life. Admit -all stragglers, but no one is permitted to leave -the yashiki except on written order over my -seal. See that the arms and equipments are in -proper order, for at five o’clock we march. Any -disobedience will be punished most severely. Is -this understood?”</p> - -<p>“It is.”</p> - -<p>“Very well. Send for Mr. Hattori.”</p> - -<p>“He is in my room now.”</p> - -<p>Kano entered. “Hattori,” he said, “we -have received a severe check, but there is -no time to explain. Ride for your life to Nagato, -and inform Mori that seven kuge have -been banished, and will accept his hospitality. -Do not let him entertain the idea of changes in -the rooms of the palace, but tell him that we -shall be there almost as soon as you. As you -pass by, engage rooms in the usual temples.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span>Hattori at once ordered a horse. Satisfied -that there would be no delay, Kano sent for -Ekichi:</p> - -<p>“Dress as a boy of the common people,” he -said. “In a few minutes Mr. Fujii will give -you a basket of eggs, and tell you their price. -Then go slowly to the castle; notice closely -everything you see, and report to me. Try to -sell your eggs to the soldiers of the guard, but -be careful that they do not suspect you. Be -back by about four.”</p> - -<p>The boy was ready in a few minutes, and the -Councillor himself saw him through the gate -and gave him the pass word. He then returned -to his guests, and informed them that they -would leave for Choshiu at five.</p> - -<p>While they were eating their dinner, Karassu -Maru entertained the company, this was -the time for relaxation, and his remarks elicited -not unfrequently peals of laughter.</p> - -<p>“I think that Honami is to blame for the -whole thing. He came to me this morning, -and said:—</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span>“‘What do you think? I am going to buy -some rabbits.’</p> - -<p>“It did not interest me very much, but for -the sake of politeness, I asked: ‘where?’</p> - -<p>“‘Oh!’ he said, ‘I have seen some beauties -in Karassu Maru cho.’<a href="#A87">[87]</a></p> - -<p>“I thought that he was indulging in personalities, -and said:</p> - -<p>“‘You don’t take me for a rabbit-warren do -you?’</p> - -<p>“‘You? No; I wish you were.’”</p> - -<p>Shouts of laughter greeted this sally, and the -speaker laughed as heartily as the others. -“Well,” he continued, “I grew tired of his -interesting conversation, and remarked that the -rabbits might be waiting for him. This suggestion -seemed to strike him, for away he -trotted.</p> - -<p>“He was not gone long before he came back -in a great temper, and begged me to go with -him to the gate, because they would not let him -pass. He had told the guard, he said, that he -had a very important appointment, but they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span> -would not listen to reason.” There was a dangerous -glitter in Karassu Maru’s eye, as he -continued: “I thought that the guard might -have taken liberties with a kuge, and was going -to give him a lesson in politeness. But -when we came to the gate, an officer stepped out -and said: ‘Pardon me, my lord, but I am under -orders to let no one pass. The Council is in -session and your lordship will soon know the -reason. I am compelled to escort you to your -house.’ The fellow was serious enough, and -under guard of a dozen men I returned, Honami -in his chair asking constantly about his -rabbits. I had no stomach for them then.”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XIX<br /> -BATTLE AND DEFEAT</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">It</span> was a sullen procession which filed out of -Choshiu’s yashiki on that 30th of September, -and it was well for the Tokugawa -that no armed opposition was offered to them. -Twelve hundred deeply insulted samurai could -make sad havoc among any force, and these -men hoped for the fray. They had marched -in close ranks with seven norimono, well -guarded between them. Kano was on horseback -and had assumed command. He, too, had -thought of the possibility of a conflict; but -Ekichi had discovered that Satsuma had also -been expelled, and that Choshiu would have to -face the united power of Tokugawa. Loyalty -to his clan, and the responsibility for the safety<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span> -of the kuge imposed self-restraint; but they -did not prevent him from being exasperated.</p> - -<p>Past Fushimi<a href="#A88">[88]</a> they marched, and on to -Osaka where they remained over night. The -next morning they stopped at Hyogo; it was -eight days after they had left Kyoto when they -were within their own province, and shortly -after Mori in his state dress received the highly -honored guests, and bade them make themselves -at home.</p> - -<p>Kano heard that Sawa had disappeared. -That was well. Choshiu’s samurai might not -have liked to see the Tokugawa crest among -them, and the blood of such a poor worthless -creature, could not further the cause. But -Choshiu thirsted for vengeance, and drilling -went on from morning till night. Nagato was -an armed camp.</p> - -<p>Thus passed the winter and spring of the -year 1864. Kano heard that the number of -rnin multiplied at a frightful rate, and that -many were congregating in the suburbs of -Kyoto. Several young samurai applied for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span> -leave of absence, and, when they received a refusal, -sent in their resignations and disappeared.</p> - -<p>The men were exasperated. On the 4th of -August a courier from Kyoto brought news -which caused Kano to call an extra meeting of -the Council. When they had come together, -Kano informed them that in the beginning of -July a body of rnin had petitioned Tenshi -Sama to remove the decree of arrest from Mori, -and to recall the seven kuge and restore them -to honor; but the Council of the Gosho, now -wholly under the influence of Aidzu had not -even vouchsafed a reply. Several hundred -Choshiu men had joined the rnin, and were -preparing to march upon Aidzu.</p> - -<p>This was serious news. What if Aidzu, in -triumph at its success, should secure a decree of -<i>Choteki</i><a href="#A89">[89]</a> against Mori from the servile court. -That must be prevented at any cost! Kano -and Hattori were commissioned to proceed in -all haste to Kyoto, and to restrain their clansmen. -They arrived at the capital on the 15th,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> -and, appealing to the loyalty of their men, succeeded -in bringing them back under Choshiu’s -banner.</p> - -<p>Aidzu did not appreciate this self-control. -On the 19th a Court messenger delivered a -notification at the yashiki that Mori was to be -punished for contumacy, and that Tokugawa -Keiki<a href="#A90">[90]</a> would command the loyal army commissioned -to enforce the Court’s order.</p> - -<p>Kano and Hattori deliberated long and earnestly. -There was not much choice. It was -either to submit to punishment, which would -strike their innocent lord the hardest of all, or -trust to the spirit of unrest and leave the decision -to the sword. The latter alternative was -chosen, and Kano prepared a proclamation. He -demonstrated the justice of his cause and mentioned -the crimes committed by the Tokugawa -since the arrival of Perry; he called upon the -samurai of Japan to aid him in punishing -Aidzu, who was desecrating the private grounds -of Tenshi Sama, and implored the pardon of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span> -the Son of Heaven “for creating a disturbance -so near the wheels of the Chariot.”</p> - -<p>The number of Choshiu men had increased -to 1300. Kano had divided his men in three -divisions, and, at dawn of the 20th of August, -marched to the attack. His intention was to -surround the flower garden of the palace where -Aidzu’s troops were encamped. They were -opposed by the samurai of Aidzu who had been -reenforced by those of Echizen, Kuwana, Hikone, -and other Tokugawa clans. There were -some cannon and muskets; but most of the -men were in armor, and trusted to the keen -native sword. With terrible odds against -them, and no clan coming to their assistance, -Choshiu maintained the fight for two days. A -native historian states that 811 streets, 18 palaces, -44 large yashiki, 630 small yashiki, 112 -Buddhist temples, and 27,000 houses were destroyed. -The same historian says: “The city, -surrounded by a ninefold circle of flowers, entirely -disappeared in one morning in the smoke<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span> -of the flames of a war fire. The Blossom Capital -became a scorched desert.” The end was -such as might have been expected. The Choshiu -men were utterly defeated. Thirty-seven -men were taken prisoner and beheaded in -prison. Kano died in battle, and his body was -probably cremated, for it was not found.</p> - -<p>When the fugitives began to arrive in Nagato, -there was almost a panic among the -samurai. Ito and Inouye, now recognized as -leaders, restored quiet. It was not the defeat -which had the effect of frightening men for -whom pain nor death has any terror: it was -the term <i>choteki</i>, which rendered their arm -nerveless. It was only when Inouye proved to -them that it was Aidzu and not Tenshi Sama -who had inflicted this disgrace upon them that -their courage returned together with their self-control.</p> - -<p>The clan would soon stand in need of it. By -Kano’s order they had continued to fire upon -vessels entering the Strait of Shimonoseki. -They had Tenshi Sama’s mandate to do so, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span> -it had not been revoked. On the 5th of September -a fleet of powerful vessels appeared, and -bombarded Choshiu’s forts. The men stood to -their guns like heroes, but again the odds were -against them. The batteries were blown about -their ears, and when landing parties attacked -the forts, individual daring backed by swords, -could not stand before the withering fire of -trained troops. The clan despatched Ito and -Inouye to make peace, and the terms hard as -they were, were accepted.</p> - -<p>It was two days after the bombardment, and -a meeting of the Council had been called in the -great hall of the castle. Ito and Inouye, both -Councillors now, were present. After all were -seated, Ito opened the meeting.</p> - -<p>“Gentlemen,” he said, “there is little use in -mourning for losses, since it will not repair -them. But losses may be turned into an advantage, -if we profit by the lessons we may derive -from them.</p> - -<p>“The foreign fleet which attacked us had -such heavy metal, that our guns and gunners<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span> -could not stand before it. It was a hail storm -of iron and we went down before the blast. -But when I saw that the barbarians were landing -men, I thought that we were going to have -our turn. They were but a handful, those barbarians, -and man for man, our samurai would -have made short work of them. But we could -not get near them. They moved as one man -and in the thickest of the fight a word of command -was obeyed as if it was a machine instead -of a body of men. It was their discipline and -drill that defeated us, gentlemen, and we must -acquire that same order and skill.</p> - -<p>“We have met two foes, and twice we have -been defeated. The barbarians will not molest -us so long as we do not molest them, and, for -the present at least, we shall leave that to other -clans who may wish to pay for some experience. -We stand face to face with another foe, -and we are fighting for our very existence. -Tokugawa would have us Choteki, gentlemen, -and we must turn the tables upon them. We -can do it, never fear! But first we must learn<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> -the drill and tactics from the barbarians that -we may give Aidzu a surprise as the foreigners -surprised us. For that purpose we must engage -instructors and purchase arms. I now -propose that Mr. Inouye be appointed with full -authority to act in this matter, and that the -treasurer of the clan furnish him with money.”</p> - -<p>“But,” objected one of the older members, -“the barbarian instructors will have to live -among us; will they be safe? We do not want -any more trouble with them now.”</p> - -<p>“Your lordship speaks well. We do not -want any more trouble with them <i>now</i>. The -next time we have trouble with them, it will not -be we who pay the bills. They will be as safe -here as in their own homes. Our samurai shall -know why they are here. They shall know -that we must dissemble; pretend that we are -pleased with our defeat, and that we love the -men who invaded our soil. But this dissembling -will not last forever, and a time shall come -when this defeat is wiped out. May we live to -see it!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span>The order was then passed and Ito resumed: -“The next thing that <i>must</i> be done is to come -to an understanding with Satsuma and the -other Southern clans. Yes, I know, gentlemen, -the dish is not palatable, but there is nothing -for it but to eat it.” A feud existed -between Satsuma and Choshiu and to the -older Councillors this advice was extremely repugnant. -“We have no choice. Choshiu -alone can not reduce the united Tokugawa -Clans, and Tokugawa must be deposed unless -we wish to see the barbarian our master. -Satsuma, after all, is of our blood, and has the -same interests. Tosa too, must join. I propose -then that I undertake this disagreeable -work; somebody must do it, and I do not suppose -that any one cares for the honor.”</p> - -<p>There was a silence. At last one of the -Councillors spoke: I suppose that Mr. Ito is -right. Let it be as he wishes. I agree with -him that of the two, Satsuma is preferable to -the barbarians.</p> - -<p>The order was entered upon the books and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span> -the council adjourned. The two friends left -together. Inouye said he would start the next -day.</p> - -<p>“Have you any objection if I take Ekichi -with me?”</p> - -<p>Ito looked up, smiled, and said: “None at -all.”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XX<br /> -DRILLING</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">The</span> severe defeats suffered by Choshiu -had reduced the number of samurai -of the clan. After thinking deeply -upon the matter, Ito proposed to the Council a -measure which met with the most strenuous -opposition, and, being earnestly supported by -Inouye, was at last adopted with many an -ominous shake of the head. It was, namely, -that the ranks should be recruited from among -the young and strong members of the people. -The older members of the council urged, not -unnaturally, that the samurai would never suffer -such an infringement upon the privileges -of their rank. Both Ito and Inouye had more -confidence in the loyalty of the samurai, and -they were right. The very best of foreign -rifles had been purchased by Inouye and arrived<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span> -in due time. Then the instructors came, -and drilling went on from morning to night. -The young men of the people vied with the -samurai in zeal and enthusiasm, they were all -equally and regularly paid and well treated. -After some time artillery began to arrive, and -a corps of men was detailed to learn gunnery. -Among all the young men there was none more -zealous than Ekichi. After a year’s drill, when -officers were appointed he was made a lieutenant.</p> - -<p>In the shadow side of the dual part in the -Japanese character, there is no passion so strong -as that of revenge. Subterfuge, the most dastardly -treachery, are praiseworthy and commendable, -if they serve to obtain revenge for -the killing of a near relation. The written -constitution of old Japan (Legacy of Iyeyasu), -prescribed:</p> - -<p>“In respect to revenging injury done to master -or father, it is granted by the wise and virtuous -(sage)<a href="#A91">[91]</a> that you and the injurer can -not live together under the canopy of heaven.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span>“A person harboring such vengeance shall -notify the same in writing to the Criminal -Court; and although no check or hindrance -may be offered to his carrying out his desire -within the period allowed for that purpose, it is -forbidden that the chastisement of an enemy -be attended with riot.</p> - -<p>“Fellows who neglect to give notice of their -intended revenge are like wolves of pretext, and -their punishment or pardon should depend upon -the circumstances of the case.”</p> - -<p>Ekichi suspected Sawa. If he had been -asked for the reason, he would have been at a -loss, except that he had seen him at Kyoto on -the day of the flight of the kug. He had -never liked the spy, and he had worshiped his -father. The lesson of self-control, thoroughly -mastered by him, enabled him to bend his mind -upon his studies. But the moments which he -allowed himself for relaxation, were spent in -brooding upon revenge.</p> - -<p>Inouye suspected it, and for that reason had -taken him with him to Yokohama. While there<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span> -he had found time to go to Kanagawa where -he called upon the physician in his samurai -dress. The family scarcely recognized their -former houseboy who, in gratitude for former -kindness, presented his late employer with a -choice piece of lacquer. Inouye had watched -Ekichi keenly during this visit, and had noticed -the absolute self control with which he received -the advances of the barbarians. At dinner, he -simply imitated Inouye but with such perfect -self-possession, that it seemed as if he had been -using knife and fork all his life, although it was -the first time he saw them.</p> - -<p>At Yokohama, too, his face expressed no -emotion at what he saw; only when in passing -the hatoba, Inouye remarked that his father -had worked here, the boy prostrated himself -and saluted. He was utterly unconscious of -the laughter of some rude barbarians. Inouye -noticed, however, that he asked for the names -in English, after he had heard him converse in -that language.</p> - -<p>When they returned to Nagato, he had asked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span> -to be enrolled in the army and his request was -granted. Inouye had offered to teach him English, -an offer which was gladly accepted, and -he made such progress that he was able to read -understandingly and to keep up a fair conversation.</p> - -<p>The Tokugawa in the meanwhile was boasting -of how the Shogun would annihilate Choshiu, -and in 1865 Iyemochi himself took the -field. The foreigners at Yokohama were permitted -to witness the march of the redoubted -troops. They came straggling by, as an eye-witness -describes in bands of three or four, a motley -array, with very little stomach for the business -in hand. The same witness states that, upon arrival -at Odawara<a href="#A92">[92]</a> the majority of the higher -samurai applied for leave of absence on account -of sickness; whereupon they were told that -they could go, but that their revenues would be -taken from them, whereupon they recovered -their health. They remained that year quartered -at Kyoto and Osaka, for the Shogun did -not care to lead such an army against a brave<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span> -and desperate clan. He tried to induce other -clans to join him, but they refused flatly.</p> - -<p>Stung by the ridicule heaped upon them by -Japanese and foreigner alike, the Tokugawa -troops at last opened the campaign, in the summer -of 1866. Instead of attempting to overwhelm -the clan by sheer force of numbers, Iyemochi -divided his army into three divisions, -each of which was separately routed by Choshiu. -This restored the prestige of the clan, -while it ruined that of Tokugawa.</p> - -<p>In every battle Ekichi had excelled for coolness -and courage, and it was predicted that he -would rise as his father had done before him. -In the latter part of September the news was -brought to Nagato that Iyemochi, the Shogun -was dead. Shortly later it also became known -that Tokugawa Keiki had succeeded, but by -appointment from Tenshi Sama.</p> - -<p>The death of Tenshi Sama Osahito,<a href="#A93">[93]</a> better -known by his posthumous name of Komei<a href="#A94">[94]</a> -Tenno, and the succession of his son Mutsuhito, -then a boy of fifteen produced a great change.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span> -Ito and Inouye held frequent and long conferences, -and the former was often absent from the -clan.</p> - -<p>Their own experience within Choshiu’s narrow -limits, had convinced them that they were -on the right track. The whole strength of Choshiu’s -clan had been called out, and had repeatedly -defeated the overwhelming forces of the -Tokugawa; but it had been able to do so only -after acquiring the principles of foreign art of -war. Ito disliked and mistrusted the foreigners, -whereas Inouye’s experience as well as -his strong power of discernment rather inclined -him toward them. Both, however, were agreed -in their love of their country; and both agreed -that the Japanese must acquire every particle of -knowledge in the possession of the barbarians. -More than that: their manners, habits, and customs, -must be studied and such as served in any -way to strengthen the national life, must be -introduced and adapted. But before anything -could be done in that direction, the Tokugawa -must be laid low. Nothing could possibly be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span> -done so long as a clan so degenerate was foremost -in the country.</p> - -<p>Ito went to Satzuma, and met OKubo, Saigo, -and Terashima. In OKubo and Terashima he -met men who felt and thought like he. Saigo, -a splendid specimen of manhood, over six feet -in height, was equally predisposed against the -Tokugawa, but was not able to look beyond the -clan. As there was no warrant against any of -these men except those of the Choshiu clan, -they moved to Kyoto, and the rebuilt capital -again became a hotbed of intrigue.</p> - -<p>Tokugawa Keiki declined the appointment of -Shogun, but was compelled to accept. The -councillors of the several Tokugawa clans were -very well aware that their sun had set, and -urged his appointment as of a man who was -personally popular with the other clans. But -Keiki perceived that the days of the Shogunate -were past. It is not improbable that he himself -perceived, as Ii Navsuke had done before, that -united Japan only would be able to maintain -its independence and such a Japan could not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span> -exist under two heads. He offered repeatedly -to resign, but the Gosho had no liking for the -idea of leaving its repose. The majority of the -members clung to the ideas of Nijo. As to the -boy emperor, he had no more voice than his -father had had before him, or than Mori possessed -within Choshiu’s clan. In the regeneration -of Japan, no help could be expected from -Miya, Kuge, or Daimiyo, long since converted -into puppets by the very duality of the national -character. The men who undertook the work -were unknown nobodies; but it was exactly by -such men that the different clans had been ruled -separately, and by combining together they -could rule all the clans, that is Japan, collectively.</p> - -<p>Strictly speaking, therefore, there was no -vital change in the affairs of Japan so long as -the government was nominally in the hands of -a figurehead, and in reality in those of the samurai. -In all these troubles, the people had no -share, nor did they take any interest in them, -except when their own personal interests were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span> -directly affected. In the eyes of the dominating -class the people had no existence; and -when, in the documents of those days the word -“people” is used, it refers solely to the samurai.</p> - -<p>Although Aidzu was still in possession of -Kyoto, and in charge of the gates of the Gosho, -the half-hearted orders of Keiki permitted the -leaders of Satsuma and other clans to communicate -with their friends within the Council, -and once again the men who were for repose at -any cost felt the ground moving from under -their feet. They brought pressure to bear upon -the Shogun, and he once again offered his resignation. -It was accepted on the 9th of November, -1867, but upon condition that for the -present he should continue the administration.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XXI<br /> -DOWN WITH TOKUGAWA!</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Great</span> events were expected when the -year 1868 dawned. Couriers arrived -daily at Nagato from Kyoto, and our -two friends, as well as the banished kuge were -in a fever of expectation. Ekichi had asked and -obtained furlough, and had left for Kyoto. He -was greatly attached to Inouye, and frequently -forestalled his wishes, but in a quiet, unobtrusive -way. He was, moreover, so sedate in his -habits, that there was no cause for watching -him. However much Ito and Inouye would -have done for him for the sake of his late -father, they felt that his future could be -safely left to himself.</p> - -<p>The two friends had taken dinner together -on the 7th of January, when the galloping of a -horse was heard, and the animal stopped evidently<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span> -in front of the yashiki. After a slight -delay, a servant appeared and announced Mr. -Kano. A moment later Ekichi entered, somewhat -flushed. They saluted, and Inouye who -observed him closely, said:</p> - -<p>“You came on horseback and evidently had -a long journey. Have you had dinner?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir, I did not wish to loiter on the -road.”</p> - -<p>A servant was ordered to serve dinner to the -guest. After he had finished, Inouye resumed:</p> - -<p>“You bring important news, do you not?”</p> - -<p>“Satsuma, Tosa, and some other clans took -possession of the Gosho, four days ago, and -Arisugawa no Miya is guardian on His Majesty.”</p> - -<p>Inouye clapped his hands. When his attendant -appeared, he told him to go to the castle, -and request the kuge to honor him with a call. -Ito, who had been charged with the command -of the army, rose and said: “Shall we march -in the morning?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” was the reply, “that will be best.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span>The two friends had so often considered -what they would do when this time should arrive, -that no further consultation was necessary. -Ito went first to the most active Councillor, -and explained to him what had happened; -he then proceeded to the barracks, and gave -orders that the army was to march at six in the -morning. When he returned, he found the -kuge, highly pleased at the prospect of their -speedy return. They knew that, with Arisugawa -as adviser, Tenshi Sama would restore -them to honor, and Mori would be exculpated. -Indeed, at four o’clock in the morning a messenger -arrived bringing the official papers.</p> - -<p>The two Councillors breakfasted with the -kuge. During the meal, Ito said:</p> - -<p>“We must make hurried marches, gentlemen. -Tokugawa will not submit peaceably. -If our friends prevail, it means the ruin of the -Tokugawa men; hence I expect we shall have -trouble.”</p> - -<p>The army marched out, leaving only a sufficient -number of men to guard the territory of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span> -the clan. It was now that the difference between -samurai and an army on the march could -be best observed. The men stepped out evenly -in close ranks, and easily, and without apparent -fatigue performed a two days’ journey. The -kuge were surprised. Ito and Inouye explained -what had been done, and the reason for -it. Whereas the daimiyo had never traveled -to Kyoto in less than seven days, the Choshiu -men arrived at their yashiki within four days -from the time they left Nagato.</p> - -<p>The kuge were escorted to the Palace. Here -they found that an entirely new order prevailed. -The allied clans guarded the gates, but permitted -free ingress and egress to all samurai except -such as bore the Tokugawa crest. An imperial -decree had been issued abolishing the -office of Shogun, and declaring that the government -would be conducted by the imperial -court. Negotiations were being conducted -with Keiki to arrive at an equitable settlement.</p> - -<p>Brought up as he had been as the son of -Mito, Keiki had always trusted to his councillors,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span> -and was quite as ignorant of affairs as -Mori. He has been accused of vacillation, but -personally he was not consulted at all. Answers, -of which he knew nothing, were given -in his name and under his seal. It was quite -natural that among his councillors there should -be two parties, the one advocating submission, -the other resistance. The answer depended -upon the majority among his councillors.</p> - -<p>At last it was decided by his advisers that he -should leave Kyoto and withdraw to Osaka. -He was escorted by the two clans of Aidzu and -Kuwana, both intensely attached to the house -of Iyeyasu, and unspoiled. Their leaders urged, -and almost compelled Keiki to fight. Himself -possessed of patriotic impulses, he refused.</p> - -<p>The new government at Kyoto dreaded war; -not from fear, but on account of the probable -consequences. Sanjo and Iwakura had been -reinstated and were often in conference with -Ito, Inouye, Goto, OKubo, and Saigo. It was -plainly evident that the government could not -be carried on without revenue, and the Court<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span> -possessed nothing but a pittance allotted to it -from Tokugawa’s superfluity. If war should -follow, Tokugawa had resources, while the -court had none. Even at present the Court -depended entirely upon the generosity of the -clans which had been instrumental in effecting -the revolution.</p> - -<p>But the ex-Shogun or his party had also very -good reasons for avoiding civil war. It was -they who would be Choteki this time, and every -Japanese has a horror of that word. Besides, -the Tokugawa clans were divided among themselves. -Echizen and Owari had openly declared -for Tenshi Sama, and had, in fact aided -in ousting Aidzu. There was thus every prospect -of peace, and the Court, to facilitate negotiations, -despatched the daimiyo of Echizen -and Owari, to offer the Tokugawa clan a fair -share in the government.</p> - -<p>Keiki wished to accept; indeed, he was most -anxious to wash his hands of all interference -with politics, but Aidzu and Kuwana would not -have it. They expected to restore the old<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span> -order of things, and Keiki escorted by the two -clans, much against his will, set out upon the -return journey to Kyoto.</p> - -<p>The army of the allied clans was small, being -almost completely composed of Satsuma and -Choshiu men. But these men were excellently -drilled, for Satsuma, too, had had a lesson from -the barbarians, and profited by it. The loyal -army, that is the army of the allied clans had -taken a strong position at Fushimi. The Yodo -river connects this town with Osaka, with a -good road on each bank. The Tokugawa forces -marched by both banks, and were received by -a well-directed artillery fire. The rice fields -prevented them from deploying and, as they -understood nothing but a hand to hand mlee, -they had no chance in taking a strong strategic -position. Three days they attempted to carry -Fushimi and failed. Then they broke and fled, -pursued by the victorious imperialists.</p> - -<p>Ekichi had commanded a battery in this battle, -and had again distinguished himself by his -calmness and steadiness under fire. When the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span> -battle was over, he went to his commanding -officer, and begged to be detailed for the pursuit. -His request was granted, and soon he -was among the foremost of the imperialists. It -was noticed that he did not use his sword, except -in self-defense. Half-way toward Osaka -the pursuers were commanded to halt.</p> - -<p>The imperial forces were not strong enough -to cope with those of the Tokugawa, and orders -were sent to the loyal clans to send reinforcements. -From all parts of the South and West -samurai hurried to support the Tenshi Sama’s -cause and it was not long before the loyal army -set out in pursuit.</p> - -<p>Keiki had escaped from Aidzu by departing -for Yedo on one of his steamships; upon his -arrival there he sent in his submission, but the -mountain clans would not obey his orders. It -is odd that he should not have taken his seal -with him; if these same orders had been issued -over his seal, there is no doubt that Aidzu and -Kuwana would have submitted. But personal -government had for centuries been unknown<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span> -in Japan. If Mori, personally, should have -given an order to Choshiu, nobody would have -paid any attention to it; and if an order to exactly -the opposite effect had appeared over his -seal, it would have been obeyed at once.</p> - -<p>We shall now return to our friends.</p> - -<p>While the Choshiu forces, escorting the recalled -kuge were marching toward Kyoto, Ito -remained behind, quietly biding his time. After -the battle of Fushimi was fought and Keiki had -embarked for Yedo, the Tokugawa officials deserted -their posts and fled. Ito at once went to -the administration building, and declared himself -governor for his Majesty Tenshi Sama. -He took over the government, and prevented -lawlessness.</p> - -<p>Kobe, a part of the beach in the immediate -vicinity of Hyogo had been opened to foreigners, -and Ito declared it his purpose to protect -them. The same policy had been adopted by -those who advised the young Emperor. Japan -was never in a worse position to defy a foreign -power and her leaders were aware of the fact.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span> -One and all they hated the barbarians, but they -loved their country more. They had roughly -outlined a policy which was to make of Japan a -united and great country, and that object they -lost never out of sight.</p> - -<p>At Yedo the Aidzu clan made a stand at the -beautiful temple at Uyeno (Pron. Oo-way-no). -Here Ekichi was in the van. Both parties -fought with desperate courage, but Tokugawa -lost. Among the dead was Kano Ekichi, the -son of the dead leader.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - - - - - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">XXII<br /> -CONCLUSION</h2></div> - - -<p class="drop-cap"><span class="smcap">Thirty-seven</span> years have passed -since this story opened. It is in the -month of May, 1895, and two men -are sitting at a hibachi in an upper room in -Shinagawa, formerly a suburb of Yedo, now a -part of the city of Tokyo. The men were hale -and hearty, but their gray hair, bordering on -white, showed that they were beyond middle -age. Their hair was cut after our fashion, but -one wore a straggling beard, while the other’s -snow-white moustache showed off to advantage -his small mouth.</p> - -<p>The room where they were sitting was at the -back of the second story of a house, which, apparently -at least was of our cottage style of -architecture. If one had pressed the electric -bell, and entered it, he would not have seen anything<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span> -except what might be expected in the -home of a well-to-do American or European. -He might have noticed the taste displayed by -the owner, and the quiet, unobtrusive elegance, -but it would not have caused him to suspect -that he was in the house of a Japanese.</p> - -<p>The whole of the lower floor, except the -kitchen and servants’ rooms, was such as one -might have expected in an opulent American or -English city. The upper story, however, retained -the native simplicity, save that walls, instead -of the light, airy sho ji, helped to support -the roof. The prospect from every side was -lovely, for the house stood on one of the bluffs, -bordering the former Tokaido. That highway -was there still, but its glory has departed. -Every hour, and sometimes more frequently, -trains run between Yokohama and Tokyo, and -thousands of passengers mingle daily in the -large waiting-rooms and in the depot at Shinbashi. -There the former daimiyo comes in -actual contact with the ninzoku, and the kuge -of old stands by the side of the merchant.</p> - - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span>The front of the house gives a view of the -bay, lovely at high tide but disagreeable when -the ebb exposes mud-banks extending three -miles from the shore. It will not be long before -the government will perceive the value of -this land, and the eyesore will disappear. If -Rome could have been built in a day, these -Japanese would have done it.</p> - -<p>If Ito looks from the windows on the right, -toward Shinagawa, his eye must fall upon the -handsome residence of Mori, where the son of -his former lord now leads a life of quiet elegance. -He is well satisfied with it. When Ito, -now higher in rank than his former lord, calls -to pay his respects as he often does, the same -relation seems to exist as in former days. Again -Ito is the simple samurai, his lord the daimiyo, -and in both there is a secret longing for the -days that are past. But when they look about -them that longing ceases, and they are glad and -proud of what they see.</p> - - - -<p>From the windows in the left, Ito looks upon -Tokyo, now grown into one of the world cities.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span> -Has it changed in these thirty-seven years? To -be sure it has, but not oppressively. As we walk -through the streets where dwell the people, -we notice that they are wider and cleaner; but -the houses are still as they were before, although -there is evidence of greater prosperity. -In Ginza, the street of the large shops, we see a -mixture of the occident and orient, not altogether -pleasant; houses built in foreign style, -divided into Japanese rooms or Japanese houses -with imitation foreign stores. Still it is all -Japanese, that is, we can not, even for a moment, -lose sight of the fact that we are in Japan.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_228f.jpg" alt="BUT THE HOUSES ARE STILL AS THEY WERE BEFORE" /></div> -<p class="caption">“BUT THE HOUSES ARE STILL AS THEY WERE BEFORE.”</p> - -<p>But it is within the former castle grounds -that a great change is noticeable; especially at -Sakura, near the spot where Ii Naosuke paid -with his head the hatred of Mito. Where his -yashiki stood is an elegantly built edifice of -brick, a girls’ school, formerly the polytechnic, -and facing the moat are a number of villas. In -the first of these dwelt Sanjo during his life; -next to it is the house once occupied by Shimadzu, -the head of the Satsuma clan, and up the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span> -hill is the palace of Arisugawa, now in mourning, -for its head died some months ago.</p> - -<p>It is quite evident that two strong forces are -working in Japan. The leaders of the people -are sincere in their desire to conform more and -more to occidental ideals, whereas the people -are striving strenuously to return to their former -habits and customs in domestic life. Both -parties are impelled by the same motive, love of -country. But the leaders have more experience -and a wider horizon. They have been -abroad, and judge occidental life, with all its -virtues and vices by the results which they produced. -The people know nothing of foreigners, -except of such with whom they come into -contact, and they have no love for them.</p> - -<p>Thus, as an old friend expressed it to me, all -our modern improvements such as tend toward -enhancing the nation’s greatness and wealth, -have been assimilated. Japan, to-day, could -no more do without railroads, than we could do -without them. It is the same with telegraph -and telephone and other inventions where steam<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span> -or electricity are the motive. The army and -navy have been organized according to the -highest standards, and will keep pace with the -best of the world. Industries have been and are -being organized, and receive careful protection -from the government. But in the home life, -the Japanese have turned back.</p> - -<p>“The luxury of your homes,” said my friend, -“tends toward enervating the race. We do not -need your furniture; it is expensive and inelegant. -We sleep upon our futon as well as you -do upon your spring mattress. In your clothing -you are the slaves of a thing you call fashion, -and every year or oftener you are called -upon to pay tribute to it. Who ever heard of -anything so foolish? Our clothing keeps us -cool in summer, and hot in winter. It is inexpensive, -becoming, and leaves our limbs to their -natural action; what more do we want? As to -your food, I acknowledge that a meat diet is -more strengthening than our usual bill of fare, -and most of us indulge in it once a day. But to -prepare dishes merely to tickle the palate, is both<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span> -foolish and wicked. We want no waste. That is -the reason why I prefer dressing in haori, hakama, -and Kimono, and why I prefer to live in -a Japanese house. If I, or any other Japanese, -visit your country, we conform with your customs -and habits, because we do not wish to give -offense. When you come here, you bring your -customs and habits with you, and parade them -before us, regardless if you give offense or not. -I think in doing so, you act wrongly or at least -in bad taste.”</p> - -<p>“You believe in doing at Rome as the Romans -do,” I said smiling. “But surely one -can not always do so. Excuse me, but most of -your dishes are absolutely repugnant to me.”</p> - -<p>“What does that prove, but that you are a -slave to your stomach. Do you remember when -we first met? It is a long time ago, but I shall -never forget it. The impression of that day is -still vivid within me. I had heard that a barbarian -had come to live in our next door yashiki, -and I wondered what sort of an animal he -was. My father had told me I must be very<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span> -civil when I should see you, and, of course, -there was nothing for it but to mind. I had -come from school when I heard steps behind me -and then somebody grabbed me and I saw you. -It was well that I did not wear my swords at -that time, or we should not be talking here, and -Japan would have paid another indemnity. -You don’t know the fury you raised in me at -your unceremonious introduction. Well, you -dragged me in your yashiki, and placed bread, -butter and sugar before me. Do you remember -that, when your kadzukai came in, I asked -him what those things were, and what you -wanted me to do with them? He told me they -were bread, oil from the cow, (niku no abura), -and sugar, and were there for me to eat. Talk -of repugnant! It was nauseous to me to think -of such a thing as eating ‘oil from the cow.’ -But when I am in America now, I enjoy my -butter and sometimes help myself twice.”</p> - -<p>“That may be,” I replied, “but for the life -of me, I could not eat your raw fish, and many -other dishes.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span>“Pshaw! It is on account of an imagination -which we call prejudice. You don’t possess -the nerve to try them, and if you did from -some reason, for instance false shame, they -would probably upset your stomach. You could -not turn my stomach in those days, child -though I was, but sometimes you tried me -pretty severely. When I came home that first -evening, I told my father all about you, and if -you had heard my description, I do not think -that you would have felt flattered. But he told -me to cultivate your acquaintance, and his -word was law.</p> - -<p>“It took me sometime to grow accustomed -to—to—, well, I shall draw it mild, to your -lack of manners and of good breeding. But -then, as my father explained to me, you were -only a barbarian, and without any education; -and you were, or tried to be, kind; I appreciated -that. So you taught me English, and I -taught you Japanese, and you tested my self-control -by the funny mistakes you made. Let -me see how long is that ago? Twenty-six<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span> -years? How long will it be before you can -speak Japanese, do you think?”</p> - -<p>“Come, that is rather rough on me,” I -laughed. “I find I can get along very well.”</p> - -<p>“Yes? I always did admire my fellow-countrymen. -They have now another claim to -my regard. I speak in Japanese with you for -the sake of old times; but, do you know that I -sometimes need all my equanimity to bear with -the way in which you murder our language. -Sometimes you use expressions as if I were -your superior in rank; that is all right and -proper; but when, a moment late, you hurl a -word at my head fit only for a coolie or a servant, -I admire the perfect control I have of my -temper. No!” he continued slowly and looking -thoughtfully at me, “I don’t think you will -ever learn Japanese.”</p> - -<p>“I am satisfied with what I know,” I replied, -“but if my use of your tongue shocks your ear, -I am willing to converse in English, and I -promise you that I shall not criticize either your -pronunciation or grammar.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span>He bowed ceremoniously and replied: “No, -thank you! When I am in the United States, -or in England, I speak English and try to act -as regardless of the feelings of others as your -fellow Anglo-Saxons act. As soon as I begin -to think in English, it seems as if I forget that -I am a Japanese gentleman.”</p> - -<p>“You must have mastered our language better -than I have yours, then, for when I speak in -Japanese I can never bring myself to use those -elegant circumlocutions which we call by a name -which to us has an ugly sound.”</p> - -<p>This time it was my friend’s turn to laugh. -“Do you remember when poor Kato first came -to see you? We were at our lessons, and he to -do you honor had spent a few days in learning -the phrases: ‘I have heard of your famous -name,’ and ‘I am happy to see your face.’ He -came in and recited those two sentences in very -fair English, I thought. I see you jumping up -yet. What a spitfire you were! Poor Kato! -He did not know what to make of it. You -roared: ‘Now, what is the use of talking that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span> -way? You never heard of my name, for it is -not famous, and you don’t care about my face -any more than I care about yours.’ Kato’s stock -of English was exhausted, and he politely requested -me to come to his assistance. Well, I -had manners if you had not, so I told him that -you were overpowered at the honor of his call, -and that this was your manner to invite him to -make himself at home.”</p> - -<p>“So that was the reason that fellow bored me -until eleven o’clock. I owe you one for that!”</p> - -<p>“Yes? We paid you foreigners well in those -days, more than we could really afford, but -most of you were worth the money. Not on -account of the duties you performed, not always -satisfactorily but generally to the best of -your ability, but on account of the never failing -amusement you afforded us. At a time when -you thought yourself a fair Japanese scholar I -have heard you criticized right before you, and -you were as unconscious as a babe.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t you think that you show by what -you say the real difference between you and our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</a></span> -race. By your own confession, I showed you -kindness, and, my memory deceives me badly, -or you reciprocated to some extent my friendship -for you. Yet you could stand by and patiently -listen to an adverse criticism of one who -was your friend, and, instead of resenting it, -as I would have done in a similar case, you -could be amused by it.”</p> - -<p>“Ah! but you forget. At that time you -were still an object of suspicion to us. Shimonoseki -and Kagoshima were recent recollections, -and we were eating humble-pie. It is -different now. We know your strength and -your weakness and we know also our own -strength, and we can magnanimously condescend -to treat you as our equals. At that time -the whole nation dissembled; we hated you and -every foreigner, although we treated you so as -to flatter your conceit. It does not raise a people -in its own eyes when it forces itself to discard, -even for a time, its national pride, and -pretend to honor those whom it despises and -hates. I tell you, my old friend, I am proud<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</a></span> -of my country and of my people. We passed -through a fiery ordeal, and came out purified. -But I acknowledge also that the fire has left -scars which only time can heal. We are growing -better, not worse. The fact that we two -still find pleasure in each other’s company -proves that we are better able to appreciate -each other’s good qualities, and that is a type of -the feeling of Japan toward foreign nations.”</p> - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</a></span></p> -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[Pg 241]</a></span> -<h2 class="nobreak">NOTES</h2></div> - -<p class="center"><i>Meanings and Pronunciation of Japanese Words used in -the Text.</i></p> - - -<blockquote> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A1">1. Pron. Day-shee-mah, little island.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A2">2. Pron. Nang-ah-sah-kee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A3">3. Pron. Shoh-goon. General-in-chief.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A4">4. Pron. Die-mee-yoh. This word means Great Name.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A5">5. Pron. Sah-moo-rye.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A6">6. Pron. Yed-doh, now Tokyo (pron. To-kee-yoh), or -Eastern Capital. Yedo was the capital of Old -Japan, from 1600 to 1868.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A7">7. Pron. Kee-yoh-toh, the real capital of Old Japan.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A8">8. Pron. Ten-shee Sah-mah. Lord of Heaven.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A9">9. Pron. Toh-koo-ngah-wah.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A10">10. Pron. Ee-yay-yas.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A11">11. Pron. Say-kee-gah-hah-rah.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A12">12. Pron. Moh-ree.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A13">13. Pron. Cho-shu, in the southwest part of the Island -of Hondo, the mainland of Japan.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A14">14. Pron. yash-kee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A15">15. Pron. Ee-yay-meets.</a></p> - - - -<p class="hangingindent"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[Pg 242]</a></span><a name="A16">16. Pron. Moots′-shtoh.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A17">17. Pron. hah-kah-mah, loose trousers, part of the dress -reserved to knights and nobles.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A18">18. Pron. kah-yah-kee, a hardwood.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A19">19. Pron. show-jee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A20">20. Pron. ah-may.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A21">21. Pron. hee-bat-chee, a charcoal brazier, to warm the -hands or light the pipe.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A22">22. Pron. ke-moh-noh.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A23">23. Pron. Hie, hie! meaning “yes” or “coming”.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A24">24. I have translated the conversations in intelligible -English. To give the forms of self-abasement of -the speaker, and the titles of honor to the person -addressed, would sound ridiculous to us.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A25">25. Pron. On-nah Die-gah-koo, a book giving the rules -for married women.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A26">26. Pron. sah-kee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A27">27. Pron. Hat′ toh ree.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A28">28. Pron. mets′ kay, an official spy, appointed by the -Shogun government.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A29">29. Pron. Go-roh-jiu (<i>u</i> the French sound), Hon. Great -Council which issued all orders from the Shogun -to the great Daimiyo.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A30">30. Pron. Sah-wah.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A31">31. Pron. noh-ree-moh-noh, a sort of sedan chair.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A32">32. Pron. Ee-toh.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A33">33. Pron. Toh-kie-doh, the great highway running from -Tokyo to Kyoto.</a></p> - - - -<p class="hangingindent"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[Pg 243]</a></span><a name="A34">34. Pron. Mee-toh and I-dzoo, two clans belonging to -the Tokugawa family.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A35">35. Pron. Ee-ee Nah-oh-skay, Daimiyo of Hikoni and -regent of Japan, who was afterwards assassinated.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A36">36. Pron. Ee-no-yay.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A37">37. Pron. how-ree, a thin mantlet of crpe, with the -coat of arms worked on the back and sleeves.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A38">38. Pron. Kee-ee, and Oh-wah-ree, the two estates -taken from Choshiu and given to the sons of -Iyeyasu.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A39">39. Pron. Shtah nee eeroo.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A40">40. Pron. Ay-kee-chee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A41">41. Pron. f′ton.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A42">42. The legacy of Iyeyasu, the law book of Old Japan.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A43">43. The plain, east of the Hakone Mountains which -contains Yedo.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A44">44. Pron. Nah-kah-sen-doh, another highway between -Yedo and Kyoto. In the narrowest passes of -both roads barriers were placed which no one -could pass, except when provided with passports -from the government.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A45">45. Pron. roh-neen, a samurai who did not belong to -a clan. The Yedo government held the clan -responsible for the acts of its samurai.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A46">46. Pron. Foo-jee, Kano’s chief retainer.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A47">47. Pron. Yah-doh-yah, an inn.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A48">48. Pron. hee-yahk-show, literally peasant.</a></p> - - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A49">49. Pron. Kodz′kie.</a></p> - - - -<p class="hangingindent"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[Pg 244]</a></span><a name="A50">50. Pron. ee-chee-roh-koo nee-chee, literally one-six-day. -Until 1874 every fifth day was a holiday -for the samurai; these days were the 1st, 6th, -11th, 16th, etc.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A51">51. O before a name means honorable. Pron. O Kee-chee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A52">52. Pron. tah-tah-mee, thick rush mats.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A53">53. Pron. ree-yoh, old Japanese coin equal to about -$1.00.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A54">54. Pron. neen-zoh-koo, a coolie or day laborer.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A55">55. Pron. yah-shwee moh-noh, the name by which the -Roman Catholics were known.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A56">56. Issued Jan. 27, 1614.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A57">57. Pron. Ty Coon. This is really a Chinese word and -means Great Prince.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A58">58. Pron. O Ee-shah-sahn.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A59">59. Pron. nar-rah foo-doh! which may be translated -by; Is that so?—You don’t say so! and similar -expressions.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A60">60. Pron. hat′-to-bah, jetty or landing.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A61">61. Pron. Ay-to.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A62">62. Pron. Tay-rah-jee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A63">63. Pron. Kah-mee′-shee-moh.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A64">64. Pron. sep′ poo-koo, suicide by disemboweling, commonly -called hara-kiri. Pron. hah-rah′ kee-ree′.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A65">65. Pron. Ee-yay-sah-dah.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A66">66. Pron. Mee-toh. Of the three great Tokugawa -families, Mito, Kii, and Owari, Mito, by a secret</a><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[Pg 245]</a></span> -clause in Iyeyasu’s will was debarred from succeeding -as Shogun.</p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A67">67. Pron. Koong-ay, court nobles, descendants from -former emperors, who held the same position at -the court as did the councillors in the clan.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A68">68. The Court of Tenshi sawa.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A69">69. Pron. Son-noh Joe-ee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A70">70. Saru-me (pron. sah roo may), an approbrious term -used to express contempt and indignation.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A71">71. Pron. Yah-mah-toh Dah-mash-yee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A72">72. Pron. Kah-ras-soo Mah-roo.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A73">73. A kuge was of much higher rank than a daimiyo, -and even of the Shogun. They did not mention -the daimiyo by their estate, but by their family -name.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A74">74. Pron. Mee-yah, families accounted as Princes of -the Blood. Most of them were nurtured like the -daimiyo, and wholly unable to think for themselves.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A75">75. Pron. Nee-joh, one of the leading Kuge families.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A76">76. Pron. kah-kay-moh-noh, hanging scroll.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A77">77. Pron. Shee-mad-zoo, family name of the lord of -Satsuma.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A78">78. According to Confucius.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A79">79. This document is quoted in F. O. Adams’ History -of Japan.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A80">80. Pron. Shee-moh-noh-say-kee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A81">81. Pron. Ee-chee-joe, Nee-joe, Hee-gash-ee Koo-zay.</a></p> - - - -<p class="hangingindent"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[Pg 246]</a></span><a name="A82">82. Nijo refers to the repulse of the Tartars in <small>A. D.</small> -1281.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A83">83. Pron. Ee-say.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A84">84. Pron. tsoo-boh, a square measure.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A85">85. Pron. ty-foo, our typhoon; lit. great storm.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A86">86. A member of the Imperial family, addressing one of -inferior rank of the same, uses the given name. -Iwakura’s given name was Tomomi.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A87">87. There is a street of that name in Kyoto.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A88">88. Pron. Foo-shee-mee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A89">89. Pron. Cho-tay-kee, <i>i. e.</i>, rebel against Tenshi Sama.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A90">90. Pron. Kay-kee.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A91">91. Confucius.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A92">92. Pron. Oh-dah-wah-rah, a town at the foot of the -Hakome range.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A93">93. Pron. Oh-sah-shtoh.</a></p> - -<p class="hangingindent"><a name="A94">94. Pron. Koh-may.</a></p></blockquote> - - -<p class="ph2">THE END</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak">FOOTNOTES:</h2></div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1"><span class="label">[A]</span></a> It was the American fleet, under Commodore Perry, -who was sent by President Millard Fillmore to make a -treaty with Japan.</p></div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_B_2" id="Footnote_B_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_2"><span class="label">[B]</span></a> In the month of September, 1854, a series of earthquakes -began which lasted almost without interruption -until the end of December. Twenty thousand houses -and sixteen thousand fire-proof warehouses were destroyed -in Yedo alone. Over 100,000 people were reported -killed. Osaka and Hyozo were destroyed, and -Kyoto suffered considerable damage.</p></div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_C_3" id="Footnote_C_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_C_3"><span class="label">[C]</span></a> The Russian frigate <i>Diana</i>.</p></div> - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="transnote"> - -<p class="ph2">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:</p> - -<p>The cover image for this eBook was created by the transcriber from the original title page and is entered into the public domain.</p> - -<p>Obvious typographical errors have beeen corrected.</p> - -<p>Inconsistencies in hyphenation and use of diacritical marks have been retained.</p> - -<p>Archaic spelling which may have been in use at the time of original publication have been retained.</p> - -<p>Errors in numbering in the Notes section have been corrected.</p> -</div> - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A Boy of Old Japan, by Robert Van Bergen - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A BOY OF OLD JAPAN *** - -***** This file should be named 56297-h.htm or 56297-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/6/2/9/56297/ - -Produced by MFR, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 869eaec..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_004f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_004f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1b5810b..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_004f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_024f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_024f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e3e8536..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_024f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_030f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_030f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d903042..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_030f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_058f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_058f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bba74a6..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_058f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_118f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_118f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d81c4b4..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_118f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_165f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_165f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e951e15..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_165f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_228f.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_228f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2c211ca..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_228f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/56297-h/images/i_frontis.jpg b/old/56297-h/images/i_frontis.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 296f141..0000000 --- a/old/56297-h/images/i_frontis.jpg +++ /dev/null |
